JP6851693B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Conventionally, a game called pachislot is provided with a plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as a medal or coin is inserted into the game machine, and the rotation of all reels is rotated. Outputs a signal requesting a start. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. To do. The stepping motor transmits its driving force to the corresponding reels. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a game machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter, "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the combination of symbols related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols. As an example of the privilege given to the player, the payout of the game medium (medals, etc.) and the operation of the re-game (hereinafter, also referred to as "replay") in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium. , The operation of a bonus game that increases the chances of paying out game media, etc. can be mentioned.

In a conventional game machine, a song to be selectable from a plurality of songs output during the advantageous game state is determined according to the number of games played between advantageous game states that are advantageous to the player, and the determined song is selected. It is known that a player can select a song within the range (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2007-423

However, for example, the interest in selecting a song and the speed at which the game progresses differ depending on the player or the time zone during which the game is played. A gaming machine capable of making selections has been desired.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game by enabling selection of a music suitable for a player's taste and situation. And.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following first configuration.

In a gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns to play a game and can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a BB gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A music output means (for example, speakers 20L, 20R) capable of outputting a plurality of music, and
A music selection means (for example, a touch sensor module 31) that allows a player to select a music output during the special gaming state from the plurality of music.
The output content changing means (for example, the touch sensor module 31) that allows the player to change the output content of the music selected from the music selecting means is provided.
The plurality of songs include specific songs, and the plurality of songs include specific songs.
When the specific music is selected by the music selection means, the music output means has a first portion (for example, music No. 1) of the specific music in the special gaming state and a second portion following the music output means. (For example, song No. 2) can be output,
When the specific music is selected by the music selection means, the output content changing means outputs so that the music output means starts output from the second portion of the specific music in the special gaming state. A game machine whose contents can be changed.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following second configuration.

In a gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns to play a game and can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a BB gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A music output means (for example, speakers 20L, 20R) capable of outputting a plurality of music, and
A music selection means (for example, a touch sensor module 31) that allows a player to select a music output during the special gaming state from the plurality of music.
The output content changing means (for example, the touch sensor module 31) that allows the player to change the output content of the music selected from the music selecting means is provided.
The plurality of songs include specific songs, and the plurality of songs include specific songs.
When the specific music is selected by the music selection means, the music output means
When the special condition is satisfied, in the special gaming state, the first part (for example, the first part of the music) and the second part (for example, the second part of the music) in the specific music are inserted. Output and
When the special condition is not satisfied, only the first part of the specific music is output in the special gaming state.
The output content changing means is the case where the specific music is selected by the music selection means, and when the special condition is not satisfied, the music output means is the specific music in the special gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that the output content can be changed so as to start the output from the second part in the above.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following third configuration.

In a gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns to play a game and can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a BB gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A music output means (for example, speakers 20L, 20R) capable of outputting a plurality of music, and
A music selection means (for example, a touch sensor module 31) that allows a player to select a music output during the special gaming state from the plurality of music.
The output content changing means (for example, the touch sensor module 31) that allows the player to change the output content of the music selected from the music selecting means is provided.
The special gaming state is a gaming state that can be continued over a predetermined number of games (for example, 24 times).
The plurality of songs include specific songs, and the plurality of songs include specific songs.
When the specific music is selected by the music selection means, the music output means has a first portion (for example, music No. 1) of the specific music in the special gaming state and a second portion following the music output means. (For example, song No. 2) can be output,
The first part of the specific music is a time longer than the minimum time required to perform one game (for example, 4.1 seconds) multiplied by the predetermined number of times (for example, 150 seconds). Is set to
When the specific music is selected by the music selection means, the output content changing means outputs so that the music output means starts output from the second portion of the specific music in the special gaming state. A game machine whose contents can be changed.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fourth configuration.

In a gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns to play a game and can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a BB gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A music output means (for example, speakers 20L, 20R) capable of outputting a plurality of music, and
A music selection means (for example, a touch sensor module 31) that allows a player to select a music output during the special gaming state from the plurality of music.
The output content changing means (for example, the touch sensor module 31) that allows the player to change the output content of the music selected from the music selecting means is provided.
The special gaming state is a gaming state that can be continued over a predetermined number of games (for example, 24 times).
The music selection means can select a music when the special gaming state is started.
The plurality of songs include specific songs, and the plurality of songs include specific songs.
When the specific music is selected by the music selection means, the music output means has a first portion (for example, music No. 1) of the specific music in the special gaming state and a second portion following the music output means. (For example, song No. 2) can be output,
When the specific music is selected by the music selection means and the special condition is satisfied during the special gaming state, the output content changing means means that the music output means is the second in the specific music. A game machine characterized in that the output content can be changed so as to output a part.

Further, in the gaming machine having the fourth configuration, the output content changing means is such that when the specific music is selected by the music selection means, the music output means starts the special game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the output content can be changed so that the output starts from the second part of the specific music.

According to the game machine having the above configuration, it is possible to select music that matches the taste and situation of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is explanatory drawing explaining the functional flow in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance composition example in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It shows the internal structure in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention, and is the perspective view in the state which the front door is opened. It is a top view which shows the display device in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of the touch sensor module attached to the display device in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the front door in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the control system in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the main control circuit in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the auxiliary control circuit in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the touch sensor relay circuit in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bonus operation time table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the RT transition table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for a general gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT2 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT3 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT4 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table for a bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 1) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 2) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 3) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 4) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number selection table for rotating cylinder stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the first stop at the time of forward push in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the control change table at the time of forward push in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of forward push in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the irregular push stop table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority table selection table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the search order table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the game lock lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol correspondence winning operation flag data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation stop button storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority data storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the RT state of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination and the stop order in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination, the stop order, and RT transition in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the CZ (chance zone) lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in additional lottery table in CZ (chance zone) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in occurrence lottery table in CZ (chance zone) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bonus lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the G number addition lottery table in BB of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table in BB of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BR lottery table in BB of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BR1 continuous lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BR2 continuous lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional addition lottery table in BR of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional addition and promotion lottery table in BR of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional game number lottery table for additional addition A of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional game number lottery table for additional addition B of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional game number lottery table for additional addition C of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 1) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 2) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 3) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 4) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 5) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 6) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (7) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 8) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (9) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the provisional causal value lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal point lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value stock lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operating condition table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub-storage area of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a main flowchart which shows the processing example of the main control circuit of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery value change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game lock lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop initial setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lock processing at the start of a game in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority order storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority table selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sliding piece number determination processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the 2nd and 3rd stop processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line change bit check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line mask data change processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the priority pull-in control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change processing after the 2nd stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of RT control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus end check processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus operation check processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interrupt process controlled by the main CPU in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main board communication task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect registration task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect content determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of receiving a start command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pseudo-bonus processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of ART pullback processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of BR continuation processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of BR continuation determination in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the normal process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the causal value-related processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in preparation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the precursor check processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing at the time of receiving a reel stop command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the display command reception processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the penalty determination processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the non-operation command reception processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lock effect control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the accessory control task in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lamp control task in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sound control task in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the animation control task in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the touch panel control task in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the touch panel input editing process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the warning screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the hall menu task in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the hall menu screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the hall menu processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the error information history screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the maintenance process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the maintenance screen and touch panel maintenance screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the operation state display table in the maintenance screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the touch panel maintenance screen which changed the display position of the grid line in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the guide initial image displayed on the main screen and the guide menu screen displayed on a sub screen in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the state which a finger is touching the guide menu "arrangement / payout" of the guide menu screen displayed on the sub screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the state which a finger is touching the guide menu "start uni-memo" of the guide menu screen displayed on the sub screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the uni-memo initial image displayed on the main screen and the uni-memo menu screen displayed on the sub screen in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the password display image displayed on the main screen and the password input menu screen displayed on the sub screen in one Embodiment of this invention, and shows the state which a finger is touching the password input menu "E". It is a figure. It is a figure which shows the example of the password display image displayed on the main screen and the password input menu screen displayed on the sub screen in one Embodiment of this invention, and shows the state which a finger is touching the password input menu "F". It is a figure. It is a figure which shows the state which displayed "F" which concerns on the detection of selection in the password display image displayed on the main screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows other example of the password display image (password input area) and password input menu screen (keyboard display area) displayed on the main screen in one Embodiment of this invention, and shows the state where all passwords are input. It is a figure which shows. It is a figure which shows other example of the password display image (password input area) and password input menu screen (keyboard display area) displayed on the main screen in one Embodiment of this invention, and a part of a password is not input. It is a figure which shows the state. It is an enlarged view of the password display image (password input area) displayed on the main screen in one Embodiment of this invention, and is the figure explaining the transition of the display mode. It is an enlarged view of the password display image (password input area) displayed on the main screen in one Embodiment of this invention, and is the figure explaining the transition of the display mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in another specification example of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in another specification example of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bonus operation time table in another specification example of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the RT transition table in another specification example of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in another specification example of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table for a bonus in another specification example of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table for small combination / replay in another specification example of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the music selection screen at the time of a bonus operation in another specification example of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the change of the output content of the music in another specification example of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the special state control processing in another specification example of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the character customization screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining various data about the customization of a character in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline of data transfer between a game machine and a server in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance structure of the gaming machine (pachinko) in the modified example. It is an external front view of the game machine in the modification. It is an exploded perspective view of the game machine in the modification. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the game machine in the modification. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit provided in the game machine in the modification.

Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine, which is a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 158.
In the present embodiment, first, the assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT"), which is a function for navigating the establishment of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, and the winning of the replay when a specific symbol combination is displayed are displayed. A pachislot machine having an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as "ART") function in which a function in which a replay time (hereinafter referred to as "RT"), which is a gaming state in which the probability is higher than the normal time is activated, is activated at the same time will be described. ..

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described with reference to FIG.
In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium.

When a medal is inserted by the player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter, random number value) is extracted from a random number in a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means draws a lot based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. The main control circuit, which will be described later, is responsible for this internal lottery means. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the winning determination line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, re-game operation, and bonus operation are given to the player, and those related to other so-called "loss". Is provided.

Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. The reel stop control means is carried by a main control circuit described later.

In pachislot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces". When the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for 4 symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for 1 symbol.

When the internal winning combination that allows the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually sets the combination of the symbols within the specified time of 190 msec (4 frames of the symbols) on the winning determination line. Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible along. Further, the reel stop control means is specified for one or more reels, for example, when the challenge bonus (CB) which is a second type special accessory and the middle bonus (MB) which continuously operates the CB are operated. Within the time of 75 msec (for one symbol), the rotation of the reel is stopped so that the combination of the symbols is displayed as much as possible along the winning determination line. Further, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to rotate the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the winning determination line. Stop it.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the winning determination line is related to winning. The winning determination means is carried by the main control circuit described later. When it is determined by the winning determination means that the prize is related to the prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out a medal. In pachislot, the above series of flows is performed as one game.

Further, in pachislot, in the series of flows described above, video display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof is used. Various productions are performed.

When the start lever is operated, a random value for effect (hereinafter referred to as a random value for effect) is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines by lottery what to execute this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. A sub-control circuit, which will be described later, is responsible for determining the content of the effect.

When the content of the effect is determined, the effect executing means executes the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reels starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. In this way, in pachislot, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the player has an opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at). It is provided and can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure of pachislot>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a for accommodating a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that can be opened and closed with respect to the cabinet 2a.
Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one side handle 7 is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a recess for carrying the pachi-slot machine 1.

Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will be referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, and a liquid crystal display device 11 showing a specific example of the display device. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable by using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left end portion of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachislot machine 1.

The liquid crystal display device 11 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9, and performs an effect by displaying an image. The liquid crystal display device 11 includes a display unit (display screen) 11a including a display window 4 for displaying patterns drawn on the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. In the present embodiment, the image is displayed and the effect is executed using the entire display unit 11a including the display window 4.

Hereinafter, the display window 4 is referred to as a left display window 4L, a middle display window 4C, and a right display window 4R, respectively.
The display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are formed of a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. These display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are provided at positions that overlap with the arrangement areas of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front (player side), and are in front of the three reels (player side). ) Is provided. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the display window 4 through the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

In the present embodiment, the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are continuously arranged among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R is stopped. It is set to a size that can display one pattern. That is, in the frame of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R, upper, middle, and lower regions are provided for each reel, and one symbol is displayed in each region. Then, in the present embodiment, the line connecting the middle stage region of the left reel 3L, the middle stage region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage region of the right reel 3R is defined as a winning determination line for determining whether or not to win.

The front panel 10 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9, and is set to a size that covers the liquid crystal display device 11. The front panel 10 is arranged so as to be superimposed on the display unit 11a side of the liquid crystal display device 11, and has a decorative frame 100 having two panel openings 100a and 100b that expose the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11, and a decorative frame 100. It has a transparent protective cover (not shown) that closes the panel openings 100a and 100b.

The decorative frame 100 has a partition piece 112 that separates the panel opening 100a and the panel opening 100b. The two panel openings 100a and 100b are partitioned by partition pieces 112 so as to be arranged in the vertical direction. The panel opening 100a of the decorative frame 100 exposes the display portion 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11. Further, the panel opening 100b of the decorative frame 100 exposes the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

The decorative frame 100 is provided with a headlamp 21, a reel lamp 22, a decorative unit 121, and a rotating accessory unit 122. The headlamp 21 has a group of LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) and is arranged above the decorative frame 100. The reel lamp 22 has a group of LEDs, and is arranged at both ends in the left-right direction of the decorative frame 100 and in the vicinity of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. The headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 turn on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the content of the effect. The decoration unit 121 is arranged on the right side of the panel opening 100a in the decoration frame 100, and has an LED (Light Emitting Diode) (not shown). The decoration unit 121 is lit with a color and a lighting pattern corresponding to the content of the effect when a special effect or a predetermined effect is performed. The rotating accessory unit 122 is arranged on the left side of the panel opening 100a in the decorative frame 100. Further, the rotating accessory unit 122 transmits light through an accessory driving unit 124 (see FIG. 7) including a rotating accessory (gear accessory) 123 (see FIG. 6) and a stepping motor for rotating the rotating accessory 123. It has a property and has a cover member 125 that covers the rotating accessory 123. When a predetermined effect is performed, the rotating accessory 123 rotates in a pattern corresponding to the content of the effect.

A pedestal portion 12 is formed in the center of the door body 9. The pedestal portion 12 has various devices (medal insertion slot 13, MAX bet button 14, 1 bet button 15, start lever 16, stop button 17L, 17C, 17R, enter button 28, select button) to be operated by the player. 29) is provided.

The medal slot 13 is provided to receive medals dropped on the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The medals received from the medal slot 13 are used for one game up to a preset number of medals (for example, 3), and the amount exceeding the preset number of medals is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. Can be done (so-called credit function).

The MAX bet button 14 and the 1-bet button 15 are provided to determine the number of medals to be used in one game from the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a settlement button. This checkout button is provided to pull out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

The start lever 16 is provided to start the rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

The enter button 28 and the select button 29 are provided to select an arbitrary item from a plurality of selectable items on various screens (for example, see FIG. 128 described later) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. When the select button 29 is pressed, the position of the cursor for designating one of the displayed plurality of items and the highlighted item are changed. Further, the designated item is selected in response to the pressing of the enter button 28.

Further, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a 7-segment display 23 composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode). The 7-segment display 23 digitally displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter, the number of medals to be paid out) and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter, the number of credits). indicate.

A medal payout outlet 18, a medal tray 19, speakers 20L, 20R, and the like are provided at the lower part of the door body 9. The medal payout outlet 18 guides the medals discharged by driving the medal payout device 43, which will be described later, to the outside. The medal tray 19 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 18. Further, the speakers 20L and 20R output sound effects such as sound effects and music corresponding to the content of the production.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1.

The cabinet 2a is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape with one surface on the front side open. A main control board 41 constituting the main control circuit 91 is provided in the upper part of the cabinet 2a. The main control circuit 91 is a circuit that controls the main operations of the game in the pachislot machine 1 and the flow between the operations, such as determination of the internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, and determination of the presence or absence of winning. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described later.

Three reels (left reel 3L, middle reel 3C and right reel 3R) are provided in the central portion of the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 3, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio.

A medal payout device 43 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device 43) having a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one is provided in the lower portion of the cabinet 2a. On the left side of the hopper device 43 (on the left side when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front) in the cabinet 2a, a power supply device 44 for supplying necessary power to each device of the pachislot machine 1 is provided.

Further, a medal auxiliary storage 45 is provided on the right side of the hopper device 43 (on the right side when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front) in the cabinet 2a. The medal auxiliary storage 45 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 43. The medal auxiliary storage 45 is engaged with the bottom surface of the cabinet 2a, and is configured to be removable from the cabinet 2a.

An auxiliary control board 42 constituting the auxiliary control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9) described later is provided on the upper portion of the front door 2b on the back surface side (the portion opposite to the display screen side). The sub-control circuit 101 is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The specific configuration of the sub-control circuit 101 will be described later.

Further, a selector 46 is provided at a substantially central portion on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The selector 46 is a device for selecting whether or not the material, shape, and the like of medals inserted from the outside are appropriate via the medal insertion slot 13, and guides the medals determined to be appropriate to the hopper device 43. Further, although not shown in FIG. 3, a medal sensor 46S (see FIG. 7) for detecting that a proper medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 46.

[Display device and touch sensor module]
Next, the configuration of the liquid crystal display device 11 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 4 is a plan view of the liquid crystal display device 11.

As shown in FIG. 4, the liquid crystal display device 11 has a display unit 11a and a frame portion 11b that surrounds the display unit 11a. The display unit 11a is formed in a horizontally long rectangle, and has the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R described above. The frame portion 11b is formed in a rectangular frame shape surrounding the four sides of the display portion 11a.

A touch sensor module 31 is arranged on the side of the display window 4R in the display unit 11a (the side opposite to the display window 4C). That is, the touch sensor module 31 is arranged at the lower right corner of the display unit 11a.

FIG. 5 is a plan view of the touch sensor module 31.
As shown in FIG. 5, the touch sensor module 31 is a surface-type capacitance type touch sensor, and includes a sensor unit 32, a flexible printed substrate 33, and a touch sensor IC (Integrated Circuit) 34.

The sensor unit 32 is formed in the shape of a rectangular plate. The sensor unit 32 has a rectangular transparent substrate 35, electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c provided on one surface 35a of the transparent substrate 35, a transparent conductive film, and a protective cover (not shown). Examples of the material of the transparent substrate 35 include glass. The protective cover is made of a transparent material and covers the transparent conductive film and the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c.

The electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c are arranged on the outer edge of the transparent substrate 35, and the transparent conductive film is formed in a region surrounded by the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c. The electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c are electrically connected to the transparent conductive film.

The electrode pattern 36a is formed in an I shape and extends along one long side of the transparent substrate 35. The electrode pattern 36b is formed in an L shape and extends along one short side and one long side of the transparent substrate 35. Further, the electrode pattern 36c is formed in an L shape and extends along the other short side and the one long side of the transparent substrate 35. No electrode pattern is formed on the other long side of the transparent substrate 35. That is, no electrode pattern is formed on one side (the other long side) of the sensor unit 32.

The flexible printed circuit board 33 is connected to one long side of the transparent substrate 35 and has a connector 33a. The connector 33a is connected to the touch sensor relay board 73 (see FIG. 7). The electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c are electrically connected to the flexible printed circuit board 33. The touch sensor IC 34 is mounted on the flexible printed circuit board 33.

A uniform electric field is generated on the surface 35a of the transparent substrate 35 in the sensor unit 32, and when a finger touches the surface 35a (protective cover) of the transparent substrate 35, the state of the electric field on the surface 35a changes. As a result, a weak current is generated in the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c, and the current value is output to the touch sensor IC34. The touch sensor IC34 detects that the finger touches the surface 35a, the position where the finger is touching, and the finger is separated based on the current values of the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c.

As shown in FIG. 4, the portion of the electrode patterns 36b and 36c of the touch sensor module 31 along one long side of the transparent substrate 35 and the electrode pattern 36a face the right side piece of the frame portion 11b. Further, the portion of the electrode pattern 36b along one short side of the transparent substrate 35 faces the lower piece of the frame portion 11b.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory view of the front door 2b as viewed from the front. In FIG. 6, the cover member 125 of the rotating accessory unit 122 is shown transparently.
As shown in FIG. 6, the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 is exposed from the openings 100a and 100b of the front panel 10. The touch sensor module 31 is arranged on the side of the display window 4R in the display unit 11a. As a result, a touch input unit (touch panel) 31a using the touch sensor module 31 is formed on the side of the display window 4R in the display unit 11a.

The electrode patterns 36a and 36b provided on one long side and one short side of the sensor portion 32 (see FIG. 4) of the touch sensor module 31 face the frame portion 11b and are covered with the front panel 10. .. Further, although the electrode pattern 36c does not face the frame portion 11b, it is covered with the front panel 10 (partition piece 112). An electrode pattern is not formed on the other long side of the sensor unit 32 in the touch sensor module 31.

As a result, the electrode pattern of the touch sensor module 31 can be prevented from appearing at the boundary between the region where the touch input unit 31a is provided and the region where the touch input unit 31a is not provided. As a result, the boundary between the area where the touch input unit 31a is provided and the area where the touch input unit 31a is not provided can be made invisible to the player.
Hereinafter, the area of the display unit (display screen) 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 provided with the touch input unit 31a of the touch sensor module 31 may be referred to as a sub screen 113, and the other areas may be referred to as a main screen 111.

<Control system provided by pachislot>
Next, the control system included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 7.
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a control system of the pachislot machine 1.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 41 arranged in the cabinet 2a and a sub control board 42 arranged in the front door 2b.
The reel relay terminal board 51, the setting key type switch 52, the cabinet side relay board 53, the door relay terminal board 54, and the power supply board 44b of the power supply device 44 are electrically connected to the main control board 41. There is.

The reel relay terminal plate 51 is arranged inside the reel main body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 51 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 41 to the stepping motor. The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting of the pachi-slot 1 or when confirming the setting of the pachi-slot 1.

An external centralized terminal plate 56, a hopper device 43, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are electrically connected to the cabinet-side relay board 53. The cabinet-side relay board 53 relays signals output from the main control board 41 to the external centralized terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57. That is, the external centralized terminal plate 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are connected to the main control board 41 via the cabinet-side relay board 53.

The external centralized terminal plate 56 is attached to the cabinet 2a and is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. Since the hopper device 43 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 penetrates the medal auxiliary storage 45. The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 45 is full of medals.

A power switch 44a is connected to the power supply board 44b of the power supply device 44. The power switch 44a is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1.

A medal sensor 46S, a door open / close monitoring switch 61, a BET switch 62, a settlement switch 63, a start switch 64, a stop switch board 65, a game operation display board 66, and a sub relay board 67 are connected to the door relay terminal board 54. .. That is, the medal sensor 46S, the door open / close monitoring switch 61, the BET switch 62, the settlement switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66, and the sub relay board 67 are mainly connected via the door relay terminal board 54. It is connected to the control board 41.

The medal sensor 46S detects that the medal has passed through the selector 46 described above, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The door open / close monitoring switch 61 outputs a security signal for notifying the open / close of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. The BET switch 62 detects that the MAX bet button 14 and the 1-bet button 15 (see FIG. 2) are pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

The settlement switch 63 detects that the settlement button (not shown) has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The start switch 64 detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

The stop switch board 65 is a board that constitutes a circuit for stopping a rotating reel and a circuit for displaying a stoptable reel by an LED or the like. A stop switch is provided on the stop switch board 65. The stop switch detects that each of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 66 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 23 when accepting the insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatable and when the replay is performed. It is a substrate for making it. A 7-segment display 23 and an LED 69 are connected to the game operation display board 66. The LED 69, for example, lights a mark indicating the start of the game, a mark for replaying the game, and the like.

The sub-relay board 67 relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 42 and the main control board 41. Further, the sub-relay board 67 relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 42 and a plurality of boards arranged around the sub-control board 42. That is, the sub-relay board 67 includes a sub-control board 42, a sound board 71, an LED control board 72, a touch sensor relay board 73, a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74, an accessory control board 78, and an enter switch. The 75 and the select switch 79 are electrically connected.

The sub-control board 42 is connected to the main control board 41 via the door relay terminal board 54 and the sub-relay board 67. Further, the sub-control board 42 includes a sound board 71, an LED control board 72, a touch sensor relay board 73, a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74, an accessory control board 78, and an enter via a sub-relay board 67. It is electrically connected to the switch 75 and the select switch 79.

The sound board 71 outputs audio to the speakers 20L and 20R. The LED control board 72 lights a headlamp 21 and a reel lamp 22 showing a specific example of a light source according to an effect executed by the control of a sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9) to display a lighting pattern. ..

The touch sensor relay board 73 transmits the input information output from the touch sensor module 31 to the sub-control circuit 101. The circuit configuration of the touch sensor relay board 73 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 stores the open / close history of the front door 2b. Further, when the front door 2b is opened, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 outputs a signal for displaying an error to the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 42 (sub control circuit 101).

The accessory control board 78 controls the drive of the accessory drive unit 124 with the rotation pattern instructed by the sub-control circuit 101 in response to the effect executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9), and serves as a rotation. Rotate the object 123.

The enter switch 75 detects that the enter button 28 has been pressed, and outputs the detection result to the sub control board 42 via the sub relay board 67. Further, the select switch 79 detects that the select button 29 has been pressed, and outputs the detection result to the sub-control board 42 via the sub-relay board 67.

The ROM cartridge board 76 and the liquid crystal relay board 77 are connected to the sub-control board 42. The ROM cartridge substrate 76 is a substrate for managing image (video), audio, light (headlamp 21, reel lamp 22) and communication data for production. The liquid crystal relay board 77 is a board that relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 42 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 composed of the main control board 41 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachislot machine 1.

The main control circuit 91 has a microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 41 as a main component. The microcomputer 92 is composed of a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99 are connected to the main CPU 93. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

The main CPU 93 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reels have rotated).
The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index is provided, for example, with an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part, and is provided at a predetermined position on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and the light emitting part and the light receiving part are connected by rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. It is detected by a reel position detection unit (not shown) provided with a detection piece interposed between them.

Here, the management of the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) required for rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

In the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces is basically set for four symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the symbol of the left reel 3L in the middle of the display window 4 and each symbol within the range up to the symbol four ahead of the symbol can be stopped in the middle of the display window 4. It becomes a design.

<Secondary control circuit>
Next, the sub-control circuit 101 composed of the sub-control board 42 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The sub-control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub-control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a GPU (graphic processing unit) 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 76 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge board 76 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area.

A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91, and an effect registration task for extracting an effect random value and determining and registering the effect content (effect data). Is included. Further, the drawing control task and the animation control task (see FIG. 123) that control the display of the image by the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 2) based on the determined effect content, and the light from the light sources such as the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22. The lamp control task (see FIG. 121) that controls the output of the rotating accessory 123, the sound control task that controls the sound output from the speakers 20L and 20R (see FIG. 122), and the accessory control task that controls the operation of the rotating accessory 123 (FIG. 120) and the like are included.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation. Further, a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light, and the like are included.

The sub-RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

The sub CPU 102, the GPU 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and display the created image on the liquid crystal display device 11.

Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speakers 20L and 20R to output sounds such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the operation of the rotating accessory 123 according to the accessory data specified by the effect content.

<Touch sensor relay circuit>
Next, the touch sensor relay circuit 151 composed of the touch sensor relay board 73 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the touch sensor relay circuit 151.
As shown in FIG. 10, the touch sensor relay circuit 151 is electrically connected to the sub-relay board 67 and the touch sensor module 31. The touch sensor relay circuit 151 determines the operation command and the XY coordinate data based on the operation XY coordinate data supplied from the touch sensor module 31, and transmits the operation command and the XY coordinate data to the sub control circuit 101 via the sub relay board 67.

The touch sensor relay circuit 151 basically includes a touch sensor LSI (Large Scale Integration) 152, connectors 153, 154, regulators 155, 156, sub-control receive buffer 157, and sub-control transmit buffer 158. ..

A connector 154, a regulator 155, a sub-control reception buffer 157, and a sub-control transmission buffer 158 are connected to the touch sensor LSI 152. The sub-control receive buffer 157 is connected to the connector 153 and the regulator 155, and the sub-control transmit buffer 158 is connected to the connector 153 and the regulator 156.

The connector 153 is electrically connected to the connector 131 mounted on the sub-relay board 67. Further, the connector 154 is electrically connected to the above-mentioned connector 33a of the touch sensor module 31.

The regulator 155 controls the DC (direct current) 12V power supply supplied via the connector 153 to the DC 3.3V power supply, and outputs the DC (direct current) 12V power supply to the touch sensor LSI 152, the connector 154, and the sub-control reception buffer 157. Further, the regulator 156 controls the power supply of DC12V supplied via the connector 153 to the power supply of DC5V, and outputs the power supply to the sub-control transmission buffer 158.

The sub-control receive buffer 157 temporarily stores the received data (RXD) transmitted from the sub-control circuit 101 and received by the connector 153. Then, the stored received data is transmitted to the touch sensor LSI 152.

The touch sensor LSI 152 has various operation commands indicating the type of operation for the touch input unit 31a (see FIG. 6) of the touch sensor module 31 based on the touch input information supplied from the touch sensor module 31 via the connector 154. To determine. Further, the XY coordinate data is determined based on the operation XY coordinate data supplied from the touch sensor module 31.

The sub-control transmission buffer 158 stores various operation commands and XY coordinate data output from the touch sensor LSI 152. Then, various operation commands and XY coordinate data are transmitted as transmission data (TXD) to the sub-control circuit 101 via the connector 153.

In the present embodiment, since the touch sensor relay circuit determines the operation type and the XY coordinates based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor module, the processing related to the touch sensor module 31 performed by the sub-control circuit 101 is reduced. Can be done. As a result, the burden on the sub-control circuit 101 when the touch sensor module 31 is mounted can be reduced.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 39.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data that specifies the position of each symbol in each rotation direction of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and the type of the symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter, symbol code (in FIG. 11). (Refer to the symbol code table of)) and stipulate the correspondence with.

In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol arranged in the middle region of each reel in the frame of the display window 4 is defined as "0". Then, in each reel, "0" to "20" corresponding to the symbol counters are set as symbol positions in the order of proceeding in the reel rotation direction (arrow A direction in FIG. 11) with reference to the symbol position "0". Assigned to a symbol.

That is, by referring to the values of the symbol counters (“0” to “20”) and the symbol arrangement table, the symbols displayed in the upper, middle, and lower regions of each reel in the frame of the display window 4. The type of can be specified. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is "8", the upper, middle, and lower regions of the left reel 3L in the frame of the display window 4 have the symbol position "9" "9", respectively. The symbols corresponding to "watermelon", "red 7" at the symbol position "8", and "bell 1" at the symbol position "7" are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 15. The symbol combination table defines the correspondence between the combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of privilege, the display combination (storage area), and the number of payouts.

In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R along the effective line (center line) matches the combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table. It is judged as a prize. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as paying out medals and operating the replay. If the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, a so-called "loss" occurs. That is, in the present embodiment, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "loss" is not specified in the symbol combination table, so that the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "loss" is specified. The present invention is not limited to this, and the item of "loss" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly specify "loss".

The various data described in the display combination column in the symbol combination table are data for identifying the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line. The "data" in the display combination column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique combination of symbols (contents of the display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

Further, the data of the "storage area" in the display combination column is data for designating the display combination storage area (see FIG. 41 described later) in which the corresponding display combination is stored. In this embodiment, 25 display combination storage areas are provided. Then, in the present embodiment, the display combinations having the same bit pattern (1 byte data pattern) and different contents are managed as different display combinations due to the difference in the "storage area".

The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In the combination of symbols to which a numerical value of 1 or more is given as the data of the "number of payouts", the same number of medals as the numerical value is paid out.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the number of medals inserted is three, and when any one of "C_13_BEL_A" to "C_13_BEL_AP" is determined as the display combination, 13 medals are inserted. Is paid out. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, when the number of inserted medals is three and any one of "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" is determined as the display combination, 14 medals are paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z", "C_SBB_A" to "C_SBB_D", "C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E", which are display roles related to replay (replay) as display roles, "C_HOM_A"-"C_HOM_P", "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A"-"C_B_REP_P", "C_CU_REP_A", "C_CU_REP_B", "C_CD_REP_A"-"C_CD_REP_A"-"C_CD_REP_A" , "C_Small V_REP_A" to "C_Small V_REP_C", the replay (replay) is activated.

The display combination related to "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H" shown in FIG. 15 is a combination that may be displayed when the display combination related to "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D" cannot be established (missed). is there. The display combination related to these "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H" is a display combination that serves as an opportunity when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state described later.

[Bonus activation table]
Next, the bonus operating table will be described with reference to FIG. The bonus operation time table stores data stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42), the bonus end number counter, the game possible number counter, and the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 95 when the bonus is activated. It stipulates.

The game status flag is data for identifying the type of bonus game in which the operation is performed. In this embodiment, a middle bonus and a challenge bonus are provided as the types of bonus games. The middle bonus is a so-called continuous operation device for a special character of the second kind, and is hereinafter referred to as "MB". The challenge bonus is a so-called type 2 special character, and is hereinafter referred to as "CB". The operation of the CB is continuously performed while the operation of the MB is being performed.

The bonus end number counter is data for managing whether or not the specified number (payout number) that triggers the end of the bonus game has been reached. In the present embodiment, the operation of MB1 and MB2, which is started when the display of "C_MB1" or "C_MB2" is triggered, ends when the medals reaching the specified number "13" are paid out.

The playable number counter is data for managing the number of remaining games that can be played in the operation of "CB", that is, the so-called playable number of times. The operation of "CB" ends when one game is played.

[RT transition table]
Next, the RT transition table will be described with reference to FIG. The RT transition table defines the correspondence between the transition condition of the RT gaming state and the RT gaming state of the transition source and the transition destination.

In the present embodiment, five types of RT game states, RT0 game state to RT4 game state, in which the types of internal winning combinations of the replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other are provided. Then, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the RT game is that the symbol combination related to the predetermined internal winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line (the predetermined display combination is established). It triggers a transition between states.

Specifically, when the display combinations related to "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_A", "C_CU_REP_A", and "C_CU_REP_B" are established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state. In this case, the transition source (RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of RT0 gaming state, RT2 gaming state to RT4 gaming state.

Further, when the display combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state. The transition source (RT gaming state before the transition) in this case is any one of the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, and the RT4 gaming state.

Further, when the display combinations related to "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z", "C_SBB_A" to "C_SBB_D", and "C_Koyama REP_A" to "C_Koyama REP_F" are established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. To do. In this case, the transition source (RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of RT0 gaming state, RT2 gaming state, and RT4 gaming state.

Further, when the display combination related to "C_Small V_REP_A" to "C_Small V_REP_C" is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state. The transition source (RT gaming state before the transition) in this case is any of the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. Then, when the display combination related to "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_E" is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state. The transition source (RT gaming state before the transition) in this case is any one of the RT1 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) controls the transition of the RT gaming state with reference to the RT transition table. A more specific description will be given later with reference to FIG. 53.

[Internal lottery table decision table]
Next, the internal lottery table determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The internal lottery table determination table defines the correspondence between the game state, the number of medals inserted, the internal lottery table, and the number of lottery.

Specifically, in the general gaming state (MB gaming state), the internal lottery table for the general gaming state is used, and "42" is set as the number of lottery. In the present embodiment, in the MB (CB) game state, all the small winning combinations (internal winning combinations related to the payout of medals) are determined as internal winning combinations. That is, the bits related to all the small winning combinations in the internal winning combination storage area described later are turned on. It also invalidates the winnings of "MB1" and "MB2".

In the present embodiment, the internal lottery table for the general gaming state is used in the MB (CB) gaming state. However, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured to be provided with an internal lottery table used in the general gaming state and an internal lottery table used in the MB (CB) gaming state.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 23. The internal lottery table defines the correspondence between the small win / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer associated with the winning numbers in each RT game state and the lottery value when each winning number is determined. ..

The small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are data acquired as a result of the lottery performed by referring to the internal lottery table, and are defined by the internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 24 to 28) described later. It is the data for designating the internal winning combination.

In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" are sequentially subtracted by lottery values defined according to each winning number. And. An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). In other words, it means that the winning number when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur) is won, and the data points assigned to the winning number are acquired.

Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data to which the lottery value is assigned (that is, the data pointer) is determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be expressed by "the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

FIG. 19 shows an internal lottery table (RT0) for a general gaming state. The internal lottery table for the general gaming state is a table that is referred to in the RT0 gaming state, and the lottery value and the data pointer are defined according to the winning numbers 1-42.

In this embodiment, the lottery value is defined according to the settings 1 to 6. These settings 1 to 6 are provided for the game store to adjust the expected value of internal winnings such as bonuses and small wins. For example, a reset switch (not shown) and a key-type switch for setting (not shown). Is changed using.

For example, with reference to the internal lottery table for the general game state, the probability of winning the winning number "1" (abbreviated as "F_NMLRP1") in setting 6 is 7000/65536. Then, when the winning number "1" is won, "1" is acquired as a small winning combination / replay data pointer. The small role / replay data pointer "1" corresponds to the abbreviations "C_C_REP" and "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P".

Further, in the internal lottery table for the general game state, the winning numbers "12" (abbreviation "F_R1_R2_KP"), "13" (abbreviation "F_R1_KP_R2"), "19" (abbreviation "F_KP_R4_R2_1") to "22" (abbreviation "F_KP_R2") The lottery value of ") is" 0 ". Therefore, when the internal lottery table for the general game state is referred to, the winning numbers "12", "13", and "19" to "22" are not won.

When the winning numbers "12", "13", "19" to "22" are won, "12", "13", "19" to "22" are acquired as data pointers for small roles / replays. The internal winning combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" is determined (see FIG. 26 described later). Therefore, in the RT0 gaming state, the internal winning combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" is not determined, and the RT0 gaming state does not shift to the RT2 gaming state.

FIG. 20 shows an internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state. The RT1 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to in the RT1 gaming state, and the lottery value and the data pointer are defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24". In the case of the RT1 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24" of the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (see FIG. 19) is the winning number of the internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state. It is changed to the lottery value specified according to "1" to "24".

For example, in the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers "19" and "21" are "3750", respectively. As described above, when any of the small winning combination / replay data pointers "19" to "22" specified according to the winning numbers "19" to "22" is acquired, "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" The internal winning combination related to the above is decided. Therefore, in the RT1 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" may be determined, and the RT1 gaming state may shift to the RT2 gaming state.

FIG. 21 shows an internal lottery table for the RT2 gaming state. The RT2 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to in the RT2 gaming state, and the lottery value and the data pointer are defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24". In the case of the RT2 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24" of the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (see FIG. 19) is the winning number of the internal lottery table for the RT2 gaming state. It is changed to the lottery value specified according to "1" to "24".

For example, in the internal lottery table for the RT2 gaming state, the lottery values of the winning numbers "14" and "16" are "10000", respectively, and the lottery values of the winning numbers "15" and "17" are "6000", respectively. Is. The lottery value of the winning number "18" is "10846".

When any of the small winning combination / replay data pointers "14" to "18" specified according to the winning numbers "14" to "18" is acquired, "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z" and "C_SBB_A" to The internal winning combination related to "C_SBB_D" is determined (see FIG. 25). Therefore, in the case of the RT2 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z" and "C_SBB_A" to "C_SBB_D" is determined, and the RT2 gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state. There is.

FIG. 22 shows an internal lottery table for the RT3 gaming state. The RT3 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to in the RT3 gaming state, and the lottery value and the data pointer are defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24". In the case of the RT3 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24" of the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (see FIG. 19) is the winning number of the internal lottery table for the RT3 gaming state. It is changed to the lottery value specified according to "1" to "24".

For example, in the internal lottery table for the RT3 gaming state, the lottery values of the winning numbers "20" and "22" are "5000", respectively, and the lottery values of the winning numbers "23" and "24" are "8000", respectively. Is. When any of the small winning combination / replay data pointers "20", "22" to "24" specified according to the winning numbers "20", "22" to "24" is acquired, "C_small" The internal winning combination related to "V_REP_A" to "C_small V_REP_C" is determined (see FIG. 26). Therefore, in the RT3 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_small V_REP_A" to "C_small V_REP_C" may be determined, and the RT3 gaming state may shift to the RT4 gaming state. ..

In addition, when the small winning combination / replay data pointers "20" and "22" specified according to the winning numbers "20" and "22" are acquired, the internal winning combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" is assigned. It is determined. Therefore, in the RT3 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" may be determined, and the RT3 gaming state may shift to the RT2 gaming state.

FIG. 23 shows an internal lottery table for the RT4 gaming state. The internal lottery table for the RT4 game state is a table referred to in the RT4 game state, and the lottery value and the data pointer are defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24". In the case of the RT4 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24" of the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (see FIG. 19) is the winning number of the internal lottery table for the RT4 gaming state. It is changed to the lottery value specified according to "1" to "24".

For example, in the RT4 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers "12" and "13" are "13000", respectively. When the small winning combination / replay data pointers "12" and "13" specified according to the winning numbers "12" and "13" are acquired, the internal winning combination related to "C_CU_REP_A" and "C_CU_REP_B" is determined. To. Therefore, in the RT4 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_CU_REP_A" and "C_CU_REP_B" may be determined, and the RT4 gaming state may shift to the RT1 gaming state.

In addition, when the small winning combination / replay data pointers "12" and "13" specified according to the winning numbers "12" and "13" are acquired, the internal winning combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" is assigned. It is determined. Therefore, in the RT4 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" may be determined, and the RT4 gaming state may shift to the RT2 gaming state.

The winning numbers "28" to "33" in the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state shown in FIG. 19 may be won in any of the gaming states of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state, and the lottery value is Each is "2930". When the small winning combination / replay data pointers "28" to "33" specified according to the winning numbers "28" to "33" are acquired, the internal winning combination related to "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H" is determined. To.

Therefore, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H" is determined in any of the gaming states from the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. Therefore, the RT1 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, and the RT4 gaming state may shift to the RT0 gaming state.

[Internal winning combination decision table]
Next, the internal winning combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. The internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the internal winning combination. That is, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are determined, the internal winning combination is uniquely acquired.

The "internal winning combination" in the internal winning combination determination table is data for identifying a combination of symbols on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, which allows display along the effective line. The "internal winning combination" is represented by 1-byte data in the same manner as the "display combination" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 15, and is a symbol unique to each bit in the 1-byte data. Combinations are assigned. The "○" mark in the internal winning combination determination table indicates the winning internal winning combination in the acquired data pointer.

When the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are "0", the content of the "internal winning combination" is "missing", which is the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 15. Indicates that the display of all symbol combinations specified by is not permitted.

FIG. 24 shows a bonus internal winning combination determination table. The bonus internal winning combination determination table defines the internal winning combination related to the operation of the bonus game with respect to "1" of the bonus data pointer. That is, the bonus internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the bonus data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the operation of the bonus game. As shown in FIG. 24, for example, when "1" is acquired as a bonus data pointer, "C_MB1" and "C_MB2" are won as internal winning combinations.

25 to 28 show an internal winning combination determination table for small combination / replay. The small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table defines the small winning combination and the internal winning combination related to the replay (replay) for the small combination / replay data pointers "1" to "42". That is, the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the payout of medals or the internal winning combination related to the operation of the replay.

For example, when "17" is acquired as a data pointer for a small role / replay, "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z", "C_C_REP", "C_Koyama_REP_A" to "C_Koyama" are used as internal winning combinations. _REP_F "is duplicated. In addition, when "18" is acquired as a small role / replay data pointer, "C_SBB_A" to "C_SBB_D", "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P", and "C_Koyama" are used as internal winning roles. "_REP_A" to "C_Koyama_REP_F" and "C_Small V_REP_A" to "C_Small V_REP_C" are duplicated.

[Number selection table for stopping rotation]
Next, the number selection table for stopping the rotation of the cylinder will be described with reference to FIG. 29. The rotation stop number selection table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the rotation stop number. The reel stop number is data used when acquiring various data required in the reel stop initial setting process described later.

The rotating cylinder stop number selection table of the present embodiment defines a different rotating cylinder stop number for each data pointer. For example, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "3", the rotation stop number "3" is selected. When the bonus data pointer is "1", the rotation stop number "67" is selected.

1 of the US mark in the number selection table for stopping the rotation shown in FIG. 29 is in the MB game state (CB game state), and the small role / replay data pointers are “0” and “25 to 41”. Show the case. In this case, the rotation stop number "42" is selected. Further, 1 and 2 of the rice marks in the number selection table for stopping the rotation shown in FIG. 29 indicate a case where the MB game state (CB game state) is in progress. For example, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "1" during the MB game state, the rotation stop number "43" is selected.

The rotation stop number selection table of the present embodiment defines a different rotation stop number for each small combination / replay data pointer, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the rotation rotation stop number selection table according to the present invention, the same rotation rotation stop number may be specified for different small winning combination / replay data pointers to reduce data.

[Reel stop initialization table]
Next, the reel stop initial setting table will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. The reel stop initial setting table defines the correspondence between the reel stop number and various data used in the pull-in priority table selection process described later and the determination process of the number of sliding pieces of each reel described later. Specifically, the reel stop initial setting table includes a rotation cylinder stop number, a pull-in priority table selection table number, a pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, and forward push. The correspondence between the initial table change data and the table selection data at the time of irregular pressing is specified.

The pull-in priority table selection table number and the pull-in priority table number are data used in the pull-in priority table selection process. For example, if the pull-in priority table number corresponding to the turning cylinder stop number is specified in the reel stop initial setting table, it corresponds to the pull-in priority table number specified in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 37). Data related to the priority of the display combination can be acquired.

If the pull-in priority table number corresponding to the rotation stop number is not specified in the reel stop initial setting table, the pull-in priority table selection table is selected by referring to the pull-in priority table selection table (see FIG. 36). The pull-in priority table number corresponding to the table number is determined.

The forward-pressed table selection data, forward-pressed table change data, and forward-pressed table change initial data are used to specify a stop table (see FIGS. 32 to 34) to be referred to when forward-pressed. It is data. The "forward push" in the present embodiment is a stop operation when the first stop operation (first stop operation is performed) is performed on the left reel 3L, and specifically, "left middle". Corresponds to the push order (stop order) of "right" and "left and right middle". Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when either the display on the liquid crystal display device 11 and the sound output from the speakers 20L or 20R, or the push order (stop order) performed by combining these is not notified, the notification is not performed. , Stop operation by pressing forward is recommended.

The irregular pressing table selection data is data for designating a stop table (see FIG. 35) to be referred to when an irregular pressing is performed. The "irregular push" in the present embodiment is a stop operation when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R, and is a "middle left / right", "middle right / left", and "right middle". Corresponds to the pressing order of "left" and "right, left, middle".

In the present embodiment, basically, after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped within 190 msec. Specifically, any one of the number of sliding pieces "0" to "4" is added to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected, and the value corresponds to the obtained value. The symbol position is determined as the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel stops (this is referred to as a "scheduled stop position"). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is started to be stopped, and this is referred to as a "stop start position".

That is, the number of sliding pieces is the amount of rotation of the reel from the time when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S until the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped. In other words, it is the number of symbols that pass through the middle region of the corresponding reel of the display window 4 in the period from the detection of the stop operation by the stop switch 17S to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel. This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S.

With reference to the stop table, the number of sliding pieces is acquired according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table, but this is tentative, and the acquired number of sliding pieces does not immediately determine the scheduled stop position of the reel.

Further, in the present embodiment, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces than the number of sliding pieces acquired based on the stop table described later (hereinafter referred to as "sliding piece number determination data"), the pull-in priority table described later The number of sliding pieces is changed with reference to (see FIG. 37). Then, the sliding piece number determination data is referred to for determining the search order when comparing the priorities of each symbol from the stop start position to the symbol position four ahead, which is the maximum number of sliding pieces.

In the present embodiment, the stop table to be referred to is used properly according to the forward push and the irregular push. In the case of forward pressing, the first stop table for forward pressing (see FIG. 32) and the second and third stop tables for forward pressing (see FIG. 34) are referred to. On the other hand, in the case of irregular pressing, the stop table at the time of irregular pressing (see FIG. 35) is referred to.

[Stop table for first stop when pressing forward]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing will be described. The stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing shown in FIG. 32 is referred to when the table selection data at the time of forward pressing is "01". The stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing defines the correspondence between the stop start positions "0" to "20" of the left reel 3L and the slip piece number determination data and the change status.

For example, if the stop start position of the left reel 3L is "15", the slip piece number determination data becomes "0" and the change status becomes "1". The change status is used when referring to the forward press control change table (see FIG. 33), which will be described later.

[Control change table when pressing forward]
Next, the control change table at the time of forward pressing will be described with reference to FIG. 33. The forward push control change table defines the correspondence between the change target position (the position where the left reel 3L is scheduled to stop), the change status, the change status, and the second and third stop table numbers for forward push.

For example, if the change status acquired based on the stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing (see FIG. 32) is "1" and the scheduled stop position of the left reel 3L is "15", the change status is "15". It becomes "0", and the stop table number for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing becomes "12".
If the change status and the stop table number for the second and third stops at the time of forward push are not registered in the target position in the control change table at the time of forward push, the stop table number is not changed.

[Stop table for 2nd and 3rd stop when pushing forward and stop table when pushing irregularly]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35, the second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the stop table for irregular pressing will be described. The stop table for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity define 1 byte of stop data according to each of the symbol positions "0" to "20".

The second and third stop tables for forward pressing shown in FIG. 34 are referred to when the second and third stop table numbers for forward pressing are "08". Further, the irregular pressing stop table shown in FIG. 35 is referred to when the irregular pressing table selection data is "07".

Is the stop data specified in each stop table of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity appropriate as the position where the symbol position associated with itself stops the rotation of the reel? Has information on whether or not. Then, this stop data provides information on whether or not the corresponding symbol position is appropriate as a position to stop the rotation of the reel, the bit corresponding to the "A line" column in each stop table, and the "B line" column. Assign to the bit corresponding to. Further, the stop data is defined by allocating information on which of these two types of information should be adopted to the bits corresponding to the "line change" column in each stop table.

That is, the second and third stop tables for forward pushing and the stop table for irregular time specify a plurality of methods for determining the position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. Therefore, even if the stop start position is the same symbol position, the position where the rotation of the reel is stopped can be changed based on the stop position at the time of the first stop or the like. By adopting such a configuration, information can be compressed.

The data for determining the number of sliding pieces is determined as follows. First, it is specified which of the eight bit strings (the data in the leftmost column in the figure corresponds to bit 1) constituting the stop data is referred to according to the type of the stop button in which the stop operation is detected. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the column of "middle reel A line data" of bit 4 is specified.

Then, with reference to the designated bit string, it is sequentially searched whether or not "1" is specified as the corresponding data for each symbol position from the stop start position to the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces. As a result of this search, the difference from the stop start position to the symbol position for which "1" is defined as the corresponding data is calculated, and the difference is used as the sliding piece number determination data.

Whether or not to change the reference bit string from the "A line" column to the "B line" column refers to the "line change" column, and "1" is specified in the data corresponding to the stop start position. It is determined by whether or not it has been done. Then, when it is determined to change the line, the column of "B line" is specified thereafter, and the above search is performed.

[Pull-in priority table selection table]
Next, the pull-in priority table selection table will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the combination of the pull-in priority table selection table number and the stop button pressing order and the pull-in priority table number in each combination.
The attraction priority table number is data for acquiring information regarding the priority of the display combination defined in the attraction priority table (see FIG. 37).

When the left reel 3L is first stopped, the data in the "left reel first stop" column in the pull-in priority table selection table is referred to. For example, when the left reel 3L is first stopped and the attraction priority table selection table number is "1", "00" is acquired as the attraction priority table number. Then, even when the middle reel 3C is pressed at the second stop and the right reel 3R is pressed at the second stop, "00" is maintained as the pull-in priority table number.

If the pull-in priority table number is not registered at the target position in the pull-in priority table selection table, the number shown in the right column of the right reel first stop column is the pull-in priority table number. Is obtained as. For example, when the left reel 3L is first stopped and the attraction priority table selection table number is "0", the attraction priority table number is not registered at the target position. Therefore, in this case, the column on the right side of the column of the first stop of the right reel corresponding to the attraction priority table selection table number "0" is referred to, and "00" is acquired as the attraction priority table number.

[Pull-in priority table]
Next, the pull-in priority table will be described with reference to FIG. 37. The pull-in priority table defines the correspondence between the pull-in data for each storage area type in each of the pull-in priority table numbers "00" to "04" and the predetermined priority.

The pull-in priority table is used to search for a more appropriate number of slip pieces in addition to the number of slip pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order in which the symbols are preferentially stopped and displayed (pulled in) among the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Further, each of the pull-in data is the same as the "internal winning combination" in the internal winning combination determination table shown in FIGS. 24 to 28 and the "display combination" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 15. It is represented by byte data, and a unique combination of symbols is assigned to each bit in the 1-byte data.

In the present embodiment, first, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the above-mentioned stop table for first stop at the time of forward pressing (see FIG. 32). However, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces, the number is changed to the appropriate number of sliding pieces. That is, in the present embodiment, the more appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined based on the priority of the combination of symbols that are allowed to be stopped by the internal winning combination, regardless of the number of sliding pieces acquired by the stop table.

In the present embodiment, the stop display (pull-in) of the combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination having a higher priority has priority over the stop display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination having a lower priority. It is done in.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, not only the priority of the internal winning combination is different depending on the attraction priority table number, but also the number of priority divisions is different. Specifically, when the pull-in priority table numbers are "01", "03", and "04", the number of priority divisions is set to 3, and the pull-in priority table numbers are "00" and "02". In the case of, the number of priority divisions is set to 1.

Here, in order to simplify the explanation, the priority when the pull-in priority table number is "01" will be described, and the description of the priority in the other pull-in priority table numbers will be omitted.
When the pull-in priority table number is "01", the priority "1" includes "C_BAR_A", "C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4", "C_3_BEL_B1" to "C_3_BEL_B8", and "C_3_BEL_C1" to "C_3". The pull-in data corresponding to is specified.

When the pull-in priority table number is "01", the priority "2" corresponds to "C_BAR_B", "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_C", and "C_B_REP_H" to "C_B_REP_J". Data is specified.

When the pull-in priority table number is "01", the priority "3" includes "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H", "C_BAR_C" to "C_BAR_E", "C_B_REP_D" to "C_B_REP_G", and "C_B_REP_K". ~ The pull-in data corresponding to "C_B_REP_P" is specified.

[Search order table]
Next, the search sequence table will be described with reference to FIG. 38. The search order table is an order in which the number of sliding pieces is preferentially applied from a predetermined numerical range (“0” to “4” when the maximum number of sliding pieces is 4) (hereinafter, “search order”). ") Is specified.

The search order table defines the slip piece number determination data obtained based on the above-mentioned stop table and the search order thereof. That is, in the present embodiment, the order of numerical values to be applied preferentially is determined based on the number of sliding pieces determination data. Further, the search order table is provided on the assumption that there are a plurality of sliding pieces having the same priority, and is configured to apply the one having a higher search order.

In this embodiment, as described in the priority pull-in control process of FIG. 93 described later, each numerical value is searched sequentially from the lower search order “5” of the search order table, and corresponds to the search order “1”. Priority is given to the number of sliding pieces from the numerical value to be applied.

[Game lock lottery table]
Next, the game lock lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 39.
The game lock lottery table defines the lottery value of the game lock win according to the winning number related to the internal lottery during the RT4 game state. The game lock in the present embodiment is generated during the game. Specifically, when the start operation (pressing operation on the start lever 16) is detected, the occurrence of the game lock is drawn, and when the generation of the game lock is determined, the game lock is generated. While the game lock is occurring, even if the throwing operation or the stopping operation is performed, the detection is treated as invalid or delayed.

In the game lock lottery process of the present embodiment, basically, a random number value for production (random number denominator = 65536) extracted from a predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" is subtracted by a predetermined lottery value. To do. And. The lottery is performed by determining whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). In other words, it means that the game lock is won when the result of the subtraction is less than 0.

In the game lock lottery table shown in FIG. 39, the lottery value that the game lock wins when the winning numbers are "36" (abbreviation "F_strong angle check") to "41" (abbreviation "F_reach eyes"). To specify. That is, in the present embodiment, when the winning numbers are "33" to "41", whether or not to execute the game lock is drawn. For example, when the winning number is "37" (abbreviated as "F_middle stage check"), the game lock is won (executed) with a probability of 32768/65536.

[Prize winning operation flag data table for symbols]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table will be described.
The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table defines the correspondence between the reel type and the internal winning combination data that can be displayed according to the symbol of each reel displayed on the winning determination line. That is, by referring to the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table, it is possible to determine the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time. The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15).

For example, when the symbol "rip" is stopped and displayed on the winning judgment line of the left reel 3L, it can be displayed in the storage areas 1 to 25 corresponding to the symbol code "00000001" (rip) in the reel type "left". "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the internal winning combination. The data defined in the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is logically producted and stored in the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) described later.

<Structure of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configurations of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 95 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 46. Although description is omitted here (not shown), a storage area for various control data, various flags, various counters, etc. used in the above-mentioned various reel effects is also provided in the main RAM 95.

[Display combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the display combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 41. In the present embodiment, each display combination storage area is composed of display combination storage areas 1 to 26 represented by 1 byte of data.

In each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 26, when "1" is set in a predetermined bit (when it is stored), the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined bit is displayed on the valid line. Is shown. On the other hand, when all the bits are "0", it indicates that the combination of symbols related to the winning is not displayed on the valid line.

Further, the main RAM 95 is provided with an internal winning combination storage area (not shown). The internal winning combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the display combination storage area shown in FIG. 41. When "1" is set in a plurality of bits in the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 26, the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to each bit is permitted. Further, when all the bits are "0", the content of the internal winning combination is "missing".

Further, the main RAM 95 is provided with a carry-over combination storage area (not shown). When "C_MB1" and "C_MB2" are determined as the internal winning combination as a result of the internal lottery, the internal winning combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area as the carry-over combination. The carry-over combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area is not cleared until the corresponding symbol combination (for example, "Rip"-"Rip"-"Bell 2" of "C_MB1") is displayed on the winning judgment line. Is held in. Then, while the carry-over combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the carry-over combination is stored in the internal winning combination storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game status flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 42.
Each of the game state flag storage areas is composed of game state flag storage areas 1 and 2 represented by 1-byte data. In the present embodiment, in the game state flag, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2.

When "1" is stored (standing) in a predetermined bit in each of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2, the bonus game or RT corresponding to the predetermined bit is being operated. Is shown. For example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 1, the MB ("C_MB1" or "C_MB2") is being operated, and the game state is in the MB game state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 43.
The operation stop button storage area stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

For example, when the left stop button 17L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 93 distinguishes between the stop button pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Press order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 44.
The press order storage area stores a press order flag consisting of 1 byte. In the pressing order flag, each bit is assigned the type of pressing order of the stop button. For example, when the pressing order of the stop buttons is "left middle right", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 45. In the symbol code storage area, the symbol code of the reel that has been stopped most recently (symbol code storage area 1) and the displayable combination (symbol code storage area 2-29) are stored for each effective line. Reel. After all the reels are stopped, the symbol code corresponding to the display combination is stored in the symbol code storage areas 2 to 26.

In the present embodiment, when the stop control position is determined, the winning operation flag data corresponding to the symbol (code) of the stop control position is read from the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table (see FIG. 40), and the winning operation flag is read. The data is logically producted with the data already stored in the symbol code storage area. Then, the logically stacked data is stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 45. When a plurality of effective lines are provided, the same number of symbol code storage areas as the number of effective lines are provided.

[Pull-in priority data storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pull-in priority data storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 46. The pull-in priority data storage area includes a pull-in priority data storage area for the left reel, a pull-in priority data storage area for the middle reel, and a pull-in priority data storage area for the right reel. That is, the pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a priority data storage area for each type of reel.

In each attraction priority data storage area, the attraction priority data determined according to each symbol position "0" to "20" of the corresponding reel is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to the attraction priority data storage area, it is searched whether or not a more appropriate number of sliding pieces exists in addition to the number of sliding pieces determined based on the above-mentioned stop table.

The content of the priority pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority data storage area differs depending on the type of the pull-in priority table number in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 37) referred to when determining the pull-in priority data. .. Further, the pull-in priority data indicates that the larger the value, the higher the priority.

By referring to the pull-in priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol whose highest value is determined as the attraction priority data is the symbol having the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. When there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the search order defined by the above-mentioned search order table (see FIG. 38).

Although detailed description is omitted in this specification, various table data (for example, a navigation table) necessary for various production operations are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76, and various types necessary for the sub RAM 103. A storage area is appropriately provided.

<Transition flow of game state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the transition flow of the gaming state between the “RT0 gaming state” to the “RT3 gaming state” and the “BB gaming state” controlled by the main CPU 93 will be described.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, five types of gaming states of "RT0 gaming state" to "RT4 gaming state" are provided as RT gaming states. Then, the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) controls the transition between the “RT0 gaming state” and the “RT4 gaming state” with reference to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17).

First, at the time of shipment, the gaming state is "RT0 gaming state". Next, in the "RT0 game state", when the combination of the symbols related to the "bell spilled eyes" is displayed on the winning determination line, the game state shifts to the "RT1 game state". Also, in the "RT2 game state", "RT3 game state", or "RT4 game state", when the combination of symbols related to "bell spilled eyes" is displayed on the winning judgment line, the game state is "RT1 game state". To move to.
The "bell spilled eyes" in the present embodiment serve as indicators for "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H" shown in FIG.

Further, in the "RT3 game state" or the "RT4 game state", the game state shifts to the "RT1 game state" even when the combination of the symbols related to the "push order lip A" is displayed on the winning determination line.
The “pushing order rip A” in the present embodiment is a display combination of “C_CU_REP_A” and “C_CU_REP_B” shown in FIG.

In the "RT1 game state", when the combination of symbols related to the "push order lip B" is displayed on the winning determination line, the game state shifts to the "RT2 game state". Further, in the "RT3 game state" or the "RT4 game state", the game state shifts to the "RT2 game state" even when the combination of the symbols related to the "push order lip B" is displayed on the winning determination line.
The “pushing order lip B” in the present embodiment serves as a display for “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” shown in FIG.

In the "RT2 game state", when the combination of the symbols related to the "BB / RB lip" is displayed on the winning determination line, the game state shifts to the "RT3 game state".
The “BB / RB lip” in the present embodiment serves as a display for “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z” and “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D” shown in FIG.

In the "RT3 game state", when the combination of symbols related to the "push order lip C" is displayed on the winning determination line, the game state shifts to the "RT4 game state". Further, in the "RT1 game state" or the "RT2 game state", the game state shifts to the "RT4 game state" even when the combination of the symbols related to the "push order lip C" is displayed on the winning determination line.
The “pushing order lip C” in the present embodiment is a display combination of “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” shown in FIG.

In "RT1 game state", "RT2 game state", "RT3 game state" or "RT4 game state", if the combination of symbols related to the "lower bell" is displayed on the winning judgment line, the game state is " It shifts to "RT0 game state".
The "lower bell" in the present embodiment serves as a display for "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_E" shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, the first ART is executed when the player is in the "RT3 game state", and the second ART is executed when the player is in the "RT4 game state". The "RT3 gaming state" shifts when the display combinations of "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z" and "C_SBB_A" to "C_SBB_D" are established during the RT2 gaming state. For example, the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS_A" is "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7". That is, a combination of symbols based on the number "7", which is usually adopted as a combination of symbols related to the operation of the bonus (in addition, a design having better visibility than other symbols may be used) is used. When the stop display is displayed, the gaming state shifts to the "RT3 gaming state", and the first ART is executed. Therefore, the first ART executed during the RT3 gaming state is referred to as a "pseudo-bonus".

In the present embodiment, when the execution of the first ART is determined in the RT1 game state, the stop order (display assistance) for displaying the combination of symbols related to the "push order lip B" on the winning determination line. Information) is notified, and it waits for the combination of symbols related to "pushing order lip B" to be displayed on the winning determination line. After that, when the combination of the symbols related to the "push order lip B" is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts from the "RT1 gaming state" to the "RT2 gaming state".

Then, in the "RT2 game state", the display auxiliary information for displaying the combination of the symbols related to the "BB / RB lip" on the winning determination line is notified. After that, when the combination of the symbols related to the "BB / RB lip" is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts from the "RT2 gaming state" to the "RT3 gaming state". As a result, the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the second ART is determined in the "RT1 game state", "RT2 game state", or "RT3 game state", the symbol related to "push order lip C" is used. Notify the stop order (display auxiliary information) for displaying the combination on the winning judgment line. Then, it waits for the combination of symbols related to "pushing order lip C" to be displayed on the winning determination line. After that, when the combination of the symbols related to the "push order lip C" is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to the "RT4 gaming state". As a result, the second ART (pseudo-bonus) is executed.

[Correspondence table between internal winning combination and stop order]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the stop order will be described.
FIG. 48 is a correspondence table between the internal winning combination and the stop order, and shows the types of display combinations according to the stop order.

“C_CU_REP” described in FIG. 48 indicates a display combination (“C_CU_REP_A”, “C_CU_REP_B”) in which the transition to the RT1 gaming state is determined. Then, "C_CD_REP" indicates a display combination ("C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I") in which the transition to the RT2 gaming state is determined. Further, the “normal rip” indicates a display combination (“C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”) related to the re-game that is not related to the transition of the game state.

Further, "C_BNS" indicates a display combination ("C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z") in which the transition to the RT3 gaming state (first ART) is determined. As for "C_BNS * 1", when the stop control using the stop table is performed, "C_BNS_A" is most likely to be displayed, and "C_BNS_O" to "C_BNS_T" are not displayed. Further, in "C_BNS * 2", when the stop control using the stop table is performed, "C_BNS_O" is most likely to be displayed, and "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_N" and "C_BNS_U" to "C_BNS_Z" are not displayed.

“C_SBB” indicates a display combination (“C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D”) in which the transition to the RT3 gaming state (first ART) is determined. Then, "C_small V" indicates a display combination ("C_small V_REP_A" to "C_small V_REP_C") in which the transition to the RT4 gaming state (second ART) is determined.

“C_3_BEL” indicates a display combination (“C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”, “C_3_BEL_B1” to “C_3_BEL_B8”, “C_3_BEL_C1” to “C_3_BEL_C4”) not related to the transition of the gaming state. When "C_3_BEL" is established, three medals are paid out. Similar to "C_3_BEL", "C_9_BEL" indicates a display combination ("C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D") that is not related to the transition of the gaming state. If "C_9_BEL" is established, 9 medals will be paid out.

“C_ONE” indicates a display combination (“C_ONE_A” to “C_ONE_E”) in which the transition to the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state) is determined. “C_HAZ” indicates a display combination (“C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H”) in which the transition to the RT1 gaming state is determined.

Further, "C_13_BEL" indicates a display combination ("C_13_BEL_A" to "C_13_BEL_AP") not related to the transition of the gaming state, and "C_14_BEL" indicates a display combination ("C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL"" not related to the transition of the gaming state. C_14_BEL_K ") is shown. When "C_13_BEL" is established, 13 medals are paid out, and when "C_14_BEL" is established, 14 medals are paid out.

During the MB game state, either "C_13_BEL" or "C_14_BEL" can be established, and the process ends when more than 13 medals are paid out. For example, when "C_14_BEL" is established in the first game in the MB game state, the MB game state ends in that game. As a result, the player acquires 11 medals (14 (payout number) -3 (insertion number) = 11 (acquisition number)).

On the other hand, when "C_13_BEL" is established in the first game and "C_14_BEL" is established in the second game during the MB game state, the player has 21 cards (27 (payout number) -6 (input number) = 21 ( The number of medals won)) can be won. In the MB game state, the winning numbers "1" (rotation stop number "43"), "4" (rotation stop number "46"), "19" (rotation stop number "61") , "21" (rotation stop number "63") is determined, "C_14_BEL" is established in the first game.

In the present embodiment, the stop display of the combination of various symbols related to the replay such as "C_CU_REP" and "C_CD_REP", and the combination of various symbols related to "bell" such as "C_ONE", "C_3_BEL" and "C_9_BEL" The push order (stop order) is set for each success or failure of the stop display.

For example, in the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "12", the internal winning combination is "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P", "C_CU_REP_A", "C_CU_REP_B" and "C_CU_REP_B". "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" win. Further, in the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "12", "12" is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, "C_CU_REP"("C_CU_REP_A") is provided on the condition that the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is "left middle right" or "left and right middle".
, Or any of "C_CU_REP_B"), the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed.
Further, on the condition that the stop order is "middle left / right" or "middle right / left", the combination of symbols related to "C_CD_REP" (any of "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I") is stopped and displayed.
In addition, the combination of symbols related to "normal rip" (any of "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P") is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". Will be done.

In the non-MB game state, when the data pointer for the small role / replay is "14", the internal winning combination is "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_J", "C_BNS_O" to "C_B".
"NS_T", "C_BNS_Y", "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P", "C_Small V_REP_A" to "C_Small V_REP_F" win. Further, in the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "14", "14" is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, "normal rip"("C_C_REP","C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P"", provided that the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is "middle left / right" or "middle right / left". The combination of symbols related to any of) is stopped and displayed.
In addition, the combination of symbols related to any of "C_BNS * 1"("C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_J", "C_BNS_Y") is stopped on condition that the stop order is "left middle right" and "left and right middle". Is displayed.
If the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left" and the stop operation timing is a predetermined timing (correct answer), any of "C_BNS * 2"("C_BNS_O" to "C_BNS_T"). The combination of symbols related to () is stopped and displayed. If the timing of the stop operation is not a predetermined timing (correct answer), the combination of symbols related to "C_Koyama REP_A" to "C_Koyama REP_F" is stopped and displayed.

In the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "25", the internal winning combination is "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D", "C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4", "C_3_BEL_B1" to "C_3_B1" to "C_3_B1". , "C_3_BEL_C1" to "C_3_BEL_C4", "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_E" win. Further, in the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "25", "25" is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, "C_3_BEL"("C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4", "C_3_BEL_B1", provided that the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is "left middle right" or "left and right middle". ~ "C_3_BEL_B8", "C_3_BEL_C1" ~ "C_3_BEL_C4")) The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed.
Further, on the condition that the stop order is "middle left / right" and "middle right / left", the combination of symbols related to "C_9_BEL" (any of "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D") is stopped and displayed.
Further, the combination of symbols related to "C_ONE" (any of "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_E") is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left".

In the non-MB game state, when the data pointer for small win / replay is "28", the internal winning wins are "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D", "C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4", "C_CHN_A", and "C_ONE_A". ~ "C_ONE_E"
Wins. Further, in the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "28", "28" is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, if the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is "left middle right" or "left and right middle", and the stop button pressing timing for the rotating reel is a predetermined timing (correct answer). , "C_3_BEL" (any of "C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4") is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, if the stop order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle" and the stop button pressing timing for the rotating reel is other than the predetermined timing (incorrect answer), "C_HAZ" ("C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H") The combination of symbols related to (any of)) is stopped and displayed. As a result, medals are not paid out.

Therefore, if the stop order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle" and the stop button pressing timing is a predetermined timing (correct answer), three medals are paid out. If the timing of pressing the stop button is other than the predetermined timing (incorrect answer), the medal is not paid out.

Further, on the condition that the stop order is "middle left / right" and "middle right / left", the combination of symbols related to "C_9_BEL" (any of "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D") is stopped and displayed. As a result, nine medals will be paid out.
Further, the combination of symbols related to "C_ONE" (any of "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_E") is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". As a result, one medal is paid out.

[Correspondence table of internal winning combination, stop order and RT transition]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop order, and the RT transition will be described.
FIG. 49 is a correspondence table between the internal winning combination, the stop order, and the RT shift, and shows the shift destination of the RT game state according to the stop order.

In the non-MB game state, when the data pointer for small combination / replay is "12", the symbol related to "normal lip" is provided on the condition that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". The combination is stopped and displayed. As a result, the RT game state is not changed.

For example, in the RT4 gaming state (second ART), if the end of the RT4 gaming state has not been determined, a notification that the stop order should be "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left" (display auxiliary information) is notified. To do. As a result, the combination of symbols related to the "normal lip" is stopped and displayed, and the RT4 gaming state is maintained. That is, in order not to shift from the RT4 gaming state (second ART) to another RT gaming state, it is notified that the stop order should be set to "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left".

In the non-MB game state, when the data pointer for small combination / replay is "14", it is set to "C_BNS (* 1)" on condition that the stop order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle". The combination of such symbols is stopped and displayed. As a result, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

For example, when the transition of the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the "BB flag" or "BB preparing flag" described later is on, the stop order is set to "left middle right" or "left and right". Notifies that it is good to set it to "medium" and that it is good to aim for the stop display of the combination of the symbols "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" (display auxiliary information). As a result, the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 1)" is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 1)" (combination of symbols reminiscent of BB), the stop order should be "left middle right" or "left and right middle". Notifies that it is good to aim at the stop display of the combination of the symbols of "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7". In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 1)" is stopped and displayed, the sub CPU 102 starts the first ART in which the type of the pseudo bonus is BB.

On the other hand, when the transition of the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the "RB flag" or "RB preparing flag" described later is on, the stop order is set to "right left middle" or "right middle". Notifies that it is good to set it to "left" and that it is good to aim for the stop display of the combination of the symbols "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" (display auxiliary information). As a result, the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 2)" is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 2)" (combination of symbols reminiscent of RB), the stop order should be "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". Notifies that it is good to aim at the stop display of the combination of the symbols of "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7". In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 2)" is stopped and displayed, the sub CPU 102 starts the first ART in which the type of the pseudo bonus is RB.

In the non-MB game state, when the data pointer for small win / replay is "18", the combination of symbols related to "C_SBB" is provided on the condition that the stop order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle". Is stopped and displayed. As a result, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

For example, when the transition of the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the "SBB flag" or "SBB preparing flag" described later is on, the stop order is set to "left middle right" or "left and right". Notifies that it is good to set it to "medium" and that it is good to aim for the stop display of the combination of the symbols "white 7"-"white 7"-"white 7" (display auxiliary information). As a result, the combination of symbols related to "C_SBB" is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the combination of symbols related to "C_SBB" (combination of symbols reminiscent of SBB), the stop order should be "left middle right" or "left and right middle", and "white 7"- Notifies that it is good to aim at the stop display of the combination of "white 7"-"white 7" symbols.

On the other hand, when the transition of the RT3 game state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the "SBB flag" or "SBB preparing flag" is off, the stop order is changed to "middle left / right" or "middle right / left". Then, it notifies that it is good (display auxiliary information). As a result, the combination of symbols related to the "normal lip" is stopped and displayed, and the RT game state is not changed. That is, in order not to stop and display the combination of symbols related to "C_SBB" (combination of symbols reminiscent of SBB), it is notified that the stop order should be "middle left / right" or "middle right / left".

<Explanation of sub-game state>
Here, the sub-game state will be described.
In the present embodiment, various gaming states related to the effect controlled by the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) are referred to as "sub gaming states". In the present embodiment, as the sub-game state, the general state, CZ (chance zone), the first ART (pseudo-bonus), the second ART, and the preparation for ART (the second ART is started after the end of the first ART). (From the end of the first ART to the start of the second ART), BR (battle rush), and between the flags are set.

When the second ART (ART) is won by the ART lottery performed during the BB in the first ART (pseudo-bonus) (hereinafter referred to as "BB in non-ART"), after the end of the first ART, the first 2 ART is started. During the preparation for ART, it is a gaming period until the RT gaming state (RT3 gaming state) after the end of the first ART shifts to the RT4 gaming state in order to start the second ART. Specifically, when the display combination related to the unique internal winning combination ("C_small V_REP_A" to "C_small V_REP_C") is established during the ART preparation, the ART preparation is completed and the second ART is completed. Is started.

[General state]
The general state is a sub-game state executed during the RT0 game state, the RT1 game state, and the RT2 game state. During this general state, basically, for each game (game), a lottery (CZ lottery) for whether or not to shift to CZ is performed with reference to the CZ (chance zone) lottery table (see FIG. 50) described later. It is said. Then, when the transition to CZ is decided, a lottery is performed to determine the number of precursor games until the transition to CZ (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of precursor games of CZ").

As the pachislot machine of the present invention, a CZ lottery table may be used in which the number of precursor games until the transition to CZ is drawn at the same time as the lottery for whether or not to shift to CZ. That is, whether or not to shift to CZ and the number of CZ precursor games when shifting to CZ may be determined by one lottery.

[CZ (Chance Zone)]
CZ is a sub-game state executed during the RT0 game state and the RT1 game state. When the transition of CZ is determined in the general state and the games of the number of CZ precursor games are digested, the sub-game state is shifted from the general state to CZ. Then, after shifting to CZ, a notification that it is good to stop and display the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") (hereinafter referred to as "navigation aiming at black BAR"). When is performed a specified number of times, CZ ends.

When the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is stopped and displayed during CZ, the execution of the first ART is determined. Further, in the present embodiment, if a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) are exhausted before the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" is performed a predetermined number of times, the execution of the first ART is determined.

In this embodiment, "CZ1" and "CZ2" are provided as CZs. In "CZ1", "4" is set as a specified number of times to perform "navigation aiming at black BAR". That is, the "CZ1" ends when the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" is performed four times. On the other hand, in "CZ2", "10" is set as a predetermined number of times to perform "navigation aiming at black BAR". That is, the "CZ2" ends when the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" is performed 10 times. The number of times the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" of "CZ1" and "CZ2" is performed is managed by the cut-in number counter during CZ.

In "CZ1" and "CZ2", when a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") is determined as the internal winning combination, the probability of executing "navigation aiming at black BAR" is the same. In addition, the probability of executing "navigation aiming at the black BAR" when a specific internal winning combination is not determined as the internal winning combination is also the same. Therefore, "CZ2", which has a large number of specified times for "navigation aiming at black BAR", has a higher probability that the execution of the first ART is decided than "CZ1".

In addition, "CZ2" may have a higher probability of winning a bonus in the bonus lottery than "CZ1". Further, as the "CZ2" according to the game machine of the present invention, for example, the probability that a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") may be won may be higher than that of the "CZ1".

[First ART]
The first ART is a sub-game state executed during the RT3 game state, which is a so-called pseudo-bonus. For example, the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined when a bonus is won by a bonus lottery during a general state, CZ, first ART, and second ART. Further, it is determined when the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is stopped and displayed in CZ.

Further, the first ART is determined when the number of bonus winning games predetermined by lottery is exhausted after the end of the first ART. The number of games predetermined by the lottery is set in the bonus winning game number counter. The value of the bonus winning game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game played after the end of the first ART. Then, when the bonus winning game number counter becomes "0", the winning of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined.

When the second ART is started after the end of the first ART, the bonus winning game number counter is subtracted from the game in the second ART. In addition, if the bonus is won by the bonus lottery before the value of the bonus winning game counter becomes "0", or if the bonus winning is decided during CZ, the number of bonus winning games is newly decided by the lottery. Will be done.

The first ART (pseudo-bonus) is divided into three types: RB (regular bonus), BB (big bonus), and SBB (super big bonus). In the present embodiment, when the winning of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined, one of RB, BB, and SBB is determined by lottery.

The number of staying games (hereinafter, "the number of first ART start G (games)") is different between RB, BB, and SBB. In the present embodiment, the number of first ART start Gs when the type of pseudo bonus is RB is determined to be "30". Further, the number of first ART start Gs in the case of BB is determined to be "60", and the number of first ART start Gs in the case of SBB is determined to be "100".

The "first ART start G number" determined according to the type of the pseudo bonus is set in the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter. The value of the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game in the first ART (pseudo-bonus). The first ART (pseudo-bonus) ends when the value of the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter becomes "0".

The first ART is started after the games of the first ART precursor games number determined by lottery are digested and the games being prepared are passed. In the first ART precursor game, an effect of notifying whether or not the first ART (pseudo-bonus) has been won is performed. Then, when the first ART is won and the type is BB or SBB, the game during the preparation for BB is performed after the first ART precursor game is completed. On the other hand, when the type of the first ART is RB, the game during the preparation for RB is performed after the end of the first ART precursor game.

In the game during BB preparation in which the determined pseudo-bonus type is BB, the combination of symbols related to the transition to the RT2 game state (“C_CD_REP”) or the maintenance of the RT2 game state (“normal rip”) is stopped and displayed. The stop order of is notified. When the rotation stop number (see FIG. 48) is "14" to "17", the combination of symbols related to the above-mentioned "C_BNS (* 1)" (combination of symbols reminiscent of BB) is stopped. The stop order for displaying is notified. Then, when the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 1)" is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART in which the pseudo-bonus type is BB is started.

In the game during BB preparation in which the determined pseudo-bonus type is SBB, the combination of symbols related to the transition to the RT2 game state (“C_CD_REP”) or the maintenance of the RT2 game state (“normal rip”) is stopped and displayed. The stop order of is notified. Further, when the rotation stop number (see FIG. 48) is "18", the stop order for displaying the stop display of the combination of symbols related to the above-mentioned "C_SBB" (combination of symbols reminiscent of SBB) is notified. Will be done. Then, when the combination of symbols related to "C_SBB" is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART in which the pseudo-bonus type is SBB is started.

In the RB preparing game, the stop order for displaying the combination stop display of the symbols related to the transition to the RT2 game state (“C_CD_REP”) or the maintenance of the RT2 game state (“normal rip”) is notified. When the rotation stop number (see FIG. 48) is "14" to "17", the combination of symbols related to the above-mentioned "C_BNS * 2" (combination of symbols reminiscent of RB) is stopped and displayed. The stop order for is notified. Then, when the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS * 2" is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART in which the pseudo-bonus type is RB is started.

In the first ART, when the winning number related to the internal winning is a predetermined winning number, the stop order is notified. For example, in the non-MB gaming state, when the winning number related to the internal winning is "25" in the first ART, that is, when the spinning stop number "25" (see FIG. 48) is selected. Is notified of the stop order (“middle left / right” or “middle right / left”) in which the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination “C_9_BEL” is displayed so that a relatively large number of medals are paid out. When the player performs the stop operation according to the notified stop order, the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination "C_9_BEL" is displayed and nine medals are paid out. In the case of the non-MB gaming state, when the sub-gaming state is in the general state and the winning number related to the internal winning is "25", the stop order in which the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination "C_9_BEL" is displayed. Is not notified. Therefore, when the player performs the stop operation by pressing forward ("left middle right" or "left and right middle") recommended in the general state, the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination "C_3_BEL" is displayed, and three cards are displayed. The medal will be paid out. Therefore, a player who performs a stop operation according to the stop order notified during the first ART can obtain more medals than during the general state.

[Second ART]
The second ART is a sub-game state executed during the RT4 game state. For example, the second ART is performed by ART lottery during the BB in the first ART (pseudo-bonus) (hereinafter referred to as "BB in non-ART") which is started by winning other than during the second ART. Determined when ART wins. When the winning of the second ART is determined, "50" is determined as the number of games staying in the second ART (hereinafter, "the number of G (games) starting the second ART"). "50", which is the "second ART start G number", is set in the ART game number counter. The value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game in the second ART.

The second ART is started after the games of the number of the second ART precursor games determined by the lottery are digested and the games in preparation for ART are passed. In the second ART precursor game, an effect of notifying whether or not the second ART is won is performed. Then, if the second ART is won, the ART preparing game is played after the second ART precursor game is completed.

In the ART preparation game, the stop order for displaying the stop display of the combination of symbols related to the above-mentioned "C_small V" is notified. Then, when the combination of symbols related to "C_Small V" is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT4 gaming state, and the second ART is started.

In the second ART, as in the first ART, when the winning number related to the internal winning is a predetermined winning number, the stop order is notified. For example, in the non-MB gaming state, when the winning number related to the internal winning is "25" in the second ART, that is, when the spinning stop number "25" (see FIG. 48) is selected. Is notified of the stop order (“middle left / right” or “middle right / left”) in which the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination “C_9_BEL” is displayed so that a relatively large number of medals are paid out. When the player performs the stop operation according to the notified stop order, the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination "C_9_BEL" is displayed and nine medals are paid out. In the case of the non-MB game state, when the sub-game state is in the general state and the winning number related to the internal winning is "25", the stop order in which the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination "C_9_BEL" is displayed. Is not notified. Therefore, the player who performs the stop operation according to the stop order notified during the second ART can obtain more medals than during the general state.

Further, in the second ART, when the winning number related to the internal winning is the winning number corresponding to the internal winning role related to the transition or maintenance of the RT state, for example, "C_CU_REP", "C_CD_REP", "normal rip", etc. , The player may be notified of the push order in order to shift from the RT4 state to another RT state or maintain the RT4 gaming state. For example, in the non-MB gaming state, when the winning number related to the internal winning is "12" in the second ART, that is, when the spinning stop number "12" (see FIG. 48) is selected. In addition, when the RT4 state is maintained, the stop order in which the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination "normal lip" is displayed (that is, "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left") is notified. When the player performs the stop operation according to the notified stop order, the combination of symbols related to the "normal lip" is stopped and displayed, and the RT4 game state is maintained.

In the second ART, if the winning number related to the internal winning is not a predetermined winning number, the stop order is not notified. For example, in the non-MB gaming state, when the winning numbers related to the internal winnings are "34" to "42" during the second ART, the stop order is not notified.

Further, in the second ART, the number of additional games is drawn (lottery for the number of additional games) by referring to the number of additional games lottery table (not shown) for each game (game), and the determined number of additional games is the number of ART games. Add to the counter. That is, as the number of additional games is determined in the second ART, the number of ART games increases, and the second ART, which is advantageous for the player, can be continued for a long time.

When the value of the ART game number counter becomes "0", the ART pullback process is performed. In the ART pullback process, a so-called pullback is performed in which "50" is set again in the ART game number counter with a predetermined probability. This predetermined probability can be arbitrarily set, but is set to 1% or less in the present embodiment.

In the game that is performed after the pullback is performed in the ART pullback process and before the predetermined winning number for which the stop order is notified is won, the stop operation is performed by pressing forward ("left middle right" and "left and right middle"). As long as it is done, the value of the ART game counter is not subtracted. After the pullback is performed, the value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game from the next game of the game in which the predetermined winning number (see FIGS. 29 and 48) for which the stop order is notified is won. To. Even if the game does not subtract the value of the ART game number counter, the number of additional games is drawn.

In addition, in the game performed after the pullback is performed in the ART pullback process and before the predetermined winning number for which the stop order is notified is won, if the stop operation is performed in the stop order other than the forward push, the stop operation is performed. The value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game from the game following the game in which the stop operation is performed in the stop order other than the forward push. The details of the ART pullback process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107.

[BR (Battle Rush)]
BR (battle rush) is a sub-game state related to an effect in which the number of ART games is expected to be added (added), and is executed during the second ART. The lottery for whether or not to execute this BR is for each game during BB (hereinafter referred to as "BB during ART") in the first ART (pseudo-bonus) started by winning during the second ART. Is done in. In addition, the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted during the period during which BR is being executed.

In BR, a BR continuation lottery is performed every predetermined number of games (“10” in the present embodiment), and when BR continuation is decided, an additional G (game) number lottery is drawn to draw an additional (additional) number of ART games. Do. The number of additional games determined by the additional G number lottery is notified in the last (10th game) game of the predetermined number of games. Further, the determined number of additional games is added to the ART game number counter.

Further, when the number of times BR continuation is determined (BR continuation number) satisfies a specific number (n times (n = 1, 2, 3 ...) Of "5" in this embodiment), the additional G number An additional G (game) number lottery, which is different from the lottery, is performed.

There are five types of additional G number lottery according to the present embodiment: "additional addition A", "additional addition B", "additional addition C1", "additional addition C2", and "additional addition C3". When the additional G number lottery is performed, the type of the additional G number lottery is determined by the additional G number lottery during BR, and the number of additional games is determined by the determined additional G number lottery.

The number of additional games to be added by the additional G number lottery is determined and notified by a special number of games (“2” in the present embodiment) that is performed after the predetermined number of games is completed. Further, the number of additional games determined by the additional G number lottery is added to the number of additional games counter. When the game of the special number of games is completed, the game of the predetermined number of games is started, and if the BR continuation is decided, the determined number of additional games is notified in the last game of the predetermined number of games. To.

In this way, in BR, when the number of ART games to be added (added) is determined, there is an opportunity for the next number of ART games to be added after the predetermined number of games. As a result, the interest in determining the addition of the number of ART games can be continued, and the interest in the game can be improved for a long period of time.

In addition, in a predetermined number of games in BR, it is possible to perform an effect in which the addition of the number of ART games is expected to be continuous. As a result, the player's expectation of obtaining an advantageous privilege (addition of the number of ART games) is maintained, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, since the continuous lottery is performed for each predetermined number of games, it is possible to suggest the result of the continuous lottery in the games of the predetermined number of games. That is, it is possible to suggest the result of the continuous lottery by using the continuous effect performed over a plurality of games. As a result, even if the game in which the addition (addition) of the number of ART games is not determined continues, the interest of the game can be prevented from deteriorating.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the number of times the continuation is decided exceeds the specified number (“20” in this embodiment), as a benefit, the first ART (pseudo-bonus) win and BR (battle) The start of the rush) is decided. As a result, the result of the continuous lottery can include an expectation other than the addition of the number of additional games, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of times the continuation is determined satisfies a specific number (n times (n = 1, 2, 3 ...) Of "5" in the present embodiment), an additional G number lottery is drawn. Another additional G number lottery is performed. As a result, the value of the number of additional games may increase due to the continuous continuation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Between flags]
This is a sub-game state in which a pseudo bonus (first ART) is won, the BB precursor flag described later is on, and the first ART precursor game is 0.

<Structure of data table stored in ROM cartridge board>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the ROHM cartridge substrate 76 will be described.

[CZ (chance zone) lottery table]
First, the CZ (chance zone) lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The CZ lottery table is referred to when the sub-game state is the general state. This CZ lottery table shows the correspondence between the winning contents of the CZ (chance zone) and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the CZ lottery using the CZ lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. The lottery value is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

As shown in FIG. 50, when the CZ lottery is performed with reference to the CZ lottery table, there is a high probability that the lottery result will be "no win". For example, when the winning number is "27" (abbreviated as "F_strong bell"), there is a probability of 32718/32768 that there is no winning, and a probability of 50/32768 that it is "CZ2 winning".

[CZ medium cut-in additional lottery table]
Next, the cut-in additional lottery table in CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 51. The cut-in additional lottery table during CZ is referred to when the sub-game state is in CZ. This cut-in additional lottery table in CZ shows the correspondence between the presence or absence of addition of a specified number of times and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the cut-in additional lottery using the cut-in additional lottery table in CZ, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected as a lottery result. The lottery value specified according to the above is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when the winning number is "27" (abbreviation "F_strong bell"), "1 addition to the specified number of times" is always determined, and the winning number is "34" (abbreviation "F_watermelon"). In that case, "1 addition to the specified number of times" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768. When "1 is added to the specified number of times" is determined, "1" is added to the value of the cut-in number counter during CZ. As a result, the number of times of performing "navigation aiming at black BAR" in CZ is increased by one.

[CZ medium cut-in occurrence lottery table]
Next, a lottery table for generating cut-in in CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 52. The cut-in occurrence lottery table during CZ is referred to when the sub-game state is in CZ. This CZ medium cut-in occurrence lottery table shows the lottery values set according to the presence or absence of the loss cut-in occurrence when the result of the internal lottery is “loss”.

In the cut-in generation lottery using the CZ medium cut-in generation lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected as a lottery result. The lottery value specified according to the above is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is "loss", "loss cut-in occurrence" is determined with a probability of 10000/32768. The lost cut-in is a "navigation aiming at the black BAR" performed when a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") does not win. In "Navigation aiming at black BAR", it is notified that it is good to stop and display the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") and the stop order (right middle left) in that case. To do. When the loss cut-in is executed, the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is not stopped and displayed.
Even when a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") is winning, "Navigation aiming at black BAR" is performed.

[Bonus lottery table]
Next, the bonus lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 53. The bonus lottery table is referred to when the sub-game state is in the general state or in the second ART. This bonus lottery table shows the correspondence between the presence or absence of a bonus winning and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the bonus lottery using the bonus lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. The lottery value is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, if the winning number is "27" (abbreviated as "F_strong bell"), the "bonus winning" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and the winning number is "34" (abbreviated as "F_watermelon"). If, the "bonus win" is determined with a probability of 326/32768. When the "bonus winning" is determined, the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is started after the first ART precursor game and the preparing game corresponding to various bonuses.

The bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 53 shows a bonus lottery table for a low probability in which the probability that the "bonus win" is determined is a predetermined probability. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, a bonus lottery table for high probability is provided, which has a higher probability that a "bonus win" is determined than a bonus lottery table for low probability. In the present embodiment, the bonus lottery table to be used is determined according to the types of a plurality of modes described later.

[Lottery table with additional G number in BB]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a lottery table for adding the number of G in BB will be described. The G number addition lottery table in BB is referred to when it is in BB in the first ART. The lottery table for adding the number of Gs in the BB shows the correspondence between the contents of the addition and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the BB medium G number addition lottery using the BB medium G number addition lottery, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is selected. The lottery value specified according to the lottery result is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, if the winning number is "27" (abbreviated as "F_strong bell"), "20G" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and the winning number is "34" (abbreviated as "F_watermelon"). In some cases, "10G" is determined with a probability of 2000/32768. When the G (game) number such as "10G" or "20G" is determined, the determined G number is added to the BB medium-high probability counter.

[ART lottery table in BB]
Next, the ART lottery table in BB will be described with reference to FIG. 55. The ART lottery table in BB shown in FIG. 55 is referred to when it is in BB during non-ART and is in a high probability state described later. This ART lottery table in BB is the second when the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers "7", "8", "10", "11"). The lottery value set according to the presence or absence of the winning of ART is shown.

In the ART lottery using the ART lottery table in BB, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. The lottery value is subtracted sequentially. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the non-ART BB and in a high probability state, the "ART winning" is always determined when the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination. This "ART winning" means that the winning of the second ART has been decided. When the "ART winning" is determined, the second ART is started after the second ART precursor game and the ART preparing game.

[BR lottery table in BB]
Next, the BR lottery table in BB will be described with reference to FIG. 56. The BR lottery table in BB is referred to when it is in BB during ART and is in a high probability state. The BR lottery table in BB is a BR winning combination when the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers "7", "8", "10", "11"). Indicates the lottery value set according to the presence or absence of.

In the BR lottery using the BR lottery table in BB, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. The lottery value is subtracted sequentially. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the BB during ART and in a high probability state, when the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination, there is a probability of 16384/32768 "Battle Rush (BR) 1". "Winning" is decided, and "Battle Rush (BR) 2 winning" is decided with a probability of 3276/32768. "BR2" has a higher probability of winning "BR continuation" in the continuous lottery than "BR1". The determined "BR1" or "BR2" is started after the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is completed.

[BR continuous lottery table]
Next, the BR continuous lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. The BR1 continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 57 is referred to when it is in BR1. Further, the BR2 continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 58 is referred to when it is in BR2. The BR1 continuous lottery table and the BR2 continuous lottery table show lottery values set according to the presence or absence of BR continuation.

In the BR1 continuous lottery table or the BR lottery using the BR2 continuous lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is selected as the lottery result. The lottery value specified according to the above is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the BR continuous lottery using the BR1 continuous lottery table, "BR continuation" is determined with a probability of 26214/32768. Further, as shown in FIG. 58, in the BR continuous lottery using the BR2 continuous lottery table, "BR continuation" is determined with a probability of 29490/32768.

[Additional extra lottery table during BR]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the additional lottery table added during BR will be described. The additional lottery table during BR is referred to when it is during BR. The additional lottery table added during BR shows the correspondence between the contents of the addition and the lottery value set according to the number of continuations of BR.

In the additional addition lottery using the additional addition lottery table in BR, first, the random number value extracted from the predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected according to the lottery result. The lottery value specified in the above is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when the number of continuations of BR is "5" (BR5th station), "additional addition A" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and "additional addition B" is determined with a probability of 9434/32768. .. Further, the "additional addition C1" is determined with a probability of 4000/32768, the "additional addition C2" is determined with a probability of 2500/32768, and the "additional addition C3" is determined with a probability of 450/32768.

[Additional addition and promotion lottery table during BR]
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the additional addition and promotion lottery table in BR will be described. The additional addition and promotion lottery table during BR is referred to when it is during BR. The additional addition and promotion lottery table in BR shows the correspondence between the contents of the addition and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the additional addition and promotion lottery using the additional addition and promotion lottery table in BR, first, the random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is set. The lottery value specified according to the lottery result is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when the winning number is "27" (abbreviation "F_strong bell"), "additional addition C1" is determined with a probability of 25768 / 32768, and "additional addition C2" is determined with a probability of 6000/32768. Will be done. In addition, "additional addition C3" is determined with a probability of 1000/32768. If it has already been decided to perform the additional additional lottery, the additional additional lottery during BR and the promotion lottery table are used to draw a lottery as to whether or not to promote to the higher additional additional lottery.

It should be noted that the higher-ranked additional additional lottery has a higher expectation (probability) that the value of the number of additional games to be determined will be larger than that of the lower-ranked additional additional lottery. In the present embodiment, "additional addition B" is higher than "additional addition A", and "additional addition C1", "additional addition C2", and "additional addition C3" are higher than "additional addition B". Further, the "additional addition C2" is higher than the "additional addition C1", and the "additional addition C3" is higher than the "additional addition C2".

[Additional addition A addition G number lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the additional addition A addition G number lottery table will be described. The additional G number lottery table for the additional additional A is referred to when the additional G number lottery related to the "additional additional A" is performed in BR. This additional addition A addition G number lottery table shows the addition G number and the lottery value set according to the addition G number.

In the additional G number lottery using the additional additional A additional G number lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is drawn. The lottery value specified according to the result is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, in the additional G number lottery using the additional additional A additional G number lottery table, "10" is determined as the "additional game number" with a probability of 12568/32768, and as the "additional game number" with a probability of 13000/32768. "20" is determined. Further, "100" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 500/32768, and "200" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 100/32768. Then, the determined value of the "additional game number" is added to the ART game number counter.

[Additional addition B addition G number lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the additional addition B addition G number lottery table will be described. The additional G number lottery table for the additional additional B is referred to when the additional G number lottery related to the "additional additional B" is performed in BR. The additional G number additional G number lottery table shows the correspondence between the additional G number and the lottery value set according to the stop operation.

The additional G number lottery using the additional additional B additional G number lottery table is performed every time a stop operation is detected. The “1 on” column shown in FIG. 62 is referred to when the first stop operation (first stop operation is performed) is performed. Further, the column of "2on_before +10" is referred to when the second stop operation (second stop operation) is performed after "10" is determined as the number of additional games in the first stop operation. To. Then, the column of "3on_before +10" is referred to when the third stop operation (third stop operation) is performed after "10" is determined as the number of additional games in the second stop operation. To.

In the additional G number lottery using the additional additional B additional G number lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is drawn. The lottery value specified according to the result is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, in the case of "1on", "20" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 13000/32768. When the second stop operation is performed after "20" is determined as the "additional game number" in the first stop operation, the column of "2on_before +20" is referred to in the additional G number lottery.

For example, in the case of "2on_before +20", "30" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 6000/32768. When the third stop operation is performed after "30" is determined as the "additional game number" in the second stop operation, the column of "3on_before +30" is referred to in the additional G number lottery.

For example, in the case of "3on_before +30", "50" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 500/32768. In this case, by performing the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation, a total of "100" is acquired as the "number of additional games", and "100" is displayed in the ART game number counter. Will be added.

With reference to the column of "2on_before +20" in FIG. 62, "0" and "10" are not determined as the number of additional games. Further, referring to the column of "2on_before +30" in FIG. 62, "0", "10" and "20" are not determined as the number of additional games. Then, referring to the column of "3on_before +50", "0", "10", "20" and "30" are not determined as the number of additional games.

In this way, in the additional G number lottery using the additional B additional G number lottery table, the number of additional games determined by the second stop operation is equal to or greater than the number of additional games determined by the first stop operation, and the third The number of additional games determined by the stop operation is equal to or greater than the number of additional games determined by the second stop operation.

[Additional addition C addition G number lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the additional addition C addition G number lottery table will be described. The additional G number lottery table for the additional C is referred to when the additional G number lottery related to the "additional additional C1", "additional additional C2", or "additional additional C3" is performed in BR. This additional G number additional G number lottery table shows the correspondence between the additional G number and the lottery value set according to the type of additional additional C (C1 to C3).

The additional G number lottery using the additional additional C additional G number lottery table is performed every time the pressing of the MAX bet button 14 is detected, and ends when "0" is determined as the "additional game number" ("0"). No continuation ").

In the additional G number lottery using the additional additional C additional G number lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is drawn. The lottery value specified according to the result is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, in the case of "additional addition C1", "0" is determined as the "additional game number" with a probability of 8918/32768. Further, in the case of "additional addition C2", "0" is determined as the "additional game number" with a probability of 4918/32768. Then, in the case of "additional addition C3", "0" is determined as the "additional game number" with a probability of 2918/32768.

Therefore, the "additional addition C2" has a higher probability that the additional G number lottery will continue than the "additional additional C1", and the "additional additional C3" has a higher probability that the additional G number lottery will continue than the "additional additional C2". high.

If the start lever 16 is operated and the next game is started when the additional G number lottery using the additional G number lottery table is started, the additional additional C additional G is automatically added. An additional G number lottery is performed using a number lottery table. Then, when "0" is determined as the "number of additional games" in the automatically added G number lottery, the automatic additional G number lottery ends. The automatic addition G number lottery may be provided with an upper limit value (for example, "1000") of the value of the "additional game number" to be determined.

Further, in the additional G number lottery using the additional additional C additional G number lottery table, a value other than "0" is determined as the "additional game number", and the start lever 16 is operated in a state where "continuation" is determined. In some cases. In this case, the "number of additional games" determined up to that point is enabled, and the additional G number lottery using the additional additional C additional G number lottery table is automatically performed. Then, the "number of additional games" determined before the automatically performed additional G number lottery is added to the "additional game number" determined in the automatically performed additional G number lottery, and the additional game is added. C Addition G number Let it be the "additional game number" obtained by the addition G number lottery using the lottery table.

[Causal value lottery table]
Next, the causal value lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 72. The causal value lottery table is referred to when the causal value lottery is performed by satisfying various conditions. This causal value lottery table shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to various conditions.

In the present embodiment, there is a possibility that a value called "causal value" is obtained in various situations where the interest of the game is lowered (the player feels uncomfortable). Then, a privilege advantageous to the player is given based on the accumulated "causal value". Therefore, even if there is a situation in which the interest of the game is lowered, there is a possibility that an advantageous privilege can be obtained after that. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game due to a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the causal value lottery using the causal value lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. The lottery value is subtracted sequentially. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

FIG. 64 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 1). This causal value lottery table (No. 1) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of G (games) between rare roles.

The rare roles according to this embodiment are "strong bell" (winning number "27"), "watermelon" (winning number "34"), "weak cherry" (winning number "35"), and "strong cherry" (winning number "35"). The numbers are "36") and "chance eyes" (win numbers "38" to "40"). The "G number between rare roles" is the number of Gs from when any of the rare roles is determined as the internal winning combination to when any of the rare roles is determined as the internal winning combination.

For example, when the "G number between rare roles" reaches "50G (game)", "1" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 3000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.
If the "G number between rare roles" exceeds "200G", a causal value lottery is performed with reference to the "200G" column every time the subsequent "G number between rare roles" increases by 100G.

FIG. 65 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 2). This causal value lottery table (No. 2) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of G (games) between bonuses. The period between bonuses is the number of Gs from the end of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) to the start of the next first ART (pseudo-bonus).

For example, when the "G number between bonuses" reaches "200G (game)", "1" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 3000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

FIG. 66 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 3). This causal value lottery table (No. 3) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of G (games) between BBs. The BB interval is the number of Gs from the end of the BB in the first ART (pseudo-bonus) to the start of the BB in the next first ART (pseudo-bonus).

For example, when the "G number between BBs" reaches "400G (game)", "3" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 2000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

FIG. 67 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 4). This causal value lottery table (No. 4) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of G (games) between ARTs. Between ARTs is the number of Gs from the end of the second ART to the start of the next second ART.

For example, when the "G number between ARTs" reaches "500G (game)", "3" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 2000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

FIG. 68 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 5). This causal value lottery table (No. 5) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of consecutive RBs. The number of consecutive RBs is the number of times that RBs are continuously drawn as a type of pseudo-bonus when the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined. The number of consecutive RBs is counted by the RB continuous counter.

For example, when the "continuous number of RBs" is "4", "5" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 1000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. Further, the value of the RB continuous counter is cleared when BB or SBB is determined in the first ART (pseudo-bonus).

FIG. 69 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 6). This causal value lottery table (No. 6)
Indicates the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of consecutive CZ (chance zone) failures. The number of consecutive CZ failures is the number of consecutive times that "CZ1" and "CZ2" end without determining the first ART (pseudo-bonus). In this embodiment, a column is also provided when the CZ failure is the first time. Further, the number of consecutive CZ failures is counted by the CZ failure continuous counter.

For example, when "the number of consecutive CZ failures" is "failure_2 consecutive", 3000/327
With a probability of 68, "1" is determined as the "causal value". The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. Further, the value of the CZ failure continuous counter is cleared when the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined in "CZ1" and "CZ2". The value of the CZ failure continuous counter may be cleared when the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is started.

FIG. 70 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 7). This causal value lottery table (No. 7) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of continuous Gs of CZ finished without determining the bonus.

For example, when the "number of continuous Gs of CZ finished without confirming the bonus" is "4G", "10" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 20000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

“CZ1” and “CZ2” are periods in which the interest of the player is enhanced because the determination of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) can be expected more than in the general game. However, since the end condition of "CZ1" and "CZ2" according to the present embodiment is the number of executions of "navigation aiming at black BAR", there is a possibility that it will end in a short period (small number of games). Therefore, when "CZ1" and "CZ2" are completed in a short period of time, the probability of giving a "causal value" or giving a "causal value" is increased. As a result, even if there is a situation in which the interest of the game in "CZ1" and "CZ2" is lowered, there is a possibility that an advantageous privilege can be obtained after that, and it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game. it can.

FIG. 71 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 8). The causal value lottery table (No. 8) is referred to when the setting of the pachislot machine 1 is changed. This causal value lottery table (No. 8) shows a causal value and a lottery value set according to the causal value.

For example, when the setting of pachislot 1 is changed, "10" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 2000/32768, and "40" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 8000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

FIG. 72 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 9). This causal value lottery table (No. 9) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of G digested during the preparation of various pseudo bonuses and ART (second ART). Further, the number of G digested during preparation is counted by the preparatory digested G number counter.

For example, when the "number of games digested during preparation" reaches "20G", "1" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 20000 / 32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. Further, the value of the preparing digestion G number counter is cleared on condition that various pseudo bonuses or the start of the second ART are started.

[Temporary causal value lottery table]
Next, the provisional causal value lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 73. The provisional causal value lottery table is referred to when the development effect fails. This provisional causal value lottery table shows the correspondence between the provisional causal value and the lottery value set according to the type of development effect.

The "development effect" according to the present embodiment is whether or not the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is won or whether or not the CZ (chance zone) is won by being continuously executed over a plurality of games. It is a production that informs you. Then, "when the development effect fails" is a case where the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is not won in the development effect, or the CZ (chance zone) is not won.

The "notification that the start of the gaming state advantageous to the player has been determined" may be notification of various winnings such as the winning of the second ART (ART). In addition, in the case of a gaming machine equipped with a bonus (so-called "BB", "MB", etc., which serves as a carry-over role), the bonus is won as "notification that the start of a gaming state advantageous to the player has been decided". Notification of what has been done can be mentioned.

In addition, the time when the "game state advantageous to the player" is started may be from the next game in which the notification is made, and a special condition is satisfied in the game after the notification is made. It may be the case. As special conditions, for example, a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination related to the bonus) has been decided, and a special symbol combination (combination of symbols related to the start of the bonus) has been stopped and displayed. Can be mentioned.

Further, the "notification that the start of the gaming state advantageous to the player has been determined" according to the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned deterministic notification of various winnings as described above, and is described above. It may be a notification suggesting various kinds of winnings. Further, the "notification that the start of the gaming state advantageous to the player has not been determined" according to the gaming machine of the present invention deterministically notifies that the various winnings as described above have not been determined. It may be a notification suggesting that various winnings have not been determined.

In the provisional causal value lottery using the provisional causal value lottery table, first, the random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) are selected according to the lottery result. The lottery value specified in the above is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, if "development effect 1" fails, "3" is determined as the "provisional causal value" with a probability of 2000/32768. On the other hand, if the "development effect 4" fails, "3" is determined as the "provisional causal value" with a probability of 3000/32768. The "causal value" is determined based on this "provisional causal value" and the "internal point" described later.

The "development effect 4" has a higher probability of being notified that the start of the gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player, has been decided than the "development effect 1". Therefore, in the "development effect 4", if it is notified that the start of the gaming state that is advantageous to the player has not been decided, the player's dissatisfaction will increase, but the advantageous privilege will be given later. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

[Internal point lottery table]
Next, the internal point lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 74. The internal point lottery table is referred to when performing an internal point lottery. Then, the internal point lottery is performed in each game. This internal point lottery table shows the correspondence between the internal points and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the internal point lottery using the internal point lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. The lottery value is subtracted sequentially. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when the winning number is "27" (abbreviation "F_strong bell"), "1" is determined as the "internal point" with a probability of 512/32768, and the "internal point" has a probability of 265/32768. "3" is determined as. The determined "internal point" is added to the internal point counter.

The value of the internal point counter is the maximum value of the "causal value" determined when the development effect fails. For example, it is assumed that "5" is determined as the "provisional causal value" by the provisional causal value lottery performed when the development effect fails, and the value of the internal point counter at that time is "10". In this case, since "10" is guaranteed as the maximum value of the "causal value", "5" of the "provisional causal value" is determined as the "causal value".

On the other hand, it is assumed that "5" is determined as the "provisional causal value" by the provisional causal value lottery, and the value of the internal point counter at that time is "3". In this case, since "3" is guaranteed as the maximum value of "causal value", "5" of "provisional causal value" is not determined as "causal value" as it is, and internal points acquired so far. "3", which is the same value as, is determined as a "causal value".
If the development effect fails and the "causal value" is determined, the value determined as the "causal value" is subtracted from the value of the internal point counter.

[Causal value stock consumption lottery table]
Next, the causal value stock consumption lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 75. The causal value stock consumption lottery table is referred to when giving a player a favorable privilege based on the value of the causal value stock. This causal value stock consumption lottery table shows the presence or absence of consumption of the causal value stock and the lottery value set according to the presence or absence of the consumption of the causal value stock.

The "causal value stock" is given when the "causal value" becomes "100" or more. Specifically, when the value of the causal value counter becomes "100" or more, "1" is added to the causal value stock counter, and "100" is subtracted from the value of the causal value counter.

In the causal value stock consumption lottery using the causal value stock consumption lottery, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected as a lottery result. The lottery value specified according to the above is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when giving an advantageous privilege to a player based on the value of the causal value stock, "no consumption" of the "causal value stock" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768. In this case, a privilege advantageous to the player is given without reducing the value of the causal value stock counter.

As a privilege given to the player based on the value of the causal value stock, it is possible to change the type of the pseudo-bonus to a higher pseudo-bonus. For example, when "BB" is determined as a pseudo bonus, the pseudo bonus is changed to "SBB". Further, when the transition to CZ1 is decided, the transition to CZ2 may be changed.

Benefits that are advantageous to the player are not given immediately when the "causal value stock" becomes 1 or more, but when specific conditions (determination of pseudo-bonus) are met, or at a specific time (determination of pseudo-bonus). It is preferable to give it when the pseudo bonus is drawn). In this case, after the "causal value stock" becomes 1 or more, it is possible to urge the player to play the game until a specific condition is satisfied or a specific time is reached.

[Operating condition table]
Next, the operating condition table will be described with reference to FIG. 76. The operating condition table is referenced during each preparation. This operating condition table shows the type being prepared and the operating (end) condition set according to the type being prepared.

For example, if the winning number "18" (abbreviated as "F_W7_KP_RT4") is won during the preparation for SBB, the preparation for SBB ends and the SBB in the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is started. If the winning numbers "14" to "17" (abbreviations "F_R7_KP_RB_0", "F_R7_KP_RB_1", "F_RB_KP_R7_0", "F_RB_KP_R7_1") are won during BB preparation, the BB preparation is completed. BB in (bonus) is started.

If the winning numbers "14" to "17" (abbreviations "F_R7_KP_RB_0", "F_R7_KP_RB_1", "F_RB_KP_R7_0", "F_RB_KP_R7_1") are won during RB preparation, the RB preparation is completed and the 1st bonus RB is started in. Also, during ART preparation, the winning numbers "18" to "24" (abbreviations "F_W7_KP_RT4", "F_KP_R4_R2_1", "F_KP_R4_R2_1", "F_KP_R2_R4-1", "F_KP_R2_R4-1", "F_KP_R2_R4_1", "F_KP_R2_R4_2" The preparation is finished and the second ART is started.

In the present embodiment, when the winning combination (winning number), which is the end condition under preparation, is won, the information (stop order navigation) for displaying the stop display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (winning number) is notified. However, even if the stop operation is performed without following the stop order navigation and the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination that is the end condition during preparation is not displayed as a stop, the preparation ends.

Therefore, when a stop operation that does not follow the stop order navigation is performed, the RT game state does not shift to the RT3 game state or the RT4 game state, and the first ART (pseudo bonus) or the second ART is set as the sub game state. Is started. As a result, the number of games for managing the first ART (pseudo-bonus) and the second ART in the sub-game state is subtracted without shifting to the RT3 game state or the RT4 game state.

<Structure of storage area provided in sub RAM>
[Sub storage area]
Next, the configuration of the sub storage area provided in the sub RAM 103 will be described with reference to FIG. 77. Although the description is omitted here (not shown), various data such as a storage area for registering the effect content and the effect number and an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8) are stored. It has a storage area and the like.

The sub storage area is "CZ1 flag", "CZ2 flag", "SBB flag", "BB flag", "RB flag", "ART flag", "BR1 flag", "RB2 flag" and "inter-flag flag". have.

The "CZ1 flag" is a flag indicating the inside of CZ1, and when it is in CZ1, "1" is stored in the "CZ1 flag". The "CZ2 flag" is a flag indicating the inside of CZ2, and when it is in CZ2, "1" is stored in the "CZ2 flag".

The "SBB flag" is a flag indicating SBB in the first ART (pseudo-bonus), and when it is in SBB, "1" is stored in the "SBB flag". The "BB flag" is a flag indicating the inside of the BB in the first ART, and when the "BB flag" is in the BB, "1" is stored in the "BB flag". The "RB flag" is a flag indicating RB in the first ART, and when it is in RB, "1" is stored in the "RB flag".
That is, when the first ART is in progress, "1" is stored in any of the "SBB flag", "BB flag", and "RB flag".

Further, the "ART flag" is a flag indicating that the second ART is in progress, and when the second ART is in progress, "1" is stored in the "ART flag".

The "BR1 flag" is a flag indicating the inside of BR1, and when it is in BR1, "1" is stored in the "BR1 flag". Further, the "RB2 flag" is a flag indicating the inside of BR2, and when it is in BR2, "1" is stored in the "BR2 flag". As described above, during BR1 and BR2, 10 games are set as one set, and one set is repeated (looped) as long as "BR continuation" continues to win by continuous lottery.

Further, the "inter-flag flag" is a flag indicating the inter-flag interval, and when the inter-flag flag is inter-flag, "1" is stored in the "inter-flag flag".

Further, the sub storage area has an "additional addition A flag", an "additional addition B flag", an "additional addition C1 flag", an "additional addition C2 flag", and an "additional addition C3 flag".

The "additional addition A flag" is a flag indicating that the additional addition A is in progress, and when the additional addition A is in progress, "1" is stored in the "additional addition A flag". The "additional addition B flag" is a flag indicating that the additional addition B is in progress, and when the additional addition B is in progress, "1" is stored in the "additional addition B flag".

The "additional addition C1 flag" is a flag indicating that the additional addition C1 is in progress, and when the additional addition C1 is in progress, "1" is stored in the "additional addition C1 flag". The "additional addition C2 flag" is a flag indicating that the additional addition C2 is in progress, and when the additional addition C2 is in progress, "1" is stored in the "additional addition C2 flag". The "additional addition C3 flag" is a flag indicating that the additional addition C3 is in progress, and when the additional addition C3 is in progress, "1" is stored in the "additional addition C3 flag". It should be noted that "1" is stored in the "additional addition C3 flag" from the time when the additional addition C3 is determined to the time when the additional addition C3 is started.

"CZ1 flag", "CZ2 flag 2", "SBB flag", "BB flag", "RB flag", "ART flag", "BR1 flag", "BR2 flag", "Additional addition A flag", "Addition" The "additional B flag", "additional addition C1 flag", "additional addition C2 flag", and "additional addition C3 flag" actually start after the execution of the corresponding effect (transition to the corresponding state) is determined. "1" is stored until.

Further, the sub storage area has "CZ1 precursor flag", "CZ2 precursor flag", "BB precursor flag", "RB precursor flag", "ART precursor flag" and "BR precursor flag".

The "CZ1 precursor flag" is a flag indicating the CZ1 precursor flag, and when the CZ1 precursor flag is in progress, "1" is stored in the "CZ1 precursor flag". The "CZ2 precursor flag" is a flag indicating the CZ2 precursor flag, and when the CZ2 precursor flag is in progress, "1" is stored in the "CZ2 precursor flag".

The "BB precursor flag" is a flag indicating the BB (SBB) precursor, and when the BB (SBB) precursor is in progress, "1" is stored in the "BB precursor flag". The "RB precursor flag" is a flag indicating the RB precursor, and when the RB precursor is in progress, "1" is stored in the "RB precursor flag".

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the bonus has been won, it is determined whether to use "SBB", "BB" or "RB". However, as the gaming machine of the present invention, when it is determined that the bonus is won, only whether or not to set it to "RB" is determined, and when it is decided not to set it to "RB", "RB" is set at the end of the precursor. You may draw a lottery as to whether it is "SB" or "BB".

The "ART precursor flag" is a flag indicating the ART (second ART) precursor, and when the ART precursor is in progress, "1" is stored in the "ART precursor flag". Further, the "BR precursor flag" is a flag indicating the BR precursor flag, and when the BR precursor flag is in progress, "1" is stored in the "BR precursor flag".

Further, the sub storage area has "SBB preparing flag", "BB preparing flag", "RB preparing flag", and "ART preparing flag".

The "SBB preparing flag" is a flag indicating that the SBB is being prepared, and when the SBB is being prepared, "1" is stored in the "SBB preparing flag". The "BB preparing flag" is a flag indicating that the BB is being prepared, and when the BB is being prepared, "1" is stored in the "SBB preparing flag".

The "RB preparing flag" is a flag indicating that the RB is being prepared, and when the RB is being prepared, "1" is stored in the "RB preparing flag". The "ART preparing flag" is a flag indicating that ART is being prepared, and when ART is being prepared, "1" is stored in the "ART preparing flag".

In the present embodiment, "preparing" means a section in which it is conceptually determined to start a predetermined state, but the start condition cannot be satisfied and the start cannot be started. During preparation, it resembles Omen, but unlike Omen, it actively encourages people to meet the starting conditions.
For example, when the occurrence of ART is determined, it is necessary to make AT and RT co-occur in order to start ART. The AT can be started immediately by the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9), while the RT is managed by the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8). However, since communication from the sub-control circuit 101 to the main control circuit 91 is not possible, in general, indirectly by performing "AT for satisfying the RT start condition by the main control circuit 91". It is urging the start of RT. That is, in general, the difference generated between the AT start timing by the sub control circuit 101 and the RT start timing by the main control circuit 91 is a section called preparation.

Then, if the determination of the ART end condition is started at the start of the AT, the AT period is included in the ART period, and in some cases, the ART period ends without the ART occurring. There is a risk. Such a game machine makes the player uncomfortable and makes design and development difficult because the period of ART assumed at the time of development (when the end condition is set) differs from the actual period of ART. It is also a factor.
Therefore, although the AT is performed until the RT (main control circuit 91 side) condition is satisfied, a section is provided so as not to be included in the ART period by not determining the ART end condition. And since this section is the section where ART is being prepared, it is said that this section is being prepared.

In addition, the sub storage area includes "CZ game number counter", "pseudo-bonus game number counter", "ART game number counter", "BR game number counter", "additional game number counter", and "additional game number counter". "have.

"1" is added to the "CZ game number counter" every time a game is played in CZ1 or CZ2, and the value of the "CZ game number counter" is cleared when CZ1 or CZ2 ends. In the "pseudo-bonus game number counter", the number of games ("30" or "60" or "100") set according to the types of various pseudo-bonus is set before the pseudo-bonus is started. ..

Then, the "pseudo-bonus game number counter" is deducted by "1" each time a game is played in the first ART (pseudo-bonus). When the "BB medium-high probability counter" described later has a value, the subtraction of the "pseudo-bonus game number counter" is stopped.

The "ART game number counter" is set to "50" before the second ART is started. Then, the "ART game number counter" is subtracted by "1" each time a game is played in the second ART. The "BR game number counter" is set to "10" before BR1 or BR2 is started. Then, the "BR game number counter" is subtracted by "1" each time a game is played in BR1 or BR2.

"2" is set in the "counter for the number of additional additional games" before the game related to the additional additional effect is started. Then, the "counter for the number of additional additional games" is subtracted by "1" each time a game related to the additional additional effect is performed.

The "additional game number counter" is provided for temporary storage until the total number of additional games is determined when the additional games are added. Therefore, each time the number of additional games is determined in the additional addition, the determined number of additional games is added to the "counter for the number of additional games".

In addition, the sub storage area is "CI (cut-in) number counter in CZ", "BB medium and high probability counter", "precursor game number counter", "preparing digestion G number counter", "internal point counter", " It has a "causal value counter" and a "causal value stock counter".

The "CI count counter in CZ" is set to "4" before CZ1 is started and "10" is set before CZ2 is started. Then, the "CI count counter in CZ" is subtracted by "1" each time the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" (cut-in effect) occurs.

When the number of additional Gs related to the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined by the lottery for adding the number of Gs in BB, the determined number of additional Gs is added to the "BB medium-high probability counter". When there is a value in the "BB medium-high probability counter", the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is in the high-probability state. In the high probability state in the first ART, the probability that the winning of the second ART is determined is higher than that in the normal first ART.

In the "precursor game number counter", the number of precursor games in each precursor is set before each precursor is started. Then, the "precursor game number counter" is subtracted by "1" each time a game is played in each precursor. "1" is added to the "preparing digestion G number counter" each time a game is played during each preparation, and the value of the "preparing digestion G number counter" is cleared when each preparation is completed.

In the "internal point counter", when the internal point is determined by the internal point lottery, the value of the determined internal point is added. When the "causal value" is determined based on the total of the internal points and the "provisional causal value", the value determined as the "causal value" is subtracted from the value of the "internal point counter".

In the "causal value counter", when the "causal value" is determined by the causal value lottery, the determined "causal value" is added. When the value of the "causal value counter" exceeds "100", "100" is subtracted from the value of the "causal value counter" and "1" is added to the "causal value stock counter".

Further, the sub storage area has a "BR continuation flag", a "BR one after another continuous storage area", and "BR stock storage area 1" to "BR stock storage area 32".

The "BR continuation flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the next set of BR1 or BR2 is started, and when it is determined that the next set of BR1 or BR2 is started, it is set to the "BR continuation flag". "1" is stored.

The "BR continuous storage area one after another" is a storage area indicating whether or not BR1 or BR2 continues to the set one after another. When it is determined that BR1 or BR2 continues to the set one after another, "1" is stored in the "BR one after another continuous storage area".

In the present embodiment, a special BR continuous lottery is performed separately from the BR continuous lottery. When the special BR continuation is won in the special BR continuation lottery, it is determined that BR1 or BR2 continues until the set one after another. Further, when it is decided that BR1 or BR2 continues to the set one after another, a special effect for notifying whether or not the special BR is "continued" is performed.

“BR stock storage area 1” to “BR stock storage area 32” are flags indicating whether or not the execution of BR1 or BR2 is determined. When the execution of BR1 is determined, "1" is stored in any of "BR stock storage area 1" to "BR stock storage area 32". When the execution of BR2 is determined, "2" is stored in any of "BR stock storage area 1" to "BR stock storage area 32".

In addition, the sub storage area has a "navigation return waiting state flag" and a "pseudo bonus penalty flag".

The “navigation return waiting state flag” is a flag that is set to be turned on when a so-called pullback is performed in the ART pullback lottery process (see FIG. 107) described later (S614 in FIG. 107). When the "navigation return wait state flag" is on, the ART game number counter is not subtracted in the ART in-process (see FIG. 105) described later. Further, the "navigation return waiting state flag" indicates that in the game after the pullback is performed, the first stop operation (the first stop operation performed) is performed on a target other than the left reel 3L, or the first stop operation is performed. When a predetermined winning number related to notification of the stop order is determined by the main CPU 93 during 2ART, it is set to off (S808 in the display command reception processing shown in FIG. 116, which will be described later). The predetermined winning numbers for which the stop order is notified during the second ART are, for example, the above-mentioned winning numbers "12" and "25".

The "pseudo-bonus penalty flag" is a flag that is set to be on in the penalty determination process (see FIG. 117) described later when the stop operation is performed in a stop order different from the notified stop order and the pseudo-bonus is won. Is. Further, the "pseudo-bonus penalty flag" is referred to in the lamp control task (see FIG. 121) described later.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 78 to 99, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 by using the program will be described.

[Main pachislot operation processing controlled by the main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to the main flowchart (hereinafter referred to as the main flow) shown in FIG. 78.

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the time of turning on the power (S1). In this initialization process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, whether the settings have been changed appropriately, and the like, and the initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95 is cleared. The designated storage area referred to here is, for example, a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area, which requires data to be erased for each game.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor 46S and the start switch 64 is checked. The details of the medal reception / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 79 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) and stores the extracted random number value in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95 (S4). Next, the main CPU 93 extracts an effect random value used for reel effect and lock control in the "continuous lock state", and stores the extracted effect random value in the effect random value storage area (non-existent) provided in the main RAM 95. Stored in (shown) (S5). In the present embodiment, as the effect random value, the effect random value 1, the effect random value 2, and the effect random value 3 are provided. These effect random values 1 to 3 are extracted from the range of 0 to 65535, respectively.

Then, when the extracted various random number values are stored in the predetermined random number value storage area, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S6). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random number value extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a game lock lottery process (S7). The details of the game lock lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs the reel stop initial setting process (S8). The details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a start command transmission process (S9). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a start command to the sub control circuit 101. The start command is configured to include parameters for specifying the internal winning combination and the like, and information on whether or not the occurrence of the game lock has been determined.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lock process at the start of the game (S10). In this process, the reel effect performed in the "continuous lock state" determined in the process of S8 and the reel effect and the lock at the start of the game corresponding to the type of lock are mainly performed. The details of the lock process at the start of the game will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs weight processing (S11). In this process, if a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, the main CPU 93 consumes the waiting time until the predetermined time elapses.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, the drive of the three stepping motors is controlled by the interrupt process (see FIG. 99), which is executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec), and the left reel 3L. , The rotation of the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is accelerated and controlled until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires the attraction priority data and stores it in the attraction priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop control process (S14). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning search process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 93 stores the data of the symbol code storage area (symbol code storage area 2 and later in FIG. 45) in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 41). Further, in this process, the symbol combination displayed on the effective line (winning determination line) after all the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are stopped, and the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15) are used. To match. Then, the main CPU 93 may determine whether or not the display combination is displayed on the effective line, and store the determination result in the display combination storage area.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a medal payout process (S16). In this process, the hopper 43 is driven, the number of credits is updated, and medals are paid out based on the number of payouts of the display combination determined in S15. At this time, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15), the number of medals inserted is three, and the number of medals to be paid out varies depending on the display combination, but the maximum number of medals to be paid out is three. The number of medals (upper limit of payout) is 14.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs RT control processing (S17). In this process, the main CPU 93 manages the RT game state. The details of the RT control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a payout end command transmission process (S18). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a payout end command to the sub control circuit 101.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end check process (S19). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to various counters for managing the end timing of the bonus game, and checks whether or not to end the operation of the bonus game. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus operation check process (S20). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to perform the replay. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 described later. When the bonus operation check process is completed, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S2 and repeats the processes after S2.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is an automatic input request (S31). The presence or absence of this automatic closing request is performed by determining whether or not the automatic closing counter is "0". That is, when the automatic closing counter is "0", the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic closing request, and when the automatic closing counter is "1" or more, it determines that there is an automatic closing request.

The automatic input counter is data for identifying whether or not the display combination related to the re-game is established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game is automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

In S31, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is an automatic closing request (when the determination in S31 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the automatic closing process (S32). In this process, the value of the automatic input counter is copied to the input number counter, and then the value of the automatic input counter is cleared. After that, the main CPU 93 performs the process of S39 described later.

On the other hand, in S31, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic insertion request (when the determination in S31 is NO), the main CPU 93 permits medal acceptance (S33). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 46 (see FIG. 3) is driven, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 13 are accepted. The accepted medals are counted and then guided to the hopper 43.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted sheets according to the gaming state (S34). Specifically, in the BB3 (RB3) gaming state, the maximum value of the number of input sheets is set to "1", and in the other gaming states (BB1, BB2 gaming state and general gaming state), the maximum value of the number of input sheets is set to "3". Set to.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S35). When it is determined in S35 that the main CPU 93 is not permitted to accept medals (when the determination in S35 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S39 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S35 that the main CPU 93 is permitted to accept medals (when the determination in S35 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal insertion check process (S36). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the medals have been inserted, and adds "1" to the inserted number counter when the medals are inserted.

Next, the main CPU 93 transmits a medal insertion command to the sub control circuit 101 (S37). The medal insertion command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of inserted medals and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (S38). In S38, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of input sheets is not the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S38 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35. On the other hand, in S38, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S38 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S39 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the start switch is on (S39). When the main CPU 93 determines in S39 that the start switch is not on (when the determination in S39 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35.

On the other hand, in S39, when the main CPU 93 determines that the start switch is ON (when the determination in S39 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S40). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 46 (see FIG. 3) is not driven, and the inserted medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet 18. When this process is completed, the main CPU 93 ends the medal acceptance / start check process and shifts the process to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the internal lottery process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described. In the present embodiment, the internal lottery process using various internal lottery tables described below is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a means for executing the internal lottery process (internal winning combination determining means).

First, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table according to the game state (S41). That is, the main CPU 93 grasps the current game state with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42), and determines the type of the internal lottery table and the number of lottery times based on the internal lottery table determination table (see FIG. 18). decide. The number of lottery indicates the number of times for each winning number specified by the internal lottery table to subtract the lottery value and determine whether or not a digit has occurred.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lottery value change process (S42). In this process, the lottery value of the winning number related to the re-game is changed according to the game state. The details of the lottery value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the random number value stored in the random number value storage area (S43). Then, the main CPU 93 sets "1" as the initial value of the winning number.

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table to acquire the lottery value corresponding to the winning number, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value (S44).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the calculation result in S44 is less than 0 (negative value) (S45).

In S45, when the main CPU 93 determines that the calculation result is not less than 0 (when the determination in S45 is NO), the main CPU 93 updates the random number value and the winning number (S46). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is set as a random value, and the winning number is added by 1.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all the winning numbers have been checked (S47). When it is determined in S47 that the main CPU 93 has not checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S47 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S44 and repeats the processes after S44.

On the other hand, in S47, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 has checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S47 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets "0" as the data pointer (S48). That is, the main CPU 93 sets "0" as the small win / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer.

Here, returning to the description of the process of S45 again, when the main CPU 93 determines in S45 that the calculation result is less than 0 (negative value) (when the determination in S45 is YES), the main CPU 93 is the current Acquire the small win / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer according to the winning number (S49).

Then, after the processing of S48 or S49, the main CPU 93 refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 25 to 28), and acquires the internal winning combination based on the small winning combination / replay data pointer. (S50).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (S51).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is "00000000000" (S52). In S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is not "00000000000" (when the determination in S52 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S55 described later.

On the other hand, in S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is "00000000000" (when the determination in S52 is YES), the main CPU 93 uses the bonus internal winning combination determination table (when the determination is YES). (See FIG. 24), and the internal winning combination is acquired based on the bonus data pointer (S53).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carrying-over combination storage area (S54).

After the processing of S54 or when the determination in S52 is NO, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storage area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area (S55).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the CB gaming state (S56). When the main CPU 93 determines in S56 that it is not in the CB gaming state (when the determination in S56 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process and shifts the process to S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 78). ..

On the other hand, in S56, when the main CPU 93 determines that the CB gaming state is in progress (when the determination in S56 is YES), the main CPU 93 turns on all the bits corresponding to the small winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (when the determination in S56 is YES). S57). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process, and shifts the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Lottery value change process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the lottery value changing process performed in S42 in the flowchart of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 80) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42) to determine whether or not the RT game state flag is on (S61). Specifically, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "1" is set in any of bits 0 to 4 in the game state flag storage area 2 (see FIG. 42). Then, when the main CPU 93 determines in S61 that the RT game state flag is not on (when the determination in S61 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the lottery value change process and performs the process by the internal lottery process (see FIG. 80). ) Move to S43.

On the other hand, in S61, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT game state flag is on (when the determination in S61 is YES), the main CPU 93 is the RT internal lottery table corresponding to the turned on RT game state. With reference to, the lottery value of the winning numbers (“1” to “24”) related to the re-game of the internal lottery table for the general game state (see FIG. 19) is changed (S62). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the lottery value changing process, and shifts the process to S43 of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 80).

[Game lock lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the game lock lottery process performed in S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the RT4 gaming state (S71). When the main CPU 93 determines in S71 that it is not in the RT4 game state (when the determination in S71 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery process and shifts the process to S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 78). ..

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S71 that it is in the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S71 is YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the game lock lottery table (see FIG. 39) and sets the effect random value to 1. Based on this, a game lock lottery is performed (S72).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the game lock has been won in the game lock lottery of S72 (S73). In S73, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game lock has not been won (when the determination in S73 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery process and performs the process in S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to.

On the other hand, in S73, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game lock has been won (when the determination in S73 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the game lock flag and the lock timer. As a result, the game lock is generated. Then, the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery process, and shifts the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 refers to the rotation cylinder stop number selection table (see FIG. 29), and acquires the rotation cylinder stop number based on the internal winning combination acquired in the internal lottery process of S6 in FIG. 78. (S101).

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 30), and acquires various information corresponding to the reel stop number based on the acquired reel stop number (S102). Specifically, the main CPU 93 has a pull-in priority table selection table number, a pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, and forward push corresponding to the acquired rotation stop number. The initial data for changing the time table and the table selection data for irregular pressing are acquired.

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier "0FFH (11111111B)" in the entire symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) (S103).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores "3" in the stop button non-operation counter provided in the main RAM 95 (S104). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop initial setting process, and shifts the process to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). The stop button non-operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons for which a stop operation has not been detected.

[Lock processing at the start of the game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the game start lock process performed in S10 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 sets a reel effect pattern according to the game lock flag (S111). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the lock timer is "0" (S112). In S112, when the main CPU 93 determines that the lock timer value is not "0" (when the determination in S112 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S112 until the lock timer value becomes "0". stand by.

On the other hand, in S112, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the lock timer is "0" (when the determination in S112 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the lock process at the start of the game and performs the process in the main flow (when the game starts. (See FIG. 78).

[Pull-in priority storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the pull-in priority storage process performed in S13 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 stores the stop button non-operation counter as the number of searches in the main RAM 95 (S121). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a search target reel determination process (S122). In this process, the main CPU 93 selects a predetermined reel from, for example, a rotating reel, and determines the selected reel as a search target reel.

For example, in S122, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as the search target reel. After that, various processes up to S131, which will be described later, are performed on the left reel 3L, and when the process returns to S122 again, the middle reel 3C is next determined as the search target reel. Then, various processes up to S131, which will be described later, are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when the process returns to S122 again, the right reel 3R is next determined as the search target reel.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S123). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (small winning combination / replay data pointer) and the operation stop button. The details of the pull-in priority table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets "0" as the symbol position data and sets "21" as the number of symbol checks (S124). Then, the main CPU 93 performs a symbol code storage process (S125). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the current symbol position data located on the effective line (winning determination line) of the search target reel is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, the symbol codes for the number of valid lines are stored. The details of the symbol code storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 updates the display combination storage area (see FIG. 41) based on the acquired symbol code and the data of the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) (S126). At this point, regardless of whether or not the internal winning combination is won, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storage area based on the stopped symbol.

In the present embodiment, the information of the symbol code storage area (the symbol code and the corresponding displayable combination) is updated for each reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable winning combination may be acquired from the data that defines the correspondence between the stopped reel symbol and the corresponding displayable winning combination, or the stopped reel symbol. And the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15) may be collated and acquired. When the former method is used, the correspondence between the symbol and the displayable combination changes for each reel.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority acquisition process (S127). In this process, the main CPU 93 gives priority to the combination in which the bit is "1" in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 41) and the bit is "1" in the internal winning combination storage area. The pull-in priority data is acquired by referring to the ranking table (see FIG. 37).

In addition, when the symbol of the combination (“C_B_CH_A” to “C_B_CH_D”, “C_C_CH” shown in FIG. 15) related to the combination (for example, “cherry”) whose winning is confirmed in some reels is displayed, “ In the reel that becomes "ANY", the pull-in priority data of the combination is not acquired. In addition, if there is a possibility that a winning combination that has not been won internally will be determined on the reel for which the winning is confirmed, the attraction priority data is set to "stop prohibited (all bits 0)".

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired attraction priority data in the attraction priority data storage area (see FIG. 46) (S128). At this time, the attraction priority data is stored in the attraction priority data storage area so that the value of each priority and the bit of the storage area correspond to each other. Next, the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the symbol position data and subtracts 1 from the symbol check count (S129).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is 0 (S130). When the main CPU 93 determines in S130 that the number of symbol checks is not 0 (when the determination in S130 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S125 and repeats the processes after S125.

On the other hand, in S130, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of symbol checks is 0 (when the determination in S130 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the search has been performed for the number of searches (S131).

When it is determined in S131 that the main CPU 93 has not searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S131 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S122 and repeats the processes after S122. On the other hand, when it is determined in S131 that the main CPU 93 has searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S131 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority storage process and performs the process in S14 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to.

[Pull-in priority table selection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the attraction priority table selection process performed in S123 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 85) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the attraction-in priority table number is set, that is, whether or not the attraction-in priority table number is directly stored in the reel stop initial setting process (S8) (S141). ). When the main CPU 93 determines in S141 that the attraction priority table number is set (when the determination in S141 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority table selection process and stores the process in the attraction priority order. The process moves to S124 of the process (see FIG. 85).

On the other hand, in S141, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pull-in priority table number is not set (when the determination in S141 is NO), the main CPU 93 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 44) and the operation stop button. Refer to the area (see FIG. 43) and set the corresponding pull-in priority table number (S142). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority table selection process, and shifts the process to S124 of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 85).

In S142, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the pressing order storage area and the operation stop button storage area, and acquires the data of the pressing order and the operation stop button. Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the attraction priority table selection table corresponding to the attraction priority table selection data, and acquires the attraction priority table number based on the pressing order and the operation stop button. After that, the main CPU 93 sets the acquired pull-in priority table number.

[Design code acquisition process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the symbol code acquisition process performed in S125 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 85) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 sets valid line data (S151). In the present embodiment, as the effective line (winning determination line), one line (center line) is provided as described above. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the check symbol position data of the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S152). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire the information of the middle stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data (S153). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the symbol code storage process, and shifts the process to S126 of the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 85).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, the reel stop control process performed in S14 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described with reference to FIG. 88. In this embodiment, the reel stop control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a means (stop control means) for executing the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S161). When the main CPU 93 determines in S161 that the valid stop button has not been pressed (when the determination in S161 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S161 and executes the pressing operation of the valid stop button. Wait until.

On the other hand, in S161, when the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (when the determination in S161 is YES), the main CPU 93 has a pressing order storage area (see FIG. 44) and an operation stop button storage area (FIG. 43) is updated (S162). Next, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S163).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S164). Then, the main CPU 93 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (S165).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S166). The details of the sliding piece number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 101 (S167). The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of slip pieces thereof, and the ON edge / OFF edge of the stop switch. The ON edge / OFF edge information of the stop switch may be monitored by an interrupt process described later, and the information may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines a scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S166, and stores the determined stop scheduled position in the main RAM 95 (S168). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and sets the result as the stop scheduled position.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the scheduled stop position determined in S168 as the search symbol position (S169). Next, the main CPU 93 performs the symbol code acquisition process described with reference to FIG. 87 (S170). After that, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) using the acquired symbol code (S171).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a control change process (S172). The details of the control change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pressed stop button is released (S173). In S173, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button has not been released (when the determination in S173 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S173 and waits until the pressed stop button is released. To do.

On the other hand, in S173, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button has been released (when the determination in S173 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop command transmission process (S174). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 101. At this time, the data structure of the reel stop command to be transmitted is the same as that of the reel stop command transmitted in S167. However, the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S174 is different from the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S167.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is "0" (S175). When the main CPU 93 determines in S175 that the inactive counter is not "0" (when the determination in S175 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the attraction priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 85 (S176). ). After that, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S161 and repeats the processes after S161.

On the other hand, in S175, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inactive counter is "0" (when the determination in S175 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 78). (See), move to S15.

[Sliding piece number determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the slip piece number determination process performed in S166 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 selects the line mask data corresponding to the operation stop button based on the line mask data table (not shown) (S181). In this process, for example, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the main CPU 93 sets “1000000” as line mask data in the bit 7 corresponding to the “left reel A line” of the stop data. Select. Further, for example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the main CPU 93 selects "00010000" as the line mask data in which "1" is set in the bit 4 corresponding to the "middle reel A line" of the stop data. To do. Further, for example, when the right stop button 17R is pressed, the main CPU 93 selects "00000010" in which "1" is set in bit 1 corresponding to the "right reel A line" of the stop data as line mask data. To do.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the first stop (the stop button non-operation counter is “2”) (S182). When the main CPU 93 determines in S182 that it is not the first stop (when the determination in S182 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the second and third stop processes (S183). The details of the second and third stop processes will be described later with reference to FIG. 90 described later. After that, the main CPU 93 performs the process of S191 described later.

On the other hand, in S182, when the main CPU 93 determines that the first stop is performed (when the determination in S182 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the operation stop button is the left stop button (S184).

In S184, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button is the left stop button (when the determination in S184 is YES), the main CPU 93 acquires the table selection data and the symbol counter at the time of forward pressing (S185). In this process, the table selection data at the time of forward pressing is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 30). Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the forward-pressed first stop stop table corresponding to the forward-pressed table selection data, and acquires the slip piece number determination data and the change status based on the symbol counter (S186). After that, the main CPU 93 performs the process of S191 described later.

On the other hand, in S184, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button is not the left stop button (when the determination in S184 is NO), the main CPU 93 acquires the irregular pressing table selection data and selects the irregular pressing table. An irregular push stop table corresponding to the data is set (S187). In this process, the irregular pressing table selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 30).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a line change bit check process (S188). The details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a line mask data change process (S189). The details of the line mask data change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 described later. After that, the main CPU 93 refers to the set irregular push stop table, and acquires the number of slip pieces determination data based on the line mask data and the stop start position (S190).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs the priority pull-in control process (S191). In this process, the pull-in priority data is compared according to each symbol position in the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces "4" from the stop start position, and the most appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined. The details of the priority pull-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 described later. After that, the main CPU 93 ends the sliding piece number determination process, and shifts the process to S167 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88).

[Second and third stop processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the second and third stop processes performed in S183 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 89) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is during the second stop operation (S201). When the main CPU 93 determines in S201 that it is not during the second stop operation (when the determination in S201 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S204 described later.

On the other hand, in S201, when the main CPU 93 determines that the second stop operation is in progress (when the determination in S201 is YES), the main CPU 93 pushes the stop buttons forward (the first stop is the left reel 3L). It is determined whether or not it is (S202). In S202, when the main CPU 93 determines that the push is not forward (when the determination in S202 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S204 described later.

On the other hand, in S202, when the main CPU 93 determines that the push is forward (when the determination in S202 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the line change bit check process (S203). The details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a line mask data change process (S204). The details of the line mask data change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding piece number search process (S205). In this process, the number of slip pieces is determined based on the stop start position with reference to the stop tables (FIGS. 32, 34 and 35).

For example, when the line mask data is "00010000" corresponding to the "middle reel A line", the main CPU 93 refers to the column of the "middle reel A line" of the bit 4. Then, for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces from the stop start position, a search for whether or not the corresponding data is "1" is sequentially performed. Next, the main CPU 93 calculates the difference from the symbol position where the corresponding data is "1" to the stop start position, and determines the calculated value as the slip piece number determination data. Then, after the processing of S205, the main CPU 93 ends the second and third stop processing, and shifts the processing to S191 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89).

[Line change bit check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the line change bit performed in S188 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 89) and S203 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 90). The check process will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the change status is "1" or "2" (S211). When the main CPU 93 determines in S211 that the change status is "1" or "2" (when the determination in S211 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the corresponding line status (S212). In this process, in the present embodiment, the A-line status is set when the change status is "1", and the B-line status is set when the change status is "2". Then, after the processing of S212, the main CPU 93 ends the line change bit check processing, and performs the processing in S189 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) Move to the processing of S204.

On the other hand, in S211 when the main CPU 93 determines that the change status is not "1" or "2" (when the determination in S211 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the line change bit is on. (S213). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the column corresponding to the "middle reel line change bit" or "right reel line change bit" in the stop table (see FIGS. 34 and 35), and the data corresponding to the stop start position is obtained. It is determined whether or not it is "1". Then, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is not "1", that is, the line change bit is not on (when the determination in S213 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the line change bit check process. Is completed, and the process is transferred to S189 of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 89) or S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 90).

On the other hand, in S213, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is "1", that is, the line change bit is ON (when the determination in S213 is YES), the main CPU 93 is B. Set the line status (S214). The B line status is data used to change the line mask data. Then, after the processing of S214, the main CPU 93 ends the line change bit check processing, and performs the processing in S189 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) Move to the processing of S204.

[Line mask data change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the line mask data performed in S189 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 89) and S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 90). The change process will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the C line status is set (S221). It should be noted that the C-line status is set when the forward push is performed in the control change process after the second stop (see FIG. 95), which will be described later.

In S221, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line status is set (when the determination in S221 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button. Determine (S222).

In S222, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button (when the determination in S222 is YES), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data to the right twice (S223). ). If the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button in the forward push, the operation stop button at the time of the third stop becomes the right stop button. Therefore, the process of S223 changes the line mask data from "00000010" to "10000000". As a result, the column of bits 7 corresponding to the "right reel C line data" of the second and third stop tables (see FIG. 35) at the time of forward pressing is referred to. Then, after the processing of S223, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) Move to the process of S205.

On the other hand, in S222, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button (when the determination in S222 is NO), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data to the left twice. (S224). If it is a forward push and the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button, the operation stop button at the time of the third stop becomes the middle stop button. Therefore, the process of S224 changes the line mask data from "00010000" to "01000000". As a result, the column of bits 6 corresponding to the "middle reel C line data" of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing is referred to. Then, after the processing of S224, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) Move to the process of S205.

Further, in S221, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line status is not set (when the determination in S221 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the B line status is set (S225). .. When the main CPU 93 determines in S225 that the B line status is not set (when the determination in S225 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change process and performs the process of determining the number of sliding pieces (FIG. FIG. Move to the process of S190 in (see 89) or S205 in the flowchart (see FIG. 90) of the second and third stop processes.

On the other hand, in S225, when the main CPU 93 determines that the B line status is set (when the determination in S225 is YES), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data to the right once (S226). By this processing, for example, when the line mask data is "00000010", it is changed to "00000001". As a result, the column corresponding to "B line data" in the stop table (see FIGS. 34 and 35) is referenced. Then, after the processing of S226, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) Move to the process of S205.

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the priority pull-in control process performed in S191 in the flowchart (see FIG. 89) of the slide piece number determination process will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 sets a search order table (see FIG. 38) according to the game state (S231). Next, the main CPU 93 sets initial values in the search order counter and the number of checks (S232). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets "1" as an initial value in the search order counter. Further, the main CPU 93 sets the data length of the search order table as an initial value in the number of checks. Specifically, "5" is set as the initial value of the number of checks.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the start address of the stop order table (not shown), and adds the address of the search order table based on the slip piece number determination data (S233).

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the number of sliding pieces corresponding to the value of the search order counter (S234). Next, the main CPU 93 adds the acquired number of slip pieces to the expected address at the start of stopping, and acquires the attraction priority data (S235).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the attraction priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the attraction priority data acquired earlier (S236). In S236, when the main CPU 93 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S235 does not exceed the attraction priority data acquired earlier (when the determination in S236 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S238 described later. Do.

On the other hand, in S236, when the main CPU 93 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the attraction priority data acquired earlier (when the determination in S236 is YES), the main CPU 93 slips acquired in S234. The number of pieces is evacuated (S237).

Next, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the number of checks and adds 1 to the search order counter (S238).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of checks is "0" (S239). In S239, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is not "0" (when the determination in S239 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S234 and repeats the processes after S234.

On the other hand, in S239, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is "0" (when the determination in S239 is YES), the main CPU 93 restores the number of retracted sliding pieces (S240). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the priority pull-in control process and also ends the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 89).

[Control change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the control change process performed in S172 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is after the third stop (S251). In S251, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is after the third stop (when the determination in S251 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process and performs the process in S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88). Move to.

On the other hand, in S251, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not after the third stop (when the determination in S251 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is after the second stop (S252). In S252, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is after the second stop (when the determination in S252 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the control process after the second stop (S253). The details of the control process after the second stop will be described later with reference to FIG. 95 described later. Then, after the processing of S253, the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing and shifts the processing to S173 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 88).

On the other hand, in S252, when the main CPU 93 determines that it has not been after the second stop (when the determination in S252 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the push is forward (S254). When the main CPU 93 determines in S254 that the push is not forward (when the determination in S254 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process and shifts the process to S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88). ..

On the other hand, in S254, when the main CPU 93 determines that the forward push is performed (when the determination in S254 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the forward push control change table according to the forward push table change data (see FIG. 33). Is acquired and the number of searches is set (S255).

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the scheduled stop position (S256). Then, the main CPU 93 updates the change target position according to the acquired scheduled stop position (S257).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the change target position updated in S257 matches the scheduled stop position (S258). In S258, when the main CPU 93 determines that the updated position to be changed does not match the scheduled stop position (when the determination in S258 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of searches is "0". (S259). In S259, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of searches is not "0" (when the determination in S259 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S257 and repeats the processes after S257.

On the other hand, in S259, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of searches is "0" (when the determination in S259 is YES), the main CPU 93 changes the table at the time of forward pressing. It is acquired as the third stop table number for stop, and the corresponding stop table is set (S260).

Next, the main CPU 93 sets “0” in the C line check data (S261). Then, after the processing of S261, the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing, and shifts the processing to S173 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 88).

Further, in S258, when the main CPU 93 determines that the updated position to be changed matches the scheduled stop position (when the determination in S258 is YES), the main CPU 93 is the second when the forward press is performed according to the value of the line change status. -Obtain the third stop table number and C line check data (S262).

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the corresponding stop table based on the second and third stop table numbers at the time of forward pressing (S263). Then, after the processing of S263, the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing and shifts the processing to S173 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 88).

[Control change processing after the second stop]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the second post-stop control change process performed in S253 in the flowchart of the control change process (see FIG. 94) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the push is forward (S271). When the main CPU 93 determines in S271 that the push is not forward (when the determination in S271 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop, and also ends the control change process (see FIG. 94). To do.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the main CPU 93 is pushing forward (when the determination in S271 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether the C line check data is on (whether the change status is "3") or not. (S272). The C-line check data is acquired by the process of S262 of the control change process (see FIG. 94). Then, in S272, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line check data is not on (when the determination in S272 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop and controls change process (FIG. FIG. See 94) also ends.

On the other hand, in S272, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line check data is on (when the determination in S272 is YES), the main CPU 93 turns on the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop. It is determined whether or not it is (S273). In S273, when the main CPU 93 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is not on (when the determination in S273 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop. At the same time, the control change process (see FIG. 94) is also completed.

On the other hand, in S273, when the main CPU 93 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is on (when the determination in S273 is YES), the main CPU 93 is at the time of the stored forward pressing. "1" is added to the second and third stop table numbers for stopping, and the corresponding stop table is set (S274). Next, the main CPU 93 sets the C line status (S275). Then, after the process of S275, the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop, and also ends the control change process (see FIG. 94).

[RT control processing]
Next, the RT control process performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described with reference to FIG. 96. In this embodiment, the RT control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 91.

First, the main CPU 93 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17) and checks the transition conditions of the RT gaming state that can be established in the RT gaming state of the migration source (current) (S281).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the transition condition of the RT gaming state is satisfied (S282). In S282, when the main CPU 93 determines that the transition condition of the RT gaming state is not satisfied (when the determination in S282 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S284 described later.

On the other hand, in S282, when the main CPU 93 determines that the transition condition of the RT gaming state is satisfied (when the determination in S282 is YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17) and shifts. Based on the conditions, the RT game state flag of the migration destination is set to a predetermined bit of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42), and the game state flag storage area is updated (S283).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a display command transmission process (S284). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a display command to the sub control circuit 101. The display command is configured to include parameters for specifying the display combination, the number of payouts, and the like. Then, after the processing of S284, the main CPU 93 ends the RT control processing and shifts the processing to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the bonus end check process performed in S19 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the "MB" ("MB1" or "MB2") is operating with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42) (S321). In S321, when the main CPU 93 determines that "MB" is not operating (when the determination in S321 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process and performs the process in S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to.

On the other hand, in S321, when the main CPU 93 determines that "MB" is in operation (when the determination in S321 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0". Is determined (S322).

In S322, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (when the determination in S322 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the bonus end processing (S323). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the bonus end number counter and turns off the game state flag (MB game state flag) corresponding to the operating "MB". If the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0", it means that the payout of medals exceeds 13 during the MB game state.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end command transmission process (S324). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a bonus end command to the sub control circuit 101. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of the bonus (S325). Then, after the processing of S325, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check processing, and shifts the processing to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

On the other hand, in S322, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than "0" (when the determination in S322 is NO), the main CPU 93 sets each value of the winning count counter and the playable count counter. Update (S326). The value of the winning count counter is subtracted by "1" when a small winning combination (a winning combination with a medal payout) is displayed, and the value of the gameable count counter is "1" in one game regardless of the stop symbol. It is subtracted.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter or the playable number counter is “0” (S327). In S327, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the winning count counter or the value of the playable count counter is not "0" (when the determination in S327 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process. , The process is transferred to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

On the other hand, in S327, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the winning count counter or the value of the playable count counter is "0" (when the determination in S327 is YES), the main CPU 93 processes at the end of CB. (S328). Specifically, processing such as turning off the game state flag (CB game state flag) corresponding to "CB", clearing the values of the winning number counter and the game possible number counter is performed. After that, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and shifts the process to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Bonus operation check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the bonus operation check process performed in S20 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the "MB" ("MB1" or "MB2") is in operation (S331). In S331, when the main CPU 93 determines that "MB" is not operating (when the determination in S331 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S334 described later.

On the other hand, in S331, when the main CPU 93 determines that "MB" is in operation (when the determination in S331 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "CB" is in operation (S332). ). In S332, when the main CPU 93 determines that "CB" is in operation (when the determination in S332 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to S2.

On the other hand, in S332, when the main CPU 93 determines that "CB" is not operating (when the determination in S332 is NO), the main CPU 93 processes during CB operation based on the bonus operation table (see FIG. 16). (S333). Then, after the processing of S333, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

Further, when the determination in S331 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the bonus game is a prize (S334). In the present embodiment, the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to "C_MB1" or "C_MB2" is the winning of the bonus game. In S334, when the main CPU 93 determines that the bonus game is not a prize (when the determination in S334 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S338 described later.

On the other hand, in S334, when the main CPU 93 determines that the bonus game is a winning bonus (when the determination in S334 is YES), the main CPU 93 selects the winning bonus game based on the bonus operating table (see FIG. 16). The corresponding bonus operation time processing is performed (S335). In the present embodiment, in this process, the main CPU 93 sets "1" to the corresponding bit in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42) with reference to the bonus operation time table (see FIG. 16). Set the value of the bonus end number counter to a predetermined value (“13”). Further, in this process, the CB operating process described in S333 is also performed.

Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carry-over combination storage area (S336). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus start command transmission process (S337). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a bonus start command to the sub control circuit 101. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started. Then, after S337, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and shifts the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

Further, when the determination in S334 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning combination related to the replay is a prize (S338). In S338, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination related to the replay is not a prize (when the determination in S338 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to S2.

On the other hand, in S338, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination related to the replay is a prize (when the determination in S338 is YES), the main CPU 93 requests the automatic insertion of medals (S339). That is, the main CPU 93 copies the input number counter to the automatic input number counter. Then, after the processing of S339, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, an interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 93 performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S341). Next, the main CPU 93 performs an input port check process (S342). In this process, signals input from various switches such as the stop switch of the stop switch board 65 are checked.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a timer update process (S343). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer for each interrupt process, for example. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a communication data transmission procedure (S344). In this process, various commands are mainly transmitted to the main control circuit 91 and the sub control circuit 101 as appropriate.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel control process (S345). In this process, the main CPU 93 starts rotating the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when all the reels are requested to start rotating, and then each reel rotates at a constant speed. Drive and control three stepping motors. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 93 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the scheduled stop position (the symbol at the scheduled stop position reaches the area on the effective line (winning determination line) of the display window). , Drive and control the corresponding stepping motor so that the rotation of the corresponding reel is decelerated and stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S345, in addition to the above-mentioned normal acceleration processing, constant speed processing and stop processing, when a reel effect pattern is set at the time of acceleration processing, the reel effect pattern is supported. It also performs reel production (reel action) and lock control processing.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs the lamp 7-segment drive process (S346). In this process, the main CPU 93 drives and controls the 7-segment display 23 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a register reset process (S347). Then, after that, the main CPU 93 ends the interrupt process.

<Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 141, the contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using the program will be described.

[Main board communication task]
First, the main board communication task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 100.

First, the sub CPU 102 checks the reception of the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (S501). Next, when the sub CPU 102 receives the command, the sub CPU 102 extracts the type of the received command (S502).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the command type is normal (S503). In the present embodiment, the command type is associated with any of a plurality of types of codes, and when the game is operating normally, the command type is one of the plurality of types of codes. Therefore, in the processing of S502, if the received command type code is any one of a plurality of types of codes, the sub CPU 102 determines that the command type is normal. On the other hand, when the command type code is other than the plurality of types of codes, the sub CPU 102 determines that some abnormality (including cheating) has occurred during the game, and determines that the command type is not a normal command type.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S503 that the command type is not normal (when the determination in S503 is NO), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S501 and repeats the processes after S501.

On the other hand, in S503, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the command type is normal (when the determination in S503 is YES), the sub CPU 102 stores a message in the message queue based on the received command (S504). .. The message queue is a mechanism for exchanging information between processes. Then, after the processing of S504, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S501 and repeats the processing after S501.

[Direction registration task]
Next, the effect registration task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 retrieves a message from the message queue (S511). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is a message in the message queue (S512). In S512, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no message in the message queue (when the determination in S512 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S515 described later.

On the other hand, in S512, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is a message in the message queue (when the determination in S512 is YES), the sub CPU 102 copies the game information from the message (S513). In this process, for example, various data such as an internal winning combination, a type of reel whose rotation has stopped, a display combination, and a game state flag, which are specified by parameters, are copied to a storage area (not shown) provided in the sub RAM 103. The reel.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the effect content determination process (S514). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the effect content, registers the effect data, and the like according to the type of the received command. The details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the animation data (S515). Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the sound data (S516). Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the lamp data (S517). Then, the sub CPU 102 registers the accessory data (S518). These registration processes are performed based on the effect data registered in the effect content determination process of S514. After S518, the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S511 and repeats the processes after S511.

[Production content determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the effect content determination process performed in S514 in the flowchart of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the start command is received (S521).

In S521, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the start command is received (YES in S521), the sub CPU 102 performs the start command reception process (S522). In this process, the sub CPU 102 extracts the effect random value, determines the effect number by lottery based on the internal winning combination, and registers the effect number. Here, the effect number is data that specifies the content of the effect to be executed this time. The details of the process at the time of receiving the start command will be described later with reference to FIG. 103 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data at the start according to the registered effect number (S523). The effect data is data that specifies animation data, sound data, lamp data, and accessory data. Therefore, when the effect data is registered, the corresponding animation data and the like are determined, and the effect such as displaying an image is executed. Then, after the processing of S523, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

On the other hand, in S521, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the start command is received (when the determination in S521 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the reel stop command is received (S524).

In S524, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the reel stop command has been received (YES in S524), the sub CPU 102 performs the reel stop command reception processing (S525). In this process, when the additional addition B flag is on, the sub CPU 102 performs the additional addition B addition G number lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the effect data at the time of stop according to the registered effect number and the type of the operation stop button (S526). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

On the other hand, in S524, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the reel stop command is received (when the determination in S524 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the display command is received (S527).

In S527, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the display command is received (YES in S527), the sub CPU 102 performs the display command reception process (S528). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs a sub-game state transition process and a penalty determination process for shifting the sub-game state based on the winning mode. The details of the processing at the time of receiving the display command will be described later with reference to FIG. 116.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the effect data at the time of display according to the registered effect number and display combination (S529). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

On the other hand, in S527, when it is determined that it is not the time when the display command is received (when the determination in S527 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the payout end command is received (S530). In S530, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is the time when the payout end command is received (when the determination in S530 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process when the payout end command is received (S531). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

On the other hand, in S530, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the payout end command is received (when the determination in S530 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the bonus start command is received (S532).

In S532, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the bonus start command has been received (when the determination in S532 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the effect data for starting the bonus (S533). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

On the other hand, in S532, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the bonus start command is received (when the determination in S532 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the bonus end command is received (S534). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S534 that the bonus end command has been received (when the determination in S534 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the effect data for the bonus end (S535). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

In S534, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the bonus end command is received (when the determination in S534 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the no-operation command is received (S536). In S536, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the no-operation command is received (when the determination in S536 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process and performs the process in the effect registration task (see FIG. 101). Move to S515.

On the other hand, in S536, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the non-operation command is received (YES in S536), the sub CPU 102 performs the non-operation command reception process (S537). The details of the non-operation command reception processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 118 described later. After the processing of S537, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

[Processing when receiving start command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the process at the time of receiving the start command performed in S522 in the flowchart (see FIG. 102) of the effect content determination process will be described. In the present embodiment, the start command reception processing described below is executed by the sub-control circuit 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus is in progress (S541). During the pseudo bonus (first ART), any one of the SBB flag, the BB flag, and the RB flag is on, and the BB precursor flag and the RB precursor flag are off.

In S541, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo bonus is in progress (when the determination in S541 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo bonus in-process (S542). The details of the pseudo-bonus processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 104 described later.

On the other hand, in S541, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo bonus is not in progress (when the determination in S541 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub CPU 102 is in the ART (second ART) (S543). .. During ART (second ART), the ART (second ART) flag is on and the ART precursor flag is off.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S543 that the sub CPU 102 is in the ART (second ART) (when the determination in S543 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing during the ART (S544). The details of the processing during ART will be described later with reference to FIG. 105 described later.

On the other hand, in S543, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub CPU 102 is not in the ART (second ART) (when the determination in S543 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a normal processing (S545). The details of the normal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 109 described later.

After the processing of S542 and S545, the sub CPU 102 performs the preparatory processing (S546). The details of this preparatory process will be described later with reference to FIG. 111 described later. Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a precursor check process (S547). The details of the precursor check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 112 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the effect lottery process (S548). The details of the effect lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 113 described later. After the processing of S548, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command, and shifts the processing to S523 of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 102).

[Processing during pseudo bonus]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the pseudo-bonus processing performed in S542 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the preparation flag of the pseudo bonus is on (S561). Examples of the pseudo-bonus preparation flag include an SBB preparation flag, a BB preparation flag, and an RB preparation flag. Therefore, in S561, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of the SBB preparing flag, the BB preparing flag, and the RB preparing flag is on.

In S561, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation flag of the pseudo bonus is on (when the determination in S561 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the start condition corresponding to each preparation flag is satisfied. (S562). The start condition corresponding to the SBB preparing flag is that the winning number "18" (abbreviated as "F_W7_KP_RT4") wins in the internal lottery process. In addition, the start conditions corresponding to the BB preparation flag and the RB preparation flag are the winning numbers "14" to "17" (abbreviations "F_R7_KP_RB_0", "F_R7_KP_RB_1", "F_RB_KP_R7_0", "F_RB_KP_7") in the internal lottery processing. It is to win.

In S562, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 satisfies the start condition corresponding to each preparing flag (when the determination in S562 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo bonus start time processing (S563).

In the pseudo-bonus start processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the preparing flag corresponding to the started pseudo-bonus, and pseudo-values (“100” or “60” or “30”) corresponding to the started pseudo-bonus. Set to the game counter during the bonus. Further, the sub CPU 102 clears the preparing digestion G number counter. After the processing of S563, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the pseudo bonus, and shifts the processing to S546 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103).

In S562, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 does not satisfy the start condition corresponding to each preparing flag (when the determination in S562 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo-bonus processing and receives a start command for the processing. Move to S546 of time processing (see FIG. 103).

In S561, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation flag for the pseudo bonus is not on (when the determination in S561 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB flag is on (S564).

In S564, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB flag is ON (when the determination in S564 is YES), the sub CPU 102 increases the number of Gs in the BB based on the lottery table (see FIG. 54). An additional lottery process is performed (S565). In the BB medium G number addition lottery process, when the number of additional games is determined, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined value to the BB medium / high probability counter.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an ART lottery process in BB based on the ART lottery table in BB, or a BR lottery process in BB based on a BR (battle rush) lottery table in BB (S566).

Specifically, it is a non-ART BB, and a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers "7", "8", "10", "11") is an internal winning combination by internal lottery processing. If it is determined as a role, ART lottery processing during BB is performed. In addition, it is a BB during ART, and a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to winning numbers "7", "8", "10", "11") is determined as an internal winning combination by internal lottery processing. In that case, BR lottery processing is performed.

When the "ART win" is determined in the ART lottery process during BB, the sub CPU 102 turns on the "ART flag" (stores "1" in the "ART flag"). Further, when the "battle rush 1 win" is determined in the BR lottery process during BB, the sub CPU 102 stores "1" in the "BR stock storage area". Then, when the "battle rush 2 win" is determined, the sub CPU 102 stores "2" in the "BR stock storage area".

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery result of S566 is the winning result (S567). That is, it is determined whether or not any of "ART win", "battle rush 1 win", and "battle rush 2 win" has been determined.

In S567, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning is won (when the determination in S567 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the white BAR)" (S568). The "reverse push" in the present embodiment means that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left".

The above-mentioned special internal winning combination is an internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers (small winning combination / replay data pointers) "7", "8", "10", and "11". In the present embodiment, when the winning numbers (small winning combination / replay data pointers) are "7", "8", "10", and "11", the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". On condition that, the combination of symbols corresponding to "C_HOM_A" to "C_HOM_P" is stopped and displayed.

When the combination of symbols corresponding to "C_HOM_A" to "C_HOM_P" is stopped and displayed, "white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR"-" It is possible to stop and display the combination of the symbols of "white BAR". Therefore, in the present embodiment, when any one of "ART win", "Battle rush 1 win", and "Battle rush 2 win" is determined, "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at white BAR)" is performed.

Perform the stop operation according to "Reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at white BAR)", and the combination of "white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR" symbols is stopped and displayed along the straight line. Then, the player can recognize that any one of "ART win", "Battle rush 1 win", and "Battle rush 2 win" has been decided. At this time, if it is a non-ART BB, the "ART win" is determined, and if it is an ART BB, the "battle rush 1 win" or the "battle rush 2 win" is determined.

Even if the data pointers (win numbers) for small roles and replays are "7", "8", "10", and "11", "ART win", "Battle rush 1 win", and "Battle rush 2" If none of the "wins" has been decided, "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the white BAR)" is not performed. That is, even if the combination of "white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR" can be stopped and displayed, any of "ART win", "battle rush 1 win", and "battle rush 2 win" can be displayed. If is not decided, "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at white BAR)" is not performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a special internal winning combination (“C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P”) is determined as the internal winning combination, ART lottery processing in BB or BR lottery processing in BB is performed. However, as the gaming machine of the present invention, even when an internal winning combination other than the special internal winning combination is determined by the internal lottery processing, the ART lottery processing in BB or the BR lottery processing in BB may be performed.

For example, if an internal winning combination other than the special internal winning combination is determined and one of "ART winning", "Battle Rush 1 winning", and "Battle Rush 2 winning" is determined, then the special internal winning combination is determined. When the winning combination ("C_HOM_A" to "C_HOM_P") is determined as the internal winning combination, "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the white BAR)" is performed. That is, after that, when a special internal winning combination ("C_HOM_A" to "C_HOM_P") is determined as the internal winning combination, "reverse push" is performed regardless of the result of the ART lottery process in BB or the BR lottery process in BB. Navi (navigation aiming at white BAR) ".

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S567 that it is not a winning prize (when the determination in S567 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a Gase reverse push lottery based on a Gase reverse push lottery table (not shown) (S569). In the present embodiment, when the small winning combination / replay data pointers are "6" and "9", the reverse push lottery is performed. Then, when the "Gase reverse push winning" is decided, the "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the white BAR)" is performed.

When the small winning combination / replay data pointers are "6" and "9", the ART lottery processing in BB and the BR lottery processing in BB are not performed. Therefore, when the small role / replay data pointers are "6" and "9", none of "ART win", "Battle rush 1 win", and "Battle rush 2 win" is determined.

When the small winning combination / replay data pointers are "6" and "9", "C_HOM_B" to "C_HOM_J" and "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P" are determined in duplicate as internal winning combinations ( (See FIGS. 25 and 26). Then, when the small combination / replay data pointers are "6" and "9", the stop order is changed to "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P" on condition that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". The combination of the corresponding symbols is stopped and displayed.

Therefore, when the small role / replay data pointers are "6" and "9", the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left" according to "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at white BAR)". Even so, the combination of the "white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR" symbols is not stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can recognize that none of the "ART win", the "battle rush 1 win", and the "battle rush 2 win" has been determined.

When "C_HOM_B", "C_HOM_E" to "C_HOM_G" are determined as internal winning combinations, if the timing of the stop operation is a predetermined timing, "white BAR"-"white BAR" until the second stop. The combination of the symbols of "white BAR" is a stop mode (so-called "tempai") in which the stop can be displayed along a straight line. Then, at the third stop, the combination of the symbols "white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR" is not stopped and displayed.

After the processing of S568 and S569, or when the determination of S564 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the RB flag is ON (S570).

In S570, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RB flag is ON (when the determination in S570 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART lottery processing in the RB based on the ART lottery table in the RB (not shown). Alternatively, the BR lottery process in RB is performed based on the BR lottery table in RB (not shown) (S571).

Specifically, when it is a non-ART RB and the small role / replay data pointer (winning number) is "7", "8", "10", "11", the number of ART sets in the RB is set. Perform lottery processing. On the other hand, if the RB is in ART and the data pointers (winning numbers) for small wins / replays are "7", "8", "10", and "11", the BR lottery process in RB is performed.

After the processing of S571 or when the determination in S571 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB medium-high probability counter is 1 or more (S572). In S572, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB medium-high probability counter is 1 or more (when the determination in S572 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the BB medium-high probability counter by "1" (S573). ..

On the other hand, in S572, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB medium-high probability counter is not 1 or more (when the determination in S572 is NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the value of the pseudo-bonus game number counter (1). S574).

After the processing of S573 and S574, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the game number counter during the pseudo bonus is 1 or more (S575). In S575, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the pseudo-bonus game number counter is 1 or more (when the determination in S575 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo-bonus processing and receives a start command for the processing. Move to S546 of time processing (see FIG. 103).

In S575, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the game number counter during the pseudo bonus is not 1 or more (when the determination in S575 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo bonus end processing (S576).

In the pseudo-bonus end-time process, the sub CPU 102 turns off the flag corresponding to the type of the pseudo-bonus that has ended. Further, when the ART flag is on and the value of the ART game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 performs the ART start processing. When the type of the completed pseudo-bonus is SBB, the sub CPU 102 turns on the ART flag and performs the ART start processing. Further, when "1" or "2" is stored in the BR stock storage area, the sub CPU 102 performs the BR start processing.
After the processing of S576, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the pseudo-bonus, and shifts the processing to S546 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103).

[Processing during ART]
Next, the ART processing performed in S544 in the flowchart (see FIG. 103) of the start command reception processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is off (S581). The BR flag is either the BR flag 1 or the BR flag 2.

In S581, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is not off (when the determination in S581 is NO), the sub CPU 102 is based on the bonus lottery table (see FIG. 53). Bonus lottery processing is performed (S582).

When the "bonus win" is determined by the bonus lottery process, the sub CPU 102 performs the bonus distribution lottery process based on the bonus distribution lottery table (not shown) to determine the type of bonus (pseudo-bonus). Then, the flag corresponding to the determined bonus (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) and the preparing flag (“SBB preparing flag”, “BB preparing flag” or “RB preparing flag”) ") Is turned on.

After the process of S582, the sub CPU 102 performs the additional lottery process based on the additional lottery table (not shown) (S583). When the number of additional games is determined by this additional lottery process, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined number of additional games to the ART game number counter. The BR lottery process may be performed separately from the additional lottery process.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "preparing flag (ART preparing flag)" is on or the navigation return waiting state flag is on (S584). In S584, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparing flag is on or the navigation return waiting state flag is on (when the determination in S584 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART processing. The process is transferred to S546 of the process when the start command is received (see FIG. 103).

In S584, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparing flag is not on and the navigation return waiting state flag is not on (when the determination in S584 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the ART game number counter. "1" is subtracted (S585).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the ART pullback process (S586). The details of the ART pullback process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107. After the processing of S586, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

In S581, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is off (when the determination in S581 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has a value of 1 or more for the number of additional games. Whether or not it is determined (S587).

In S587, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "1" or more (when the determination in S587 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the additional game number counter by "1". (S588). Then, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the additional game number counter is "1" and the additional additional A flag is ON (S589).

In S589, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "1" and the additional additional A flag is ON (when the determination in S589 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds the additional additional A. The G number lottery process is performed (S590). In the additional additional A additional G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the additional additional A additional G number lottery table (see FIG. 61), and adds the determined additional game number to the ART game number counter. .. After the processing of S590, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103).

In S589, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "1" and the additional additional A flag is not on (when the determination in S589 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional additional games. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter is "0" (S591).

In S591, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S591 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART and starts the processing when the start command is received. The process moves to S546 of the process (see FIG. 103).

In S591, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "0" (when the determination in S591 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the additional additional C flag ("additional additional C1 flag", " It is determined whether or not the "additional addition C2 flag" or "additional addition C3 flag") is on (S592).

In S592, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition C flag is ON (when the determination in S592 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the additional addition C addition G number lottery process (S593). That is, the additional C additional G number lottery process of S593 is performed on the start lever 16 before the additional C additional G number lottery process based on the operation on the MAX bet button 14 (1 bet button 15) is completed. Will be executed if

In the additional C additional G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the additional additional C additional G number lottery table (see FIG. 63), and adds the determined additional game number to the additional game number counter. ..

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is "continuation" (S594). If "1" or more is determined as the number of additional games by the additional C additional G number lottery process of S593, it becomes "continue", and "0" is determined as the additional game number by the additional additional C additional G number lottery process. If so, it will be "no continuation".

In S594, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is "continue" (when the determination in S594 is YES), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S593, and the number of additional games is calculated by the additional C additional G number lottery process of S593. The processing of S593 and S594 is repeated until "0" is determined. Even if the number of times the additional C additional G number lottery process is performed reaches the specified number of times (for example, 1000 times), "no continuation" is determined and the additional C additional G number lottery process is completed. Good. Further, when the number of times the additional addition C addition G number lottery processing is performed reaches the specified number of times, even if the lottery result is "continuation", the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no continuation. The additional addition C addition G number lottery process may be completed.

In S594, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not "continue" (when the determination in S594 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs additional addition C end time processing (S595). In the processing at the end of the additional addition C, the sub CPU 102 causes the corresponding additional addition flags (“additional addition A flag”, “additional addition B flag”, “additional addition C1 flag”, “additional addition C2 flag”, or “additional addition C3”. Flag ") is turned off. Further, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the additional game number counter to the value of the ART game number counter, and clears the value of the additional game number counter.

After the processing of S595 or when the determination in S592 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation processing (S596). The details of the BR continuous processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 108 described later. After the processing of S596, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

In S587, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is not "1" or more (when the determination in S587 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the BR continuation flag is "1" or more. (S600).

In S600, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is "1" or more (when the determination in S600 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs additional addition and promotion lottery processing (S601).

In the additional addition and promotion lottery processing, the sub CPU 102 determines the addition content based on the additional addition and promotion lottery table (see FIG. 60), and the additional addition flag corresponding to the determined addition content (“additional addition A flag”, Turn on the "additional addition B flag", "additional addition C1 flag", "additional addition C2 flag" or "additional addition C3 flag").

In addition, only one of the additional additional flags is turned on. Moreover, even if the additional addition may shift to the upper rank, it does not shift to the lower rank. For example, if the additional content determined this time is higher than the additional content determined last time, the additional addition flag corresponding to the additional content determined last time is turned off, and the additional addition flag corresponding to the additional content determined this time is turned on. .. On the other hand, if the additional content determined this time is lower than the additional content determined last time, the additional addition flag corresponding to the previously determined additional content is kept on.

In S600, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is not "1" or more (when the determination in S600 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation rewriting lottery process (S602).

In the BR continuation rewriting lottery process, the sub CPU 102 draws whether or not to rewrite the BR "discontinuity" to "continuation" based on the BR continuation rewriting lottery table (not shown). Then, when it is decided to rewrite the "discontinuation" of the BR to the "continuation", the BR continuation processing is performed (see FIG. 108).

After the processing of S601 and S602, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the BR game number counter by "1" (S603). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BR game number counter is "1" or more (S604). In S604, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR game number counter is "1" or more (when the determination in S604 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART and performs the processing at the time of receiving the start command (process at the time of receiving the start command). Move to S546 (see FIG. 103).

In S604, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR game number counter is not "1" or more (when the determination in S604 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BR continuation flag is "1" or more. (S605).

In S605, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is not "1" or more (when the determination in S605 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the BR end processing (S606). At the end of BR processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BR flag (“BR1 flag 1” or “BR2 flag”). Further, when the turned-off flag is the "BR2 flag", or when the number of BR continuations is a predetermined number (for example, "20 or more"), the sub CPU 102 uses the "SBB flag" and the "SBB preparing flag". And "BR1 flag" are turned on. After the processing of S606, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

In S605, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is "1" or more (when the determination in S605 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an additional lottery process when the BR continues (S607). In the BR continuation addition process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the BR continuation addition lottery table (not shown), and adds the determined number of additional games to the value of the ART game number counter. In the additional lottery process for continuing BR of the present embodiment, "0" is not determined as the number of additional games, but a specified number (for example, "10") or more is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional addition flag is on (S608). In S608, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition flag is ON (when the determination in S608 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "2" to the value of the additional addition game number counter (S609). After the processing of S609, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

In S608, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition flag is not ON (when the determination in S608 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation processing (S610). After the processing of S610, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the ART pullback process performed in S586 in the flowchart of the process during ART (see FIGS. 105 and 106) will be described. The ART pullback process is a process of performing so-called pullback, in which "50" is set again in the ART game number counter with a predetermined probability while the sub-game state is the second ART.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is "0" (S611).

In S611, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S611 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART pullback process and processes during ART (FIG. 105 and FIG. 106) also end.

In S611, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is "0" (when the determination in S611 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART pullback lottery process (S612). In the ART pullback lottery process, the sub CPU 102 performs a lottery process using random numbers on the program, and when the lottery result is a win, "50" is set again in the ART game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 subtracts a predetermined lottery value from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment), and when the result of the subtraction becomes negative, Judged as winning. The value of the predetermined lottery value can be arbitrarily set, but in the present embodiment, it is set to, for example, "3000" so that the probability of pullback is 1% or less.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is "0" (S613). If no pullback is performed in the ART pullback lottery process of S612, the value of the ART game number counter remains "0", so that the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is "0". Judgment (S613YES determination). Then, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART pullback process and also ends the ART in-process (see FIGS. 105 and 106).

When a pullback is performed in the ART pullback lottery process of S612, "50" is set again in the ART game number counter, so that the sub CPU 613 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not "0". (S613NO determination). Then, the sub CPU 102 turns on the navigation return waiting state flag (see FIG. 77) (S614), ends the ART pullback process, and also ends the ART in-process (see FIGS. 105 and 106).

[BR continuous processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the BR continuous processing performed in S595 and S606 in the flowchart of the processing during ART (see FIGS. 105 and 106) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BR continuation flag (S621). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds "10" to the value of the BR game number counter (S622). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BR successive continuation flag is "1" (S623).

In S623, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BR continuation continuation flag is "1" (when the determination in S623 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BR continuation flag and sets the BR continuation continuation storage area to "1". 2 ”is set (stored) (S624).

In S623, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BR continuation continuation flag is not "1" (when the determination in S623 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation lottery process (S625). In the BR continuous lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to continue BR based on the BR1 continuous lottery table or the BR2 continuous lottery table.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is decided to continue BR in S625 (S626). In S626, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it has not been determined to continue the BR (when the determination in S626 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BR continuation processing and the ART processing (FIGS. 105 and FIG. 106) also ends.

After the processing of S624, or when the determination of YES in S626, the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation determination processing (S627). The details of the BR continuation determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 108 described later. After the processing of S627, the sub CPU 102 ends the BR continuation processing, and also ends the ART processing (see FIGS. 105 and 106).

[Processing when BR continuation is decided]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the BR continuation determination processing performed in S627 in the flowchart of the BR continuation processing flowchart (see FIG. 108) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs an additional lottery process during BR (S641). In the additional addition lottery process during BR, the sub CPU 102 determines the additional addition content based on the additional addition lottery table during BR. Then, the additional addition flag ("additional addition A flag", "additional addition B flag", "additional addition C1 flag", "additional addition C2 flag" or "additional addition C3 flag") corresponding to the determined additional addition content is set. Turn on.

Next, the sub CPU 102 turns on the BR continuation flag (S642). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a continuous lottery process one after another in BR (S643). In the BB one after another continuous lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to "continue" the BR one after another based on the BR one after another continuous lottery table (not shown). Then, when it is decided to "continue" the BR one after another, "1" is stored in the BR one after another continuation storage area. If the value of the BR successive continuous storage area is "2", the BR continuous continuous lottery process is not performed. After the processing of S643, the sub CPU 102 ends the BR continuation determination processing, and also ends the BR continuation processing (see FIG. 108).

[Normal processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the normal processing performed in S545 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is in CZ (S661). During CZ, the CZ flag is on and the CZ precursor flag is off. When the sub CPU 102 determines in S661 that it is not in the CZ (when the determination in S661 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a mode lottery process (S662).

In the present embodiment, in a general state, a plurality of modes in which the winning rate of CZ and the winning rate of a bonus (pseudo-bonus) are different are provided. In the mode lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the mode based on the mode lottery table (not shown), and shifts to the determined mode.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a CZ rush lottery process (S663). In the CZ rush lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ is won based on the CZ rush lottery table (not shown). Then, when the winning of the CZ is determined, the CZ flag and the CZ precursor flag corresponding to the determined CZ are turned on. Further, the number of precursor games is determined based on the precursor game number lottery table (not shown), and the determined precursor games are stored in the precursor game counter.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a bonus lottery process based on the bonus lottery table (see FIG. 53) (S664). When the winning of the bonus is determined by the bonus lottery process, the type of bonus ("SBB", "BB" or "RB") is determined based on the bonus distribution lottery table (not shown). Then, the flag (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) and the precursor flag (“BB precursor flag” or “RB precursor flag”) corresponding to the determined bonus are turned on. Further, the number of precursor games is determined based on the precursor game number lottery table (not shown), and the determined precursor games are stored in the precursor game counter. After the processing of S664, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S661 that the sub CPU 102 is in the CZ (when the determination in S661 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a cut-in additional lottery process in the CZ (S665). In the CZ medium cut-in additional lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to add "1" to the specified number of times based on the CZ medium cut-in additional lottery table (see FIG. 51). Then, when it is decided to add "1" to the specified number of times, "1" is added to the CI number counter in CZ.
As the cut-in additional lottery process in CZ according to the game machine of the present invention, it may be determined whether or not to add "2" or more to the specified number of times.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") has been won (S666). In S666, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") has been won (when the determination in S666 is YES), the sub CPU 102 "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the black BAR)". Is set (S667).

When the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") is won, the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left", and the stop operation timing is a predetermined timing (aiming at the black BAR). Is a condition, the combination of symbols related to "C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E" is stopped and displayed. As a result, when the winning number "4" is won and the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left", depending on the timing of the stop operation, "black BAR"-"black BAR" corresponding to "C_BAR_A" "-The combination of" black BAR "symbols may be stopped and displayed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") is won, "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the black BAR)" is performed.

In the present embodiment, when the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") is won during CZ, the winning of the bonus is determined. Therefore, when the stop operation is performed according to the "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the black BAR)" and the combination of the "black BAR"-"black BAR"-"black BAR" symbols is stopped and displayed, the player , You can recognize that you have won the bonus (pseudo bonus).

After the processing of S667, the sub CPU 102 performs the bonus winning processing (S668). In the bonus winning process, the sub CPU 102 determines the type of bonus (“SBB”, “BB” or “RB”) based on the bonus distribution lottery table (not shown). Then, the flag corresponding to the determined bonus (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) and the preparing flag (“SBB preparing flag”, “BB preparing flag” or “RB preparing flag”) ) Is turned on.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs CZ end processing (S669). In the CZ end processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the CZ flag and clears the values of the CZ game number counter and the CI number counter during CZ. After the processing of S669, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

In S666, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") has not been won (when the determination in S666 is NO), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the CZ game number counter. (S670).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a cut-in generation lottery process during CZ (S671). The CZ medium cut-in generation lottery process determines whether or not to generate a cut-in (“reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at black BAR)”) based on the CZ medium cut-in generation lottery table (see FIG. 52). ..

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is a win to generate a cut-in (S672). In S672, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not a win to generate a cut-in (when the determination in S672 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the normal intermediate processing and performs the processing at the time of receiving the start command (when the process is received. Move to S546 (see FIG. 103).

In S672, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is a win to generate a cut-in (when the determination in S672 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the black BAR)" (S673). ).

In the present embodiment, when "loss" is determined by the internal lottery process, a lottery is performed in S671 to determine whether or not to generate a cut-in ("reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at black BAR)"). Therefore, in S671, even if it is decided to generate a cut-in and the stop operation is performed according to "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at black BAR)", "black BAR"-"black BAR"-"black BAR" The combination of symbols of "" is not stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the stop table selected at the time of "loss" of the present embodiment displays the right when the stop order is "right, left, middle" and the stop operation timing is a predetermined timing (aiming at the black BAR). The number of sliding pieces at which the "black BAR" can be stopped is set in the window 4R and the middle display window 4C. As a result, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the combination of the "black BAR"-"black BAR"-"black BAR" symbols will be stopped and displayed until the second stop.

After the processing of S673, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the CI count counter in CZ by "1" (S674). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the CI count counter in CZ is "0" (S675). In S675, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the CI count counter during CZ is not "0" (when the determination in S675 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing and starts processing when the start command is received. The process moves to S546 of the process (see FIG. 103).

In S675, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the CI count counter in CZ is "0" (when the determination in S675 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs causal value related processing (S676). The details of the causal value-related processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 111 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs CZ end processing (S677). After the processing of S677, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

[Causal value related processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the causal value-related processing performed in S676 in the flowchart of the normal processing (see FIG. 110) and S723 in the flowchart of the processing in preparation (see FIG. 112) will be described.
The causal value-related processing of the present embodiment is executed at various timings based on the conditions according to the various causal value lottery tables.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs a causal value accumulation lottery process (S701). In the causal value accumulation lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the causal value based on various causal value accumulation lottery tables (see FIGS. 64 to 72), and adds the determined causal value to the causal value counter.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the causal value counter exceeds "100" (S702). In S702, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter does not exceed "100" (when the determination in S702 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the causal value related processing and performs the processing during normal processing (normal processing). It is transferred to S677 of (see FIG. 110) or S724 of the preparatory process (see FIG. 112).

In S702, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter exceeds "100" (when the determination in S702 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the causal value stock counter (S703). Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the causal value counter by "100" (S704). After the processing of S704, the sub CPU 102 ends the causal value-related processing, and shifts the processing to S677 of the normal intermediate processing (see FIG. 110) or S724 of the preparing processing (see FIG. 112).

[Processing in preparation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the preparatory process to be performed in S546 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is being prepared (S721). In S721, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation is not in progress (when the determination in S721 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the preparation process and shifts the process to S547 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103). Move.

In S721, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation is in progress (when the determination in S721 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the preparation digestion G number counter (S722). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs causal value related processing (S723).

After the processing of S723, the sub CPU 102 refers to the operating condition table (see FIG. 76) and determines whether or not the operating conditions are satisfied (S724). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S724 that the operating conditions are not satisfied (NO in S724), the sub CPU 102 turns off the corresponding preparing flag and clears the value of the preparing digestion G number counter. (S725). After the processing of S725, the sub CPU 102 ends the preparatory processing, and shifts the processing to S547 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

[Omen check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the precursor check process performed in S547 in the flowchart of the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is in the precursor (S741). During the omen, the value of the omen game counter is "1" or more. In S741, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the precursor is not in progress (when the determination in S741 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and shifts the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103). Move.

In S741, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the omen is in progress (when the determination in S741 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the omen game number counter by "1" (S742). However, if the preparing flag is on, the value of the precursor game counter is not subtracted by "1".

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number counter has become "0" (S473). In S743, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S743 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and receives a start command. Move to S548 of time processing (see FIG. 103).

In S743, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter has become "0" (when the determination in S743 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the start of CZ (S744). .. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is at the start of CZ by the CZ precursor flag (“CZ1 precursor flag” or “CZ2 precursor flag”).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S744 that it is at the start of CZ (when the determination in S744 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the CZ start process (S745).

In the CZ start processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the corresponding precursor flag and sets the initial value according to the type of the CZ flag in the CI count counter during CZ. In the present embodiment, the initial value when the CZ1 flag is on is "4", and the initial value when the CZ2 flag is on is "10". After the process of S745, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process, and shifts the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

In S744, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not at the start of CZ (when the determination in S744 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is at the start of the bonus (S746). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the start of the bonus by the precursor flag (“BB precursor flag” or “RB precursor flag”) related to the pseudo bonus.

In S746, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is the start of the bonus (when the determination in S746 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process at the start of the bonus (S747). In the bonus start processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the precursor flag and performs the bonus start processing according to the flag (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) related to the pseudo bonus that is turned on. Do.

When the SBB flag is on, the sub CPU 102 turns on the SBB preparing flag, and when the BB flag is on, the sub CPU 102 turns on the BB preparing flag. When the RB flag is on, the sub CPU 102 turns on the RB preparing flag. After the process of S747, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process, and shifts the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

In S746, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not at the start of the bonus (when the determination in S746 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is at the start of ART (second ART) (S748). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the start of ART (second ART) by the ART precursor flag.

In S748, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is the start of ART (second ART) (when the determination in S748 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART start time processing (S749). In the ART start processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the precursor flag and turns on the ART preparing flag. However, when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, the ART preparing flag is not turned on. Further, in the ART start processing, the sub CPU 102 sets "50" in the ART game number counter. After the processing of S749, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check processing, and shifts the processing to S548 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

In S748, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not at the start of ART (second ART) (when the determination in S748 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is at the start of BR (S750). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the start of BR by the BR precursor flag.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S750 that it is not at the start of BR (when the determination in S750 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and performs the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103) S548. Move to.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S750 that it is the start of BR (when the determination in S750 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns off the BR precursor flag (S751). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs BR continuation processing (S752). After the processing of S752, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check processing, and shifts the processing to S548 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

[Direction lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the effect lottery process performed in S548 in the flowchart of the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs the effect number lottery process (S761). In the effect number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the effect number lottery table (not shown) and determines the effect number based on various parameters stored in the sub storage area. Then, the determined effect number is stored in the sub storage area.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect corresponding to the determined effect number is a development effect (failure) (S762). In S762, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect corresponding to the determined effect number is not a development effect (failure) (when the determination in S762 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S768.

In S762, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect corresponding to the determined effect number is a development effect (failure) (when the determination in S762 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a provisional causal value lottery process (S763). .. In the provisional causal value lottery process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the provisional causal value lottery table and determines the provisional causal value based on the type of development effect. Then, the determined provisional causal value is stored in the sub storage area.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a causal value determination process (S764). In the causal value determination process, the sub CPU 102 corrects the determined provisional causal value to the maximum value within the range of the internal point, and determines it as the causal value. Then, the determined causal value is added to the value of the causal value counter. Further, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the same value as the determined causal value from the value of the internal point counter.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the causal value counter exceeds "100" (S765). In S765, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter does not exceed "100" (when the determination in S765 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S768.

In S765, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter exceeds "100" (when the determination in S765 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the value of the causal value stock (S766). ..

Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the causal value counter by "100" (S767). After the processing of S767, when the determination in S762 or S765 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lock effect has occurred (S768). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a lock effect is generated based on the parameters of the start command.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S768 that the lock effect has not occurred (when the determination in S768 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect lottery process and also ends the process when the start command is received (see FIG. 103). To do. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the lock effect has occurred (when the determination in S768 is YES), the sub CPU 102 saves the effect number determined in S761 in the storage area after the end of the lock effect (S769).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a fake effect parameter lottery process (S770). The fake effect parameter is a parameter for determining the effect number of the fake effect by the same process as the normal effect number lottery process (performed in S761), and is a parameter that substitutes for the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the development effect is in progress or the confirmation screen is in progress (S771). The confirmation screen means that the liquid crystal display device 11 is displaying a screen for notifying that the bonus has been determined.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S771 that the development effect is not in progress or the confirmation screen is not in progress (when the determination in S771 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the effect number lottery process using the fake effect parameter determined in S770. S772). After the processing of S772, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect lottery processing, and also ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103).

In S771, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the development effect is in progress or the confirmation screen is in progress (when the determination in S771 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the fake push order navigation effect lottery process (S773). After the processing of S773, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect lottery processing, and also ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103).

[Processing when receiving reel stop command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the reel stop command reception processing performed in S525 in the flowchart (see FIG. 102) of the effect content determination processing will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the additional game number counter is "1" (S781). In S781, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is not "1" (when the determination in S781 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command and directs the processing. The process moves to S526 of the content determination process (see FIG. 102).

In S781, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "1" (when the determination in S781 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional additional B flag is on. (S782). In S782, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition B flag is not on (when the determination in S782 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and performs the processing to determine the effect content (FIG. FIG. (Refer to 102), move to S526.

In S782, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition B flag is ON (when the determination in S782 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the additional addition B addition G number lottery process (S783). In the additional B additional G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the additional B additional G number lottery table, and adds the determined additional game number to the additional game number counter.

In the additional B additional G number lottery process, the number of additional games determined in the previous stop operation is referred to. The number of additional games determined in the previous stop operation is acquired by referring to the number of additional games counter.

After the process of S783, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the third stop operation (S784). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S784 that the operation is not the third stop operation (when the determination in S784 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception processing and performs the processing to determine the effect content (see FIG. 102). ) S526.

In S784, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation is the third stop operation (when the determination in S784 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the additional addition B end time processing (S785). In the processing at the end of the additional addition B, the sub CPU 102 turns off the additional addition B flag. Further, the value of the additional game number counter is added to the ART game number counter, and the value of the additional game number counter is cleared. After the processing of S785, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and shifts the processing to S526 of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 102).

[Processing when receiving display command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the display command reception processing performed in S528 in the flowchart (see FIG. 102) of the effect content determination processing will be described. In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs a sub-game state transition process and a penalty determination process for shifting the sub-game state based on the winning mode.

First, the sub CPU 102 refers to various flags in the sub storage area (see FIG. 77), and determines whether or not the sub game state is in the normal state (S801). The sub CPU 102 has the "CZ1 flag", "CZ2 flag", "SBB flag", "BB flag", "RB flag", "ART flag", "BR1 flag", "BR2 flag" and "ART flag" of the sub storage area. Refer to "Preparing flags", and if these flags are off, it is determined that the sub-game state is normal.

In S801, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is in the normal state (when the determination in S801 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the sub game state transition process in the normal state (S802). Specifically, when the CZ precursor flag (“CZ1 precursor flag” or “CZ2 precursor flag”) of the sub storage area (see FIG. 77) is on and the number of CZ precursor games is 0, the sub CPU 102 sets the sub game state. Transfer to CZ. Further, the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus, and when the BB precursor flag of the sub storage area is on and the number of BB precursor games is 0, the sub game state is shifted between the flags. Further, when the ART game number counter is 1 or more, the ART precursor flag is off, and the number of ART precursor games is 0, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state during the preparation for ART. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S816 after the sub-game state transition process (S802) during normal operation.

In S801, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not normal (when the determination in S801 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the CZ flag (see FIG. 77) of the sub storage area, and the sub game state is changed. It is determined whether or not it is in CZ (S803). When the CZ flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is in CZ.

In S803, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is in the CZ (when the determination in S803 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the sub game state transition process in the CZ (S804). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus, and when the BB precursor flag of the sub storage area is on and the number of BB precursor games is 0, the sub game state is shifted between the flags. Further, when the CI number counter in CZ is 0, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to the normal state. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S816 after the sub game state transition process (S804) in the CZ.

In S803, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not in CZ (when the determination in S803 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART preparation flag (see FIG. 77) of the sub storage area, and the sub game The state determines whether or not ART is being prepared (S805). When the ART preparation flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is ART preparation.

In S805, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is preparing for ART (when the determination in S805 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the sub game state transition process during ART preparation (S806). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus, and when the BB precursor flag of the sub storage area is on and the number of BB precursor games is 0, the sub game state is shifted between the flags. Further, when the ART rush replay, that is, any one of "C_Small V_REP_A" to "C_Small V_REP_C" wins a prize, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to the ART. Further, when the stop operation is performed by the player in a stop order different from the notified stop order, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to the ART. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S816 after the sub game state transition process (S806) during ART preparation.

In S805, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not preparing for ART (when the determination in S805 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART flag (see FIG. 77) of the sub storage area and the sub game state. Determines whether or not it is in ART (S807). When the ART flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is in ART.

In S807, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is in ART (when the determination in S807 is YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the navigation return waiting state flag (see FIG. 77) of the sub storage area. Whether or not the first stop operation (first stop operation) is performed on a reel other than the left reel 3L, or whether the navigation return waiting state flag is on and the navigation return waiting state flag is on and , It is determined whether or not it is a predetermined winning number related to the notification of the stop order, that is, whether or not the predetermined winning number related to the notification of the stop order is determined by the main control circuit 91. Based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning number is a predetermined winning number related to the notification of the stop order. The predetermined winning numbers related to the notification of the stop order in the ART (second ART) are, for example, the above-mentioned winning numbers "12" and "25".

In S808, when it is determined that the navigation return waiting state flag is on and the first stop operation is performed on a target other than the left reel 3L, or the navigation return waiting state flag is on and a predetermined stop order is notified. When it is the winning number (when the determination in S808 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns off the navigation return waiting state flag (S809). Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S810.
In the present embodiment, when the navigation return waiting state flag is on, the sub-game state is the "second ART", but the liquid crystal display device 11 is in the normal state (for example, the sub-game state is the "general state"). A screen similar to the one displayed at) is displayed. In this case, the stop operation by pressing forward is recommended. Therefore, if the stop operation (irregular push) is performed in a stop order other than the forward push when the navigation return wait state flag is on, the main CPU 93 determines a predetermined winning number related to the notification of the stop order as a penalty. Even if it is not, set the navigation return wait status flag to off. Therefore, the ART game number counter is subtracted from the next game (see S584 and S585 in FIG. 105).

In S808, when the navigation return waiting state flag is off, it is not determined that the first stop operation (the first stop operation is performed) is performed on a reel other than the left reel 3L, or the stop order is notified. If it is not the predetermined winning number (when the determination in S809 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S810.

In S810, the sub CPU 102 performs the sub game state transition process during ART. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus, and when the BB precursor flag of the sub storage area is on and the number of BB precursor games is 0, the sub game state is shifted between the flags. Further, when the ART game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to the normal state. Further, when the BR game number counter is 1 or more, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to BR. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S816 after the sub game state transition process (S810) during ART.

In S807, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not in ART (when the determination in S807 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the BR1 flag and the BR2 flag (see FIG. 77) of the sub storage area and subs. It is determined whether or not the gaming state is in BR (S811). When the BR1 flag or the BR2 flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is in BR.

In S811, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is in BR (when the determination in S811 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the sub game state transition process during BR (S812). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to "BR stock storage area 1" to "BR stock storage area 32" (see FIG. 77) of the sub storage area, and "1" and "2" are stored in each of them. If not, that is, without BR stock, the BR game number counter is 0, and if the SBB is won, that is, if there is SBB stock, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state between the flags. Further, when the sub CPU 102 has no BR stock and the BR game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to the ART. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S816 after the sub game state transition process (S812) during BR.

In S811, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not in BR (when the determination in S811 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the inter-flag flag of the sub storage area (see FIG. 77) and refers to the sub game state. Determines whether or not it is between flags (S813). When the inter-flag flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub-game state is between the flags.

In S813, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is between the flags (when the determination in S813 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the sub game state transition process between the flags (S814). Specifically, when the RT gaming state is the RT3 state, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state during the first ART, that is, during the pseudo bonus. Further, when the stop operation is performed by the player in a stop order different from the notified stop order, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to the pseudo bonus. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S816 after the sub-game state transition process (S814) between the flags.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the sub game state transition process during the pseudo bonus (S815). Specifically, when the bonus winning game number counter is 0 and the pseudo bonus is not won during the pseudo bonus, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to normal. Further, when the bonus winning game number counter is 0 and the pseudo bonus is won during the pseudo bonus, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state between the flags. Further, when the bonus winning game number counter is 0 and the ART game number counter is 1 or more, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to ART preparation. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S816 after the sub game state transition process (S815) during the pseudo bonus.

The sub CPU 102 performs the penalty determination process in S816. In the penalty determination process, the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus penalty flag (see FIG. 77) when the stop operation is performed in a stop order different from the notified stop order and the pseudo bonus is established. Details of the penalty determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 117. After the penalty determination process (S816), the sub CPU 102 ends the process when the display command is received.

[Penalty judgment processing]
Next, the penalty determination process performed in S816 in the flowchart of the display command reception process (see FIG. 116) will be described with reference to FIG. 117. The penalty determination process is a process of turning on the pseudo bonus penalty flag (see FIG. 77) when the stop operation is performed in a stop order different from the notified stop order and the pseudo bonus is established.

For example, when the determined pseudo-bonus type is RB and the rotation stop numbers (see FIG. 48) are "14" to "17", the sub CPU 102 is a combination of symbols related to "C_BNS * 2". (A combination of symbols in which the first ART in which the type of the pseudo bonus is RB is started when the stop is displayed) is notified of the stop order for displaying the stop. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48, when the rotation stop numbers are "14" and "15", "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left" is notified as the stop order. When the rotation stop numbers are "16" and "17", "left middle right" or "left and right middle" is notified as the stop order. Then, when the stop operation is performed according to the notified stop order and the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS * 2" is stopped and displayed, the first ART in which the pseudo-bonus type is RB is started.

However, even if the determined pseudo-bonus type is RB and the rotation stop numbers are "14" and "15", and the sub CPU 102 notifies "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left" as the stop order, the game The person may perform the stop operation in the stop order of "left middle right" or "left and right middle" without following the stop order. Further, even if the determined pseudo-bonus type is RB and the rotation stop numbers are "16" and "17", and the sub CPU 102 notifies "left middle right" or "left and right middle" as the stop order, the game is played. A person may perform a stop operation in the stop order of "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left" without following the stop order. In these cases, when the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS * 1" is stopped and displayed, the first ART in which the type of pseudo-bonus is BB is started. As described above, when the stop operation is performed in the stop order different from the notified stop order and the pseudo bonus is established, the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus penalty flag in the penalty determination process. At this time, the sub CPU 102 turns off the RB flag of the sub storage area (see FIG. 77) and turns on the BB flag. In addition, when the determined pseudo-bonus type is BB, and the stop operation is performed without following the stop order notified by the player, the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS * 2" is stopped and displayed. However, the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus penalty flag in the penalty determination process. At this time, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BB flag of the sub storage area (see FIG. 77) and turns on the RB flag. The sub CPU 102 turns off the pseudo-bonus penalty flag when the stop operation is performed in a stop order different from the notified stop order and the pseudo-bonus started when the pseudo-bonus is established is completed.

As shown in FIG. 117, first, in the penalty determination process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo-bonus is in progress (S817). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the sub storage area (see FIG. 77), and if any of the "SBB flag", "BB flag", and "RB flag" is on, it is determined that a pseudo bonus is in progress, and any of them. If the flag of is not turned on, it is determined that the pseudo bonus is not in progress.

If it is determined in S817 that the pseudo-bonus is not in progress (NO in S817), the sub CPU 102 ends the penalty determination process.

In S817, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus is in progress (YES in S817), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus is established by ignoring the navigation, that is, the stop operation is performed in a stop order different from the notified stop order. Is performed, and it is determined whether or not the pseudo bonus has been won (S818). When the stop operation is performed in the notified stop order and the pseudo bonus is won, the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo bonus is not established by ignoring the navigation.

In S818, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus is not established by ignoring the navigation (when the determination in S818 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the penalty determination process.

In S818, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus is established by ignoring the navigation (when the determination in S818 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus penalty flag (see FIG. 77) of the sub storage area (S819). After S819, the sub CPU 102 ends the penalty determination process.

[Processing when no operation command is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the non-operation command reception processing performed in S537 in the flowchart (see FIG. 102) of the effect content determination processing will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the additional game number counter is "1" (S820). In S820, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is not "1" (when the determination in S820 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S827.

In S820, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "1" (when the determination in S820 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional additional C flag is on. (S821). In S821, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional C flag is not on (when the determination in S821 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S827.

In S821, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional additional C flag is ON (when the determination in S821 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the input number is the number that can start the game (S822). The fact that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game means that the start operation can be accepted.

In S822, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of input sheets is not the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S822 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S827. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S822 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BET switch 62 is on (S823). The BET switch 62 performs on-edge detection when the MAX bet button 14 (1 bet button 15) is pressed.

In S823, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BET switch 62 is not on (when the determination in S823 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S827. On the other hand, in S823, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BET switch 62 is ON (when the determination in S823 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an additional addition C addition G number lottery process (S824).

In the additional C additional G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the additional C additional G number lottery table. Then, the determined number of additional games is added to the value of the number of additional games counter. When the number of additional games of "1" or more is determined in the lottery process for the number of additional G added C, the "continuation" of the additional additional C is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not "continuation" is determined in the additional addition C addition G number lottery process (S825). In S825, when the sub CPU 102 determines that "continuation" has been determined (when the determination in S825 is YES), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S827.

In S825, when the sub CPU 102 determines that "continuation" has not been determined (when the determination in S825 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs additional addition C end time processing (S826). In the processing at the end of the additional addition C, the sub CPU 102 turns off the additional addition C flag (“additional addition C1 flag”, “additional addition C2 flag”, or “additional addition C3 flag”). Further, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the additional game number counter to the value of the ART game number counter. Then, the value of the additional game number counter is cleared.

After the processing of S826, if S820, S821, S822 or S823 is determined to be 23NO, or if S825 is determined to be YES, the sub CPU 102 performs the lock effect control process (S827). The details of the lock effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 119 described later. After the processing of S827, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the no-operation command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 102).

[Lock effect control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the lock effect control process performed in S827 in the flowchart of the non-operation command reception process (see FIG. 118) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the RT gaming state controlled by the main CPU 93 is the RT4 gaming state (S828). The RT game state information controlled by the main CPU 93 is sent from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as a parameter such as a start command. In S828, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S828 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S832.

In S828, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S828 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is preparing for ART or during the first ART (pseudo bonus). It is determined whether or not it is other than (S829). In S829, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not during ART preparation or the first ART (pseudo bonus) (when the determination in S829 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S832.

In S829, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is other than during ART preparation or the first ART (pseudo bonus) (when the determination in S829 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is locked under the control of the main CPU 93. It is determined whether or not the production brake has been started (S830).

When the lock effect (hereinafter referred to as "main lock effect") controlled by the main CPU 93 according to the present embodiment is started, first, the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated forward. Next, a brake is generated on the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R to stop the forward rotation. Then, after rotating the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the reverse direction, the main lock effect is finished. Information indicating that the forward rotation, braking, stopping, and reverse rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have been started is included in, for example, a no-operation command.

In S830, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the brake for the main lock effect has not been started (when the determination in S830 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S832.

In S830, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the brake for the main lock effect has been started (when the determination in S830 is YES), the sub CPU 102 starts the delay count (S831). In this process, the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 is set in the delay counter. After the processing of S831, the sub CPU 102 ends the lock effect control processing, and also ends the non-operation command reception processing (see FIG. 118).

When the determination in S828, S829 or S830 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the delay is being counted (S832). In S832, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the delay count is not in progress (when the determination in S832 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S837.

In S832, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the delay count is in progress (when the determination in S832 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the main lock effect is in progress (S833). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S833 that the main lock effect is not in progress (when the determination in S833 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S837.

In S833, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the main lock effect is in progress (when the determination in S833 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value obtained by subtracting the value of the delay counter from the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 exceeds 1000000. (S834).

In the present embodiment, the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 is acquired in S831 and set in the delay counter. That is, with the number of clocks of the sub CPU acquired in S831 as the counting starting point, it is determined whether or not the number of clocks obtained by adding the number of 1000000 clocks from the number of clocks is acquired from the sub CPU 102.

In the present embodiment, when the number of clocks obtained by adding the number of clocks of 1000000 to the number of clocks set in the delay counter is acquired from the sub CPU 102, one second has elapsed from the time when the number of clocks of the sub CPU is set in the delay counter. To do. Therefore, in S831, it is determined whether or not one second has elapsed since the brake for the main lock effect was generated.

In S834, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value obtained by subtracting the value of the delay counter from the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 does not exceed 1000000 (when the determination in S834 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S837.

In S834, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value obtained by subtracting the value of the delay counter from the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 exceeds 1,000,000 (when the determination in S834 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the subblock effect determination process (when the determination is YES). S835). In the sub-game effect determination process, a lock effect (hereinafter referred to as "sub-game effect") controlled by the sub CPU 102 is determined according to the internal winning combination, the sub-game state, and the like.

Next, the sub CPU 102 ends the delay count (S836). In this process, the value of the delay counter is cleared.

After the processing of S836, when the determination in S832, S833 or S834 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the main lock effect is completed (S837). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect using the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is completed. In S837, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the main lock effect has not been completed (when the determination in S837 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the lock effect control process and processes when a non-operation command is received (FIG. 118). See) also ends.

In S837, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the main lock effect has ended (when the determination in S837 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the effect number stored in the storage area after the lock effect ends (S838). As a result, the effect determined before the game lock occurs (the effect determined before the fake effect and the sublock effect) is executed after the game lock ends.

After the processing of S838, the sub CPU 102 ends the lock effect control processing, and also ends the non-operation command reception processing (see FIG. 118).

[Direction related to game lock]
Next, the effect to be executed when the game lock occurs will be described.

In the present embodiment, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a game lock during the RT4 game state (see FIGS. 39 and 82). When the occurrence of the game lock is determined, the game lock is started, and even if the throwing operation or the stopping operation is performed until a predetermined period elapses, the detection is treated as invalid or delayed.

During the period in which the game lock is generated, the main CPU 93 (main control circuit 91) executes the main lock effect. This main lock effect is a reel effect using the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are operated in the order of forward rotation, brake, stop, and reverse rotation.

On the other hand, when the game lock occurs, the sub CPU 102 stores the effect number determined by the effect number lottery process in the storage area after the end of the lock effect (S769 in FIG. 114). Then, the fake effect is determined and executed (see S770 and S772 in FIG. 114). This fake effect can be determined by the effect number lottery process that is normally performed by using the fake effect parameter. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of program design and debugging related to the lottery of fake production.

The fake effect is the same as the effect performed in a normal game (a game in which the game lock does not occur), and is performed using the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 20L, 20R, and the like. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether the effect is a fake effect during the game lock or an effect performed in a normal game. As a result, during the forward rotation of the main lock effect and during the execution of the fake effect, the player can be made to think that the normal game has started.

When the brake of the main lock effect is generated, the sub CPU 102 (sub control circuit 101) uses the number of clocks of the CPU to count from the occurrence of the brake to the elapse of 1 second (see S830, S831, and S834 in FIG. 119). ). Then, one second after the brake of the main lock effect is generated, the sublock effect is determined and executed (see S835 in FIG. 119). That is, when one second elapses after the brake of the main lock effect is generated, the effect performed by using the display device is changed from the fake effect to the sublock effect.

In the sublock effect, the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 20L, 20R, etc. are used to shift to a pseudo bonus (first ART) or ART (second ART) (shift to a gaming state advantageous for the player). Notifies that has been determined. That is, in the subblock effect, an image different from the image displayed in the effect executed in the normal game is displayed.
When the game lock and the main lock effect are completed, the effect corresponding to the effect number stored in the storage area after the lock effect is completed is controlled by the sub CPU 102.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate forward in the same manner as in the case where the normal game is performed, and then the brake is generated. However, the fake effect controlled by the sub CPU 102 (same as the effect performed in a normal game) is sustained for 1 second after the brake is generated. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the notification of information by the effect related to the game lock.

Next, the accessory control task, the lamp control task, the sound control task, and the animation control task executed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123. These tasks (processes) are executed in parallel by the sub CPU 102. Further, these tasks are repeatedly executed by the sub CPU 102 in a cycle of 33 msec.

[Character control task]
First, the accessory control task will be described with reference to FIG. 120. The accessory control task is a task for managing and controlling the rotating accessory 123.

In S901 of the accessory control task, the sub CPU 102 takes out the accessory data registered in S518 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101), and shifts the process to S902 (S901). If there is no registered accessory data (including the case where it has already been taken out), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S902.

In S902, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is the registered accessory data (S902). When it is determined that there is no accessory data registered in S902 (when the determination in S902 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S905.

When it is determined that there is the accessory data registered in S902 (when the determination in S902 is YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the accessory effect sequence from the accessory sequence table based on the extracted accessory data (S903). .. The accessory effect sequence is composed of data indicating an effect pattern relating to the rotating accessory 123 (data indicating a rotation direction, rotation speed, rotation time, etc., hereinafter may be referred to as accessory pattern data). The character effect sequence may be composed of a single character effect pattern data, or may be composed of a combination of a plurality of character effect pattern data. Some of the accessory pattern data constituting the accessory effect sequence has a start condition for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the accessory pattern data. The start conditions include, for example, the operation of the start lever 16, the start of the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation. There are on (ON edge), release of pressing the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation off (OFF edge, display command reception), and payout. Further, in the character effect sequence, with respect to each character pattern data constituting the character effect sequence, the character pattern data is the character pattern data related to the character interlocking effect described later (hereinafter referred to as interlocking character pattern data). It is configured to include data indicating whether or not it is (may be referred to as). The character effect sequence table is a table composed of a plurality of character effect sequences, and associates the character data with the character effect sequence.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the acquired bonus effect sequence as the bonus effect sequence data to be referred to in the subsequent processing (S904).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the accessory effect sequence data update process (S905). In this process, the correctness of the start condition of each accessory pattern data constituting the set accessory effect sequence data is determined, and if it is determined that the start condition is satisfied, the rotating accessory 123 is determined by the pattern of the accessory pattern data. Instructs the accessory control board 78 to operate. For example, the character data registered in S518 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101) is the character data A, and the start of the character pattern data A constituting the character effect sequence data A associated with the character data A. When the condition is the first stop operation, when the sub control circuit 101 receives the reel stop command related to the first stop operation, the sub CPU 102 determines that the start condition of the accessory pattern data A is satisfied, and the accessory pattern data. The accessory control board 78 is instructed to operate the rotating accessory 123 in the pattern A.

When the character pattern data following the character pattern data A constituting the character effect sequence data A is the character pattern data B and the start condition of the character pattern data B is the second stop operation, the character pattern data When the sub-control circuit 101 receives the reel stop command related to the second stop operation while the rotating accessory 123 is operating in the pattern A, the sub CPU 102 determines that the start condition of the accessory pattern data B is satisfied. Then, the sub CPU 102 instructs the accessory control board 78 to stop the operation of the rotating accessory 123 in the pattern of the accessory pattern data A and operate in the pattern of the accessory pattern data B. Further, in the same case, when the rotating accessory 123 finishes the operation in the pattern of the accessory pattern data A before the sub-control circuit 101 receives the reel stop command related to the second stop operation, the rotating accessory 123 Regarding whether the sub CPU 102 instructs the accessory control board 78 to operate (loops) again with the pattern of the accessory pattern data A, or keeps the non-operating state. It can be arbitrarily set on the character effect sequence or on the character pattern data.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the accessory operating state information update process (S906). In this process, the sub CPU 102 has information indicating the operating state of the rotating accessory unit 122 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (accessory pattern data related to the instruction to the accessory control board 78, elapsed time from the instruction, etc.). The accessory operating state information is stored or overwritten.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the accessory effect interlocking request processing (S907). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the accessory pattern data for which the operation is instructed to the accessory control board 78 in S905 is the interlocking accessory pattern data, and if it is the interlocking accessory pattern data, it will be described later. Add (entry) an operation start request to the lamp status information, sound playback status information, and animation playback status information. Further, when the operation of the rotating accessory 123 in the pattern of the interlocking pattern data is completed, the sub CPU 102 adds (entries) the interlocking end request to the lamp state information, the sound reproduction state information, and the animation reproduction state information. The sub CPU 102 determines the end timing of the operation of the rotating accessory 123 in the pattern of the interlocking accessory pattern data based on the count of the number of rotations, the elapsed time from the operation instruction, and the like.
Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S901 after S907.

[Ramp control task]
Next, the lamp control task will be described with reference to FIG. 121. The lamp control task is a task of controlling the output of light from a light source such as the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22.

In S911 of the lamp control task, the sub CPU 102 takes out the lamp data registered in S517 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101), and shifts the process to S912 (S911). If there is no registered lamp data, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S912.

In S912, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is the registered lamp data (S912). When it is determined that there is no lamp data registered in S912 (when the determination in S912 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S915.

When it is determined that there is the lamp data registered in S912 (when the determination in S912 is YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the lamp effect sequence from the lamp sequence table based on the extracted lamp data (S913). The lamp effect sequence may be referred to as data indicating an effect pattern related to a light source such as the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 (data indicating a lighting pattern, the number of times of lighting, lighting time, brightness, color tone, etc., hereinafter referred to as lamp pattern data. ). The lamp effect sequence may be composed of a single lamp pattern data or may be composed of a combination of a plurality of lamp pattern data. Some of the lamp pattern data constituting the lamp effect sequence have a start condition for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the lamp pattern data. The start conditions include, for example, the operation of the start lever 16, the start of the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation. There are on (ON edge), release of pressing the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation off (OFF edge, display command reception), and payout. Further, in the lamp effect sequence, for each lamp pattern data constituting the lamp effect sequence, is the pattern data the pattern data (hereinafter referred to as interlocking lamp pattern data) related to the lamp accessory interlocking effect (see S919) described later? It is composed of data indicating whether or not it is present. The lamp effect sequence table is a table composed of a plurality of lamp effect sequences, and associates the lamp data with the lamp effect sequence. In the present embodiment, among the lamp pattern data in which the reception of the display command constituting the lamp effect sequence in the pseudo-bonus is set as the start condition, the data related to the reel lamp 22 shows a pattern of blinking at predetermined intervals.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the acquired lamp effect sequence as the lamp effect sequence data to be referred to in the subsequent processing (S914).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the display command is received (S915). When it is determined in S915 that the display command is not received (NO in S915), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S918.

In S915, when it is determined that the display command is received (YES in S915), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub-game state is in the pseudo-bonus and the pseudo-bonus penalty flag is on (S916). ). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the sub storage area (see FIG. 77), and any one of the "SBB flag", "BB flag", and "RB flag" is on, and the pseudo bonus penalty flag is on. It is determined whether or not it is. In S916, when it is determined that the sub-game state is not in the pseudo-bonus or the pseudo-bonus penalty flag is not on (when the determination in S916 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S918.

In S916, when it is determined that the sub-game state is in the pseudo-bonus and the pseudo-bonus penalty flag is ON (when the determination in S916 is YES), the lamp pattern data of the reel lamp 22 in the lamp effect sequence data set in S914. Is changed to all lighting patterns (S917). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 blinks the data related to the reel lamp 22 among the lamp pattern data whose start condition is the reception of a display command (third stop operation off) in the lamp effect sequence data at predetermined intervals. Rewrite from to all lighting patterns, that is, patterns that light without blinking.

In S918, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the lamp state information (S918). The lamp status information is information indicating the status of the headlamp 21, the reel lamp 22, and the like (lamp pattern data related to the instruction to the LED control board 72, elapsed time from the instruction, etc.), and is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. Has been done. The operation start request and the operation end request are added (entry) to the lamp state information in the accessory effect interlocking request process (S907) of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120). In S918, when there is neither an operation start request nor an operation end request in the lamp state information (when the determination in S918 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S920.

In S918, when there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the lamp state information (when the determination in S918 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the lamp accessory interlocking effect processing (S919). In the lamp accessory interlocking effect processing, the sub CPU 102 instructs the LED control board 72 so that the start timing and the end timing of the lamp effect by the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 and the accessory effect by the rotating accessory 123 are synchronized. I do. For example, when the accessory pattern data A with the first stop operation as the start condition is the interlocking accessory pattern and the operation start request is entered in the lamp state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120). If the lamp pattern data A that constitutes the lamp effect sequence data A set in S914 and has the first stop operation as the start condition is the interlocking lamp pattern data, the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 etc. are used in the lamp pattern data A. Instructs the LED control board 72 to light up. Further, when the operation end request related to the accessory pattern data A is entered in the lamp state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120), the sub CPU 102 uses the lamp pattern data A for the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22. The LED control board 72 is instructed to stop (end) the lighting of the lamps and the like. Even if the accessory pattern data A with the first stop operation as the start condition is the interlocking accessory pattern and the operation start request is entered in the lamp state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120). If the lamp pattern data B that constitutes the lamp effect sequence data B set in S914 and the first stop operation is the start condition is not the interlocking lamp pattern data, the sub CPU 102 gives an instruction relating to the lamp pattern data B in S919. The process shifts to S920 without performing.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the lamp effect sequence data update process (S920). In this process, the correctness of the start condition of each lamp pattern data constituting the set lamp effect sequence data is determined, and if it is determined that the start condition is satisfied, the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 are determined by the lamp pattern data pattern. Etc. are instructed to light up on the LED control board 72. If the lamp pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied is the interlocking lamp pattern data and the operation start request has not yet been entered in the lamp status information, the sub CPU 102 lights the lamp pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied. Hold instructions. In this case, at the timing when the process shifts to S918 and S919 after the operation start request is entered in the lamp state information, the sub CPU 102 gives an instruction to turn on the lamp pattern data that has been held. As a result, it is possible to synchronize the effect related to the interlocking accessory pattern data, for example, the effect related to the above-mentioned accessory pattern data A, and the effect related to the interlocking lamp pattern data, for example, the effect related to the above-mentioned lamp pattern data A. it can.

The other points of the lamp effect sequence data update process are the same as those of the above-mentioned accessory effect sequence data update process (S905 in FIG. 120), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the lamp operation state information update process (S921). In this process, the sub CPU 102 stores or overwrites the lamp state information. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S911.

[Sound control task]
Next, the sound control task will be described with reference to FIG. 122. The sound control task is a task of controlling the sound output from the speakers 20L and 20R.

In S931 of the sound control task, the sub CPU 102 takes out the sound data registered in S516 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101), and shifts the processing to S932 (S931). If there is no registered sound data, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S932.

In S932, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is registered sound data (S932). When it is determined that there is no sound data registered in S932 (when the determination in S932 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S935.

When it is determined that there is the sound data registered in S932 (when the determination in S932 is YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the sound effect sequence from the sound sequence table based on the extracted sound data (S933). The sound effect sequence is composed of data indicating an effect pattern related to sound output from the speakers 20L and 20R (data indicating a wav file name, various parameters, volume, etc., hereinafter may be referred to as sound pattern data). The sound effect sequence may be composed of a single sound pattern data or may be composed of a plurality of sound pattern data. The various parameters specify the corresponding channel number, the transfer rate per second of audio (kbps (kilo bits per second)), the presence / absence of loop reproduction, and the presence / absence of chain reproduction. Some of the sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence have a start condition for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the sound pattern data. The start conditions include, for example, the operation of the start lever 16, the start of the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation. There are on (ON edge), release of pressing the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation off (OFF edge, display command reception), and payout. Further, in the sound effect sequence, for each sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence, is the pattern data the pattern data (hereinafter referred to as interlocking sound pattern data) related to the sound accessory interlocking effect (see S936) described later? It is configured to include data indicating whether or not it is. The sound effect sequence table is a table composed of a plurality of sound effect sequences, and associates sound data with sound effect sequences.

Further, in the sound production sequence related to the effect of displaying the bonus confirmation screen, the sound reproduction state information described later is added every time a predetermined period elapses after the instruction related to the sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence is given. The marker data to be used is specified. For example, the sound pattern data C constituting the sound effect sequence C related to the effect of displaying the bonus confirmation screen is a sound that outputs a wav file name “effect sound C” for a predetermined time, for example, 5 seconds, with the start lever 16 operation as a start condition. It is a pattern. Further, the sound effect sequence C defines marker data 1 to 4 to be added to the sound reproduction state information described later every 1 second after the sub CPU 102 instructs the sound board 71 to output the effect sound C. ing.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the acquired sound effect sequence as sound effect sequence data to be referred to in the subsequent processing (S934).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the sound reproduction state information (S935). The sound reproduction state information is information indicating the output state of the effect sound (sound pattern data related to the instruction to the sound board 71, the elapsed time from the instruction, etc.), and is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. .. The operation start request and the operation end request are added (entry) to the sound reproduction state information in the character effect interlocking request process (S907) of the character control task (see FIG. 120). In S935, when there is neither an operation start request nor an operation end request in the sound reproduction state information (when the determination in S935 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S937.

In S935, when there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the sound reproduction state information (when the determination in S935 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the sound accessory interlocking effect processing (S936). In the sound accessory interlocking effect processing, the sub CPU 102 synchronizes the start timing and the end timing of the sound effect by outputting the effect sound from the speakers 20L and 20R and the accessory effect by the rotating accessory 123. Give instructions to. For example, when the accessory pattern data A with the first stop operation as the start condition is the interlocking accessory pattern, and the operation start request is entered in the sound reproduction state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120). If the sound effect sequence data A set in S934 is configured and the sound pattern data A with the first stop operation as the start condition is the interlocking sound pattern data, the effect sound related to the sound pattern data A is sounded by the speakers 20L, 20R. Instructs the sound board 71 to output from. Further, when the operation end request related to the character pattern data A is entered in the sound reproduction state information in S906 of the character control task (see FIG. 120), the sub CPU 102 outputs the effect sound related to the sound pattern data A. Instruct the sound board 71 to stop (end). Even if the accessory pattern data A with the first stop operation as the start condition is the interlocking accessory pattern and the operation start request is entered in the lamp state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120). If the sound effect sequence data B set in S934 is configured and the sound pattern data B whose start condition is the first stop operation is not the interlocking sound pattern data, the sub CPU 102 issues an instruction related to the sound pattern data B in S936. The process shifts to S937 without performing the process.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the sound effect sequence data update process (S937). In this process, the correctness of the start condition of the sound pattern data constituting the set sound effect sequence data is determined, and if it is determined that the start condition is satisfied, the sound is output so as to output the effect sound with the pattern of the sound pattern data. Instruct the board 71. If the sound pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied is the interlocking sound pattern data and the operation start request has not yet been entered in the sound playback state information, the sub CPU 102 performs an effect related to the sound pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied. Holds the sound output instruction. In this case, at the timing when the processing shifts to S935 and S936 after the operation start request is entered in the sound reproduction state information, the sub CPU 102 gives an instruction to output the effect sound related to the reserved sound pattern data. As a result, it is possible to synchronize the effect related to the interlocking accessory pattern data, for example, the effect related to the above-mentioned accessory pattern data A, and the effect related to the interlocking sound pattern data, for example, the effect related to the above-mentioned sound pattern data A. it can.

The other points of the sound effect sequence data update process are the same as those of the above-mentioned accessory effect sequence data update process (S905 in FIG. 120), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a sound reproduction state information update process (S938). In this process, the sub CPU 102 stores or overwrites the sound reproduction state information. Further, when the sound pattern data related to the instruction to the sound board 71 in S936 is the sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence related to the effect of displaying the bonus confirmation screen, the sub CPU 102 performs the sound at predetermined time intervals. The marker data specified in the production sequence is added to the sound playback status information. For example, when the sound pattern data related to the instruction to the sound board 71 is the sound pattern data C constituting the above-mentioned sound effect sequence C, the marker data 1 1 second after the instruction related to the sound pattern data C is given. , Marker data 2 after 2 seconds, marker data 3 after 3 seconds, and marker data 4 after 4 seconds have been added to the sound reproduction state information. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S931.

[Animation control task]
Next, the animation control task will be described with reference to FIG. 123. The animation control task is a task of controlling the display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 2).

In S941 of the animation control task, the sub CPU 102 takes out the animation data registered in S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101), and shifts the processing to S942 (S941). If there is no registered animation data, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S942.

In S942, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is registered animation data (S942). When it is determined that there is no animation data registered in S942 (when the determination in S942 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S945.

When it is determined that there is the animation data registered in S942 (when the determination in S942 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the animation effect sequence associated with the animation data extracted from the plurality of animation effect sequences constituting the animation sequence table. (S943). The animation effect sequence is data indicating a pattern of effect by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 2) (data indicating a moving image file name to be played, playing time of a moving image, etc., hereinafter referred to as animation pattern data. There is). The animation production sequence may be composed of a single animation pattern data or may be composed of a combination of a plurality of animation pattern data. Some of the animation pattern data constituting the animation effect sequence has a start condition for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the animation pattern data. The start conditions include, for example, the operation of the start lever 16, the start of the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation. There are on (ON edge), release of pressing the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation off (OFF edge, display command reception), and payout. Further, in the animation effect sequence, regarding the animation pattern data constituting the animation effect sequence, whether or not the pattern data is pattern data (hereinafter, interlocking animation pattern data) related to the animation accessory interlocking effect (see S946) described later. It is configured to include data indicating the above. The animation effect sequence table is a table composed of a plurality of animation effect sequences, and associates the animation data with the animation effect sequence.

Further, the animation effect sequence is configured to include data indicating whether or not the animation effect sequence is a bonus confirmation effect sequence, which is an animation effect sequence related to the effect of displaying the bonus confirmation screen (moving image). Further, the effect by the animation pattern data constituting the bonus final effect sequence is performed by sequentially playing back (displaying on the liquid crystal display device 11) a plurality of divided moving image data generated by dividing the series of moving image data. .. For example, the production by the animation pattern data A constituting the animation production sequence C, which is a bonus final production sequence, is performed by, for example, the divided video data 0 to 4 generated by dividing the video data for 5 seconds into 5 every second. It is configured. Subsequent divided moving image data following the first divided moving image data, that is, in the above example, the divided moving image data 1 to 4 following the divided moving image data 0 are associated with different marker data described later. The reproduction of the divided moving image data 1 to 4 will be described in detail in the description of S950 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the acquired animation effect sequence as animation effect sequence data to be referred to in the subsequent processing (S944).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the animation reproduction state information (S945). The animation reproduction state information is information indicating the state of the video display (animation pattern data related to the instruction to the liquid crystal display device 11, the elapsed time from the instruction, etc.), and is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. The operation start request and the operation end request are added (entry) to the animation reproduction state information in the character effect interlocking request process (S907) of the character control task (see FIG. 120). In S945, when there is neither an operation start request nor an operation end request in the animation reproduction state information (when the determination in S945 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S947.

In S945, when there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the animation reproduction state information (when the determination in S945 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the animation accessory interlocking effect processing (S946). In the animation accessory interlocking effect processing, the sub CPU 102 displays the liquid crystal display device 11 so that the start timing and the end timing of the animation effect by displaying the image on the liquid crystal display device 11 and the accessory effect by the rotating accessory 123 are synchronized. Give instructions to. For example, when the accessory pattern data A whose start condition is the first stop operation is the interlocking accessory pattern, and the operation start request is entered in the animation playback state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120). If the animation pattern data B set in S944 and the start condition is the first stop operation is the interlocking animation pattern data, the image related to the animation pattern data B is displayed. Instruct the liquid crystal display device 11. Further, when the operation end request related to the character pattern data A is entered in the animation playback state information in S906 of the character control task (see FIG. 120), the sub CPU 102 stops displaying the image related to the animation pattern data B. Instruct the liquid crystal display device 11 to (end). Further, when the accessory pattern data A with the first stop operation as the start condition is the interlocking accessory pattern and the operation start request is entered in the animation playback state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120). If the animation pattern data D for which the first stop operation is the start condition is not the interlocking animation pattern data, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S946 to form the animation pattern data D. The process shifts to S947 without giving the instruction relating to.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the animation effect sequence data set in S944 is a bonus confirmation effect sequence, which is an animation effect sequence related to the effect of displaying the bonus confirmation screen (moving image) (S947). When it is determined in S947 that the sequence is not the bonus confirmation effect sequence (when the determination in S947 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S951.

When it is determined in S947 that it is a bonus confirmation effect sequence (when the determination in S947 is YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the sound reproduction state information stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (S948).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is marker data in the sound reproduction state information (S949). When it is determined that there is no marker data (when the determination in S949 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S951.

When it is determined in S949 that there is marker data (YES in S949), the sub CPU 102 performs the bonus confirmation effect processing (S950). In this process, the sub CPU 102 reproduces any of the subsequent divided moving image data following the first divided moving image data related to the bonus confirmation effect sequence (displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11). Each subsequent divided video data is associated with different marker data, and when the sound reproduction state information acquired in S948 includes marker data, the sub CPU 102 reproduces the subsequent divided video data corresponding to the marker data. .. For example, the divided moving image data 1 reproduced by the animation pattern data A constituting the animation effect sequence C described above is associated with the marker data 1 related to the sound pattern data C constituting the sound effect sequence C described above. Similarly, the divided moving image data 2 is associated with the marker data 2, the divided moving image data 3 is associated with the marker data 3, and the divided moving image data 4 is associated with the marker data 4. When the sub CPU 102 includes the marker data 1 in the sound reproduction state information, the sub CPU 102 starts the reproduction of the divided moving image data 1 when the divided moving image data 1 is not reproduced. Further, in the same case, when the divided moving image data 1 is being reproduced, the divided moving image data 1 is continuously reproduced. Similarly, when the sound reproduction state information includes any of the marker data 2 to 4, the sub CPU 102 starts reproduction of any of the associated divided moving image data 2 to 4. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of synchronization deviation between the display of the moving image related to the effect of displaying the bonus confirmation screen (moving image) and the output of the effect sound. The first display instruction of the divided moving image data (for example, the divided moving image data 0) is given in S951 described later, or in S946 when the animation pattern data of the bonus confirmation effect sequence is the interlocking animation pattern data. ..

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an animation effect sequence data update process (S951). In this process, the correctness of the start condition of the animation pattern data constituting the set animation effect sequence data is determined, and if it is determined that the start condition is satisfied, the liquid crystal display device displays the moving image related to the animation pattern data. Instruct 11. If the animation pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied is the interlocking animation pattern data and the operation start request has not yet been entered in the animation playback status information, the sub CPU 102 gives an instruction regarding the animation pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied. Withhold. In this case, the sub CPU 102 gives an instruction related to the reserved animation pattern data at the timing when the process shifts to S945 and S946 after the operation start request is entered in the animation reproduction state information. As a result, it is possible to synchronize the effect related to the interlocking accessory pattern data, for example, the effect related to the above-mentioned accessory pattern data A, and the effect related to the interlocking animation pattern data, for example, the effect related to the above-mentioned animation pattern data B. it can.

The other points of the animation effect sequence data update process are the same as those of the above-mentioned accessory effect sequence data update process (S905 in FIG. 120), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the animation reproduction state information update process (S952). In this process, the sub CPU 102 stores or overwrites the animation reproduction state information. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S941.

[Touch panel control task]
Next, the touch panel control task will be described with reference to FIG. 124. The touch panel control task is a task for managing the touch input unit 31a, and is performed by the sub CPU 102.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is received data (S961). Here, the received data is transmitted from the touch sensor relay board 73 (see FIG. 7) at a predetermined cycle, every 200 msec in this embodiment, and is received by the sub-control board 42 via the sub-relay board 67 (FIG. 7). It is the data to be done. The commands included in the received data include touch operation commands, flick operation commands, reset notification commands, and operation confirmation commands.

The touch operation command is a command included in the received data received from the touch sensor relay board 73 when there is a touch operation. Here, the touch operation is an operation of touching a finger on the surface of the touch input unit 31a. The received data including the touch operation command also includes coordinate information related to the touch operation performed.

The flick operation command is a command included in the received data received from the touch sensor relay board 73 when the flick operation is performed. Here, the flick operation is an operation in which the surface of the touch input unit 31a is quickly flipped with a finger, that is, an operation in which the finger is moved by a predetermined distance or more in a short time while the finger is in contact with the surface. The received data including the flick operation command also includes the coordinate information related to the flick operation performed.

Further, the reset notification command is, for example, a touch sensor relay when a communication error occurs between the touch sensor relay board 73 and the touch input unit 31a and the touch sensor relay board 73 resets itself and the touch input unit 31a. This is a command included in the received data received from the board 73.

Further, the operation check command is received from the touch sensor relay board 73 when the touch sensor relay board 73 does not receive an input signal from the touch input unit 31a, that is, when no operation is performed on the touch input unit 31a. This is a command included in the received data.
When a failure occurs in the touch sensor relay board 73 or the touch input unit 31a, the received data received from the touch sensor relay board 73 may include an error code indicating the failure.

When it is determined in S961 that there is no received data (when the determination in S961 is NO), the sub CPU 102 repeats the process of S961.

When it is determined in S961 that there is received data (when the determination in S961 is YES), it is determined whether or not the received data is normal (the received data does not include an error code) (S962). When it is determined in S962 that the received data is not normal (when the determination in S962 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the error history registration process (S963). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 records the error code "TP COM ERR" in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S961.

The error code recorded in the predetermined area of the sub RAM is displayed on the error information history screen (see FIG. 130) displayed on the main screen 111 in the error information history processing (S1009) in the hall menu processing (see FIG. 129) described later. It can be referred to.

When it is determined in S962 that the received data is normal (when the determination in S962 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the touch panel input editing process (S964). In the touch panel input editing process, when the data transmitted from the touch sensor relay board 73 includes a touch operation command or a flick operation command a predetermined number of times in succession, or 288,000 times in the present embodiment, an error history is registered, etc. It is a process to perform. The details of the touch panel input editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125. After the touch panel input editing process, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S961.

[Touch panel input editing process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the touch panel input editing process of S964 in the touch panel control task (see FIG. 124) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the command included in the received data, that is, the received command (CMD) is an operation check command (S971). When it is determined in S971 that the command is an operation check command (when the determination in S971 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets 0 to the operation command continuous count stored in the sub RAM 103 (S972). Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S982.

When it is determined in S971 that it is not an operation check command (NO determination in S971), it is determined whether or not the received command is a touch operation command (S973).

When it is determined in S973 that the touch operation command is a touch operation command (when the determination in S973 is YES), the sub CPU 102 saves the touch operation XY coordinate data, which is the coordinate information in the received data, in the touch operation buffer of the sub RAM 103 (S974).

Next, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the operation command continuous counter (S975). Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S982.

When it is determined in S973 that it is not a touch operation command (NO determination in S973), it is determined whether or not the received command is a flick operation command (S976).

When it is determined in S976 that the flick operation command is a flick operation command (when the determination in S976 is YES), the sub CPU 102 saves the flick operation XY coordinate data, which is the coordinate information in the received data, in the touch operation buffer of the sub RAM 103 (S977).

Next, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the operation command continuous counter (S978). Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S982.

When it is determined in S976 that it is not a flick operation command (when the determination in S976 is NO), it is determined whether or not the receive command is a reset notification command (S979).

If it is determined in S979 that it is not a reset notification command (NO in S979), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S982.

When it is determined in S979 that it is a reset notification command (when the determination in S979 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an error history registration process (S980). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 records the error code “TP RST ??” in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets 0 in the operation command continuous counter (S981). Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S982.

In S982, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the operation command continuous counter stored in the sub RAM 103 exceeds 72000 (S982). When it is determined that the operation command continuous counter does not exceed 72000 (NO determination in S982), the sub CPU 102 ends the touch panel input editing process.

When it is determined in S982 that the operation command continuous counter exceeds 72000 (YES in S982), the sub CPU 102 records the error code "TP LONG ON" in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (S983). Then, the sub CPU 102 returns the process to the touch panel control task (see FIG. 124).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S982 that the operation command continuous counter exceeds 72000 (YES in S982), the sub CPU 102 displays a warning screen (see FIG. 126) on the main screen 111 for 3 minutes.

The case where the operation command continuous counter exceeds 72000 is a case where the touch operation command or the flick operation command is continuously included 72,000 times in the data transmitted from the touch sensor relay board 73. That is, since the touch sensor relay board 73 transmits data every 200 msec, in the above case, the touch operation command or the flick operation command is included in the data transmitted from the touch sensor relay board 73 for 4 hours. It will be the case. However, usually, the touch operation or the flick operation is not performed for 4 hours. Therefore, when the operation command continuous counter exceeds 72000, some trouble has occurred in the touch sensor relay board 73 or the touch input unit 31a, or the touch input unit 31a has a part or possession of the player's body. It is conceivable that the objects are still in contact with each other. Therefore, as described above, the sub CPU 102 records the error code “TP LONG ON” in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (S983). Further, the sub CPU 102 displays a warning screen (see FIG. 126) on the main screen 111 for 3 minutes.

Further, the sub CPU 102 displays the warning screen on the main screen 111, and after 3 minutes have passed, displays the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 before the warning screen is displayed, and enables the game to be restarted. Further, the sub CPU 102 warns when the condition for setting the operation command continuous counter to 0 is satisfied within 3 minutes after the warning screen is displayed, that is, when the operation confirmation command is received or the reset notification command is received. The display of the screen is stopped, the screen displayed before the warning screen is displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and the game can be restarted.

[Hall Menu Task]
Next, the hall menu task will be described with reference to FIG. 127. The hall menu task is a task that controls the hall menu. The hall menu task is performed by the sub CPU 102 at a predetermined cycle, every 33 msec in the present embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the setting key has been turned from off to on (S991). In this process, when the sub CPU 102 receives the setting change start command transmitted from the main CPU 93 by operating the setting key type switch 52, the sub CPU 102 determines that the setting key has been turned from off to on.

When it is determined in S991 that the setting key is not turned on from off (when the determination in S991 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S991 again. That is, the sub CPU 102 repeats the process of S991 until it determines that the setting key has been turned on.

In S991, when it is determined that the setting key has been turned on from off (when the determination in S991 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a hall menu display process for displaying the hall menu screen shown in FIG. 128 on the main screen 111 (S992). ). As shown in FIG. 128, the sub CPU 102 arranges a hall menu item area for displaying selectable hall menu items on the left side of the hall menu screen. Further, the sub CPU 102 arranges an operation explanation area for displaying the operation method at the time of displaying the hall menu screen below the hall menu item area.

In order to confirm various information / settings and change various settings, the operator operates the select button 29 and the enter button 28 (see FIG. 2) when the hall menu screen is displayed on the main screen 111. Then, select one of the hall menus displayed on the hall menu screen. The sub CPU 102 indicates in the operation explanation area that the position of the highlight display for designating one hall menu is changed by the select button 29 (menu selection) as an operation explanation. Further, the sub CPU 102 displays the highlighted hall menu as an operation explanation in the operation explanation area as an enter button as a target hall menu for confirming various information / settings, changing various settings, deleting various information, and the like. 28 indicates that the selection (decision) is to be made.

Further, the sub CPU 102 has [time setting], [total medal information], [setting change / confirmation history], and [error information history], which are hall menus that can be selected on the hall menu screen, in the menu item area of the hall menu screen. , [Monitoring history], [Warning display setting], [Notification setting], [Power saving mode], "Maintenance", [Accessory operation check], [LCD brightness setting processing], [Volume adjustment setting], 6 Items ([Time setting], [Total medal information], [Setting change / confirmation history], [Error information history], [Monitoring history], [Warning display setting]) are displayed in a rectangular button shape. Further, the sub CPU 102 displays a button-shaped hall menu displayed in the hall menu item area in [time setting], [total medal information], [setting change / confirmation history], [error information history], [monitoring history], Display vertically in the order of [Warning display settings].

Further, the sub CPU 102 highlights [time setting], which is the hall menu located at the uppermost position on the hall menu screen at this time. Further, when the select button 29 is pressed, the sub CPU 102 changes the highlighted hall menu from [time setting] to [total medal information] located below it. Similarly, each time the select button 29 is pressed, the sub CPU 102 changes the hall menu to be highlighted, and at this time, the lowermost hall menu [warning display setting] is highlighted. When the select button 29 is pressed, the rectangular button-shaped hall menu items displayed in the menu item area are displayed in [Notification setting], [Power saving mode], "Maintenance", [Character operation check], and [LCD]. Change to 7 items of [Brightness setting process] and [Volume adjustment setting]. Further, the sub CPU 102 sets the button-shaped hall menu displayed in the hall menu item area to [Notification setting], [Power saving mode], "Maintenance", [Characteristic operation check], [Liquid crystal brightness setting process], [ Display in the order of [Volume adjustment setting] in the vertical direction.

Further, the sub CPU 102 highlights the "notification setting" which is the hall menu located at the uppermost position after changing the display of the menu item area, and lowers the hall menu which is highlighted each time the select button 29 is pressed. Change to the hall menu located in. Further, when the select button 29 is pressed while the [Volume adjustment setting], which is the hole menu located at the lowest position after changing the display of the menu item area, is highlighted, the sub CPU 102 displays the menu item area. Change the displayed hall menu items to [Time setting], [Total medal information], [Setting change / confirmation history], [Error information history], [Monitoring history], and [Warning display setting] (return to before change). ..

After the hall menu display processing of S992 shown in FIG. 127, the sub CPU 102 performs the hall menu processing (S993). The hall menu processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 129.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the setting key has been turned off (S994). In this process, when the sub CPU 102 receives the setting change end command transmitted from the main CPU 93 by operating the setting key type switch 52, the sub CPU 102 determines that the setting key has been turned from on to off.

When it is determined in S994 that the setting key is not turned from on to off (when the determination in S994 is NO), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S993.

In S994, when it is determined that the setting key has changed from on to off (when the determination in S994 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the setting has been changed in the hall menu process (S993) (S995). ..

When it is determined in S995 that the setting change has been made (when the determination in S995 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the setting change initialization process (S996) and shifts the process to S997. On the other hand, when it is determined in S995 that the setting has not been changed (when the determination in S995 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S997.

In S997, the sub CPU 102 performs a game screen return display process (S997). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays on the main screen 111 and the sub screen 113 an image for effect to be displayed when playing a game and an initial image to be displayed when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S991 after the processing of S997.

[Hall menu processing]
Next, the hall menu processing (S993) in the hall menu task (see FIG. 127) will be described with reference to FIG. 129.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs a hall menu selection process for selecting a hall menu that is a target for confirming various information / settings and changing various settings based on the operation of the select button 29 and the enter button 28 by the operator (S1001). ).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [time setting] (S1002). When it is determined in S1002 that the selected hall menu is [time setting] (when the determination in S1002 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the time setting process (S1003). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a time setting screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and enables the operator to confirm and change the time set.

When it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [time setting] (NO determination is made in S1002), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [total medal information] (S1004). .. When it is determined that the selected hole menu is [total medal information] (YES in S1004), the sub CPU 102 performs total medal information processing (S1005). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a total medal information screen (not shown) on the main screen 111 so that the operator can confirm the total medal information.

When it is determined that the hole menu selected in S1001 is not [total medal information] (when S1004 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in S1001 is [change / confirm setting] (when it is determined that the hole menu is not [setting change / confirmation]. S1006). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is [Set change / confirmation] (YES in S1006), the sub CPU 102 performs the setting change / confirmation process (S1007). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a setting change / confirmation screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and allows the operator to confirm and change the setting.

When it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [Change / Confirm Settings] (NO in S1006), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [Error Information History] (when it is determined that S1006 is NO). S1008). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is [Error information history] (YES in S1008), the sub CPU 102 performs error information history processing (S1009). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays the error information history screen shown in FIG. 130 on the main screen 111, and allows the operator to check or change the error information history.

As shown in FIG. 130, an error information history table is arranged substantially in the center of the error information history screen. The error information history table has an error content column in which an error code is displayed, an occurrence date and time column in which the date and time when the error code was recorded is displayed, and a cancellation date and time column in which the date and time when the error is cleared is displayed. In addition, the operation method on the error information history screen is displayed at the lower left of the error information history screen. For example, a cursor (not shown) that specifies an arbitrary line on the error information history screen is moved by pressing the select button 29 (“cursor movement”), and the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are pressed at the same time. Delete the error code etc. displayed on the line specified by the cursor with ("Clear data"), and press the enter button 28 to end the display of the error information history screen ("Back"). The fact is displayed.

When it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [Error information history] (NO in S1008), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [Monitoring history] (S1010). .. When it is determined that the selected hall menu is [monitoring history] (YES in S1010), the sub CPU 102 performs the monitoring history processing (S1011). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a monitoring history processing screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and enables the operator to confirm the monitoring history.

When it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [monitoring history] (NO is determined in S1010), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [warning display setting] (S1012). .. When it is determined that the selected hall menu is [warning display setting] (YES in S1012), the sub CPU 102 performs the warning display setting process (S1013). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a warning display setting screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and allows the operator to check and change the warning display setting.

When it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [warning display setting] (NO determination is made in S1012), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [notification setting] (S1014). .. When it is determined that the selected hall menu is [Notification setting] (YES in S1014), the sub CPU 102 performs the notification setting process (S1015). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a notification setting screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and allows the operator to confirm and change the notification setting.

When it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [Notification setting] (NO is determined in S1014), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [Power saving mode] (S1016). .. When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the [power saving mode] (when the determination in S1016 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the power saving mode processing (S1017). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a power saving mode screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and allows the operator to confirm and change the power saving mode setting.

When it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [power saving mode] (NO determination is made in S1016), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [maintenance] (S1018). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is [Maintenance] (YES in S1018), the sub CPU 102 performs maintenance processing (S1019). Details of the maintenance process will be described later with reference to FIG. 131.

When it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [Maintenance] (NO in S1018), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [Character operation check] (S1020). .. When it is determined that the selected hall menu is [accessory operation confirmation] (YES in S1020), the sub CPU 102 performs the accessory operation confirmation process (S1021). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays the accessory operation confirmation screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and enables the operator to confirm the operation of the accessory.

When it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [confirmation of accessory operation] (when S1020 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [LCD brightness setting] (when it is determined that S1020 is NO). S1022). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is [LCD brightness setting] (YES in S1022), the sub CPU 102 performs the liquid crystal brightness setting process (S1023). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a liquid crystal brightness setting screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and allows the operator to confirm and change the brightness setting of the liquid crystal display device 11.

When it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [LCD brightness setting] (NO determination is made in S1022), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [Volume adjustment setting] (S1024). ). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is [Volume adjustment setting] (YES in S1024), the sub CPU 102 performs the volume adjustment setting process (S1025). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a volume adjustment setting screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and enables the operator to confirm and change the setting of the volume of the sound output from the speakers 20L and 20R.

After processing S1003, s1005, S1007, S1009, S1011, S1013, S1015, S1017, S1019, S1021, S1023, S1025, and when it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [Volume adjustment setting] (S1024 is NO determination). In the case of), the sub CPU 102 ends the hall menu processing and returns the processing to S994 of the hall menu task (see FIG. 127).

[Maintenance process]
Next, the maintenance process (S1019) in the hall menu process (see FIG. 129) will be described with reference to FIG. 131. In the maintenance process, the sub CPU 102 displays the maintenance screen 114 and the touch panel maintenance screen 115 shown in FIG. 132 on the liquid crystal display device 11, and the MAX bet button 14, the 1 bet button 15, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, and the enter button 28. , Select button 29 and other various operating devices to be operated by the player, various internal devices such as the hopper device 43 and reels 3L, 3C and 3R arranged inside the pachislot 1, and various sensors provided on the selector 46. It is possible to have the operator confirm whether or not the sensor and various peripheral devices such as the touch input unit 31a operate normally. In the following description, various peripheral devices other than various operation devices, various internal devices, various sensors, and the touch input unit 31a may be collectively referred to as various devices.

As shown in FIG. 132, the sub CPU 102 displays the maintenance screen 114 above the partition piece 112 on the main screen 111. Further, the sub CPU 102 displays the operating status of various devices on the maintenance screen 114. Further, the sub CPU 102 displays the touch panel maintenance screen 115 below the partition piece on the main screen 111 and over the sub screen 113.

Further, the sub CPU 102 displays the operation status display table shown in FIG. 133 at substantially the center of the maintenance screen 114. The operation status display table includes a name string in which the names of the 23 various devices are displayed, a number string in which the serial numbers (1 to 23) attached to the various devices displayed in the name column are displayed, and a number string. It has an operating state sequence indicating the operating states of various devices. The "OFF" display in the operating status column indicates that there is no input from various devices. When there is input from various devices, the display of the operating status column is changed from "OFF" display to "ON" display. For example, when the MAX bet button 14 is pressed while the maintenance screen 114 is displayed, the sub CPU 102 changes the display of the operation status column of the MAX bet button 14 from the “OFF” display to the “ON” display. The "ON" display is displayed in red.

Further, the sub CPU 102 displays the operation method when the maintenance screen 114 is displayed on the lower left of the maintenance screen 114. Specifically, when the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are pressed at the same time, it is displayed that the hall menu screen (FIG. 128) is returned (redisplayed).

Further, as shown in FIG. 132, the sub CPU 102 displays a cross-shaped grid line G composed of a vertical line and a horizontal line orthogonal to the vertical line on the touch panel maintenance screen 115. When the display of the touch panel maintenance screen 115 is started, the sub CPU 102 sets the grid line G at the intersection of the vertical line and the horizontal line constituting the grid line G (hereinafter, may be referred to as an intersection of the grid line G) as the sub screen 113. It is displayed so that it is placed at the initial position set on the upper right of. Further, when a finger touches the touch input unit 31a, as shown in FIG. 134, the sub CPU 102 arranges the display position of the grid line G and the intersection of the grid lines G at the position where the finger touches the touch input unit 31a. Change to. That is, the sub CPU 102 changes the display position of the grid line G so that the intersection of the grid lines G is arranged at a position corresponding to the position where the finger touches the touch input unit 31a on the sub screen 113. Further, when the finger moves while maintaining the state of touching the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 is arranged at a position where the intersection of the grid lines G always corresponds to the position where the finger is touching the touch input unit 31a. As described above, the display position of the grid line G is changed in synchronization with the movement of the finger.

Further, when the finger is separated from the touch input unit 31a after changing the display position of the grid line G, the sub CPU 102 sets the display position of the grid line G so that the intersection of the grid lines G is arranged at the above-mentioned initial position. change.

In the maintenance process (see FIG. 131), first, the sub CPU 102 acquires non-operation command data from the main CPU 93 (S1031). The no-operation command here is the main input indicating whether the operation status display table shown in FIG. 133 is an on state in which there is an input from various devices assigned serial numbers 1 to 18 or an off state in which there is no input. It includes state information and is transmitted from the main CPU 93 every 4 msec.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a main input state information editing process for reading the main input state information in the acquired non-operation command data (S1032).

Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires the sub device input information (S1033). The sub-device input information is information transmitted from various devices and touch input units 31a with serial numbers 19 to 23 in the operation status display table shown in FIG. 133 at predetermined intervals. The sub-device input information includes sub-input state information indicating whether the various devices are in an on state with an input or an off state with no input. Further, the sub-input state information in the sub-device input information transmitted from the touch input unit 31a includes the position where the finger is touching the touch input unit 31a (XY coordinates when the initial position is 0,0). It has been.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a sub input state information editing process for reading the sub input state information in the acquired sub device input information (S1034).

Next, the sub CPU 102 displays the maintenance screen 114 (see FIGS. 132 and 133) above the partition piece 112 on the main screen 111 based on the main input state information read in S1032 and the sub input state information read in S1034. Performs maintenance screen display processing to be displayed in (S1035). In this process, the display of the maintenance screen 114 and the update of the display (for example, the change from the "OFF" display to the "ON" display) are performed.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a touch panel maintenance screen display process for displaying the touch panel maintenance screen 115 on the sub screen 113 based on the sub input information read in S1034 (S1036). In this process, the touch panel maintenance screen 115 is displayed and updated (for example, the display position of the grid line G is changed).

Then, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are operated at the same time (S1037). When it is determined that the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are operated at the same time (when the determination in S1037 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the maintenance process and the hall menu process (see the figure), and performs the process in the hall menu task (FIG. FIG. Return to S994 of (see 127).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are not operated at the same time (when the determination in S1037 is NO), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S1031.

[OFF edge execution when a button is selected in the touch input section]
In the present embodiment, when the operator uses the touch input unit 31a to select an item displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the sub CPU 102 executes the OFF edge. The OFF edge execution means that the sub CPU 102 detects the selection of the item displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the finger is released from the touch input unit 31a. In the present embodiment, detecting the selection of the item displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the sub CPU 102 touches the touch input unit 31a with a finger is referred to as ON edge execution.
Hereinafter, the mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described as an example with reference to FIGS. 135 to 141.

The mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachislot 1 is a function of linking the pachislot 1 and the mobile terminal. By using the mobile terminal cooperation function of pachislot 1, detailed information about the game played by the player can be recorded, and the function that does not affect the game result of pachislot 1 can be customized by satisfying predetermined conditions. Can be done.

Predetermined conditions include, for example, the determination of a specific small winning combination (internal winning combination) in succession, the execution of a specific effect, and the like. In addition, as a function to customize the function that does not affect the game result of pachislot 1, for example, the music output during the first ART (pseudo-bonus) or the second ART (ART) is made into a special song. It is possible to change or change the costume of the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

When using the mobile terminal cooperation function, first, the guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111. When the enter button 28 or the select button 29 is pressed while the unit game is completed, the guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111.

FIG. 135 shows a state in which the guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111.
The initial guide image contains the words "Unimemo (registered trademark)" and "Please choose your favorite menu".

As shown in FIG. 135, when the guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, the guide menu screen is displayed on the sub screen 113. A plurality of guide menus are displayed on the guide menu screen. The items in the guide menu include "Start Unimemo", "Arrangement / Dividend", "Model Site", and "Return to Game". Each guide menu is displayed in the shape of a rectangular button with the character string of the item name arranged in the center.

When "Start Unimemo" is selected from the guide menu, the Unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 138). When "Arrangement / Dividend" is selected, the arrangement / payout initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 (not shown). Then, when "model site" is selected, the registration code for the model site is displayed on the main screen 111.

When "Return to game" is selected, the display of the guide initial image on the main screen 111 and the display of the guide menu on the sub screen 113 are terminated. Then, on the main screen 111 and the sub screen 113, an image for effect to be displayed when playing a game and an initial image to be displayed when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period are displayed. Further, even if a predetermined time elapses without touching any of the items in the guide menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 113 have a predetermined image for production and a pachislot machine 1 to be displayed when playing a game. The initial image to be displayed when the operation is not performed for a period is displayed.

When the guide menu screen is displayed, the sub CPU 102 executes an OFF edge that detects that each guide menu has been selected by the player when the finger touching the touch input unit 31a leaves the touch input unit 31a. .. Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the guide menu displayed at the position on the sub screen 113 corresponding to the position where the player's finger is touching on the touch input unit 31a to be distinguished from the buttons of other guide menus. .. In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 highlights the buttons of the target guide menu so that they can be distinguished from the buttons of other guide menus. Instead of the highlight display, the button of the target guide menu may be enlarged and displayed so that it can be distinguished from the buttons of other guide menus.

For example, as shown in FIG. 136, the player can use the touch input unit 31a at a position corresponding to the position where the “arrangement / payout” of the guide menu of the sub screen 113 is displayed (in the present embodiment, the guide menu “arrangement” is displayed. When a finger is touched at a position facing the "dividend" in the front-rear direction, the sub CPU 102 highlights the "arrangement / dividend" of the guide menu, that is, illuminates the "arrangement / dividend" of the guide menu. In this state, when the player releases the finger from the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 detects that the player has selected "arrangement / payout" in the guide menu.

With the guide menu "Arrangement / Payout" highlighted, the position corresponding to the position where the guide menu "Arrangement / Payout" is displayed without the player taking his or her finger off the touch input unit 31a. When the finger is moved out, the sub CPU 102 ends the highlighting of "Arrangement / Dividend" in the guide menu. In this case, the sub CPU 102 does not detect that the player has selected "Arrangement / Payout" in the guide menu. Then, as shown in FIG. 137, when the player moves his finger to a position corresponding to the position where "Start Unimemo" in the guide menu is displayed, the sub CPU 102 "Starts Unimemo" in the guide menu. To highlight. Then, when the player releases the finger from the touch input unit 31a in this state, the sub CPU 102 detects that the player has selected "Start Unimemo" in the guide menu.
That is, unless the player releases his / her finger from the touch input unit 31a, the player displays the display on the sub screen 113 at a position corresponding to the position outside the position where the touch input unit 31a is first touched (in the present embodiment, the player faces the front-back direction). You can select the guide menu that is available.

The specific operation of the sub CPU 102 when the guide menu screen as described above is displayed on the sub screen 113 will be described. First, the sub CPU 102 detects that the player touches the touch input unit 31a and the position coordinates of the position where the player's finger is touched (the operation XY coordinate data described above). Next, the sub CPU 102 displays a guide menu at a position on the sub screen 113 corresponding to the detected position coordinates (in the present embodiment, a position facing the position where the player's finger is touched in the front-rear direction). If so, highlight the button in the guide menu. Further, the sub CPU 102 acquires the position coordinates of the position where the player's finger is touched at a predetermined cycle, every 50 msec in the present embodiment. Then, when the sub CPU 102 detects that the player's finger is separated from the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 determines the last acquired position coordinates as the selection coordinates, and guides the menu to a position corresponding to the selection coordinates on the sub screen 113. Is displayed, it detects that the guide menu has been selected by the player.

FIG. 138 shows a state in which the uni-memo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111.
The initial image of Unimemo includes the characters "Unimemo" and "Customize your favorite character".

As shown in FIG. 138, when the uni-memo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, the uni-memo menu screen is displayed on the sub screen 113. Multiple Unimemo menus are displayed on the Unimemo menu screen. Items on the Unimemo menu include "password entry", "record", "record and exit", "member registration", "return to game", and "return". Each Unimemo menu is displayed in the shape of a rectangular button with the character string of the item name arranged in the center. When the uni-memo menu screen is displayed, the sub CPU 102 indicates that each uni-memo menu has been selected by the player when the finger touching the touch input unit 31a is separated from the touch input unit 31a. To detect.

When "password input" is selected, a password display image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 139).

FIG. 139 shows a state in which the password display image is displayed on the main screen 111.
The password display image contains the characters "Enter password".

As shown in FIG. 139, when the password display image is displayed on the main screen 111, the password input menu screen is displayed on the sub screen 113. Multiple password input menus are displayed on the password input menu screen. The items of the password input menu include "OK", "Delete", "0" to "9", "A" to "F", "Return to game", and "Back". Each password input menu is displayed in the shape of a rectangular button with a character string of the item name arranged in the center.

When selected from "0" to "9" and "A" to "F" in the password input menu, the selected characters are input and displayed on the password display image. When "Enter" is selected from the password input menu, a plurality of characters displayed on the password display image are determined as the password to be input. Then, when "Delete" is selected from the password input menu, the last entered character is deleted from the password display image.

When "Return to game" is selected from the password input menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 113 display an image for production to be displayed when playing a game and when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period of time. The initial image to be displayed is displayed. Further, even if a predetermined time elapses without selecting any of the items in the password input menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 113 are designated with a video for directing to be displayed when playing a game and a pachislot machine 1. The initial image to be displayed when the operation is not performed for a period is displayed. When "Back" is selected from the password input menu, the Unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, and the Unimemo menu is displayed on the sub screen 113 (see FIG. 138).

When the password input menu screen is displayed, the sub CPU 102 detects that each password menu has been selected by the player when the finger touching the touch input unit 31a leaves the touch input unit 31a, as described above. To do. For example, as shown in FIG. 139, when the player touches a position on the touch input unit 31a corresponding to the position where "E" of the password input menu is displayed (opposing in the front-rear direction), the sub The CPU 102 highlights "E" in the password input menu. Then, as shown in FIG. 140, when the player moves his finger on the touch input unit 31a to a position corresponding to the position where "F" of the password input menu is displayed, the sub CPU 102 inputs the password. Exit the highlighting of "E" in the menu and highlight "F" in the password entry menu. In this case, the sub CPU 102 does not detect that "E" in the password input menu is selected by the player. Further, when the player releases the finger from the touch input unit 31a while "F" in the password input menu is highlighted, the sub CPU 102 is selected by the player as "F" in the password input menu. Detect that. Then, as shown in FIG. 141, the sub CPU 102 displays “F” related to the detection of selection on the password display image.

[Example of other layout of touch panel]
In the present embodiment described above, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 11 is divided into a main screen 111 and a sub screen 113, and touch input using the touch sensor module 31 is performed so that a touch operation can be performed on the sub screen 113. An example of arranging the unit (touch panel) 31a has been described, but the arrangement of the touch input unit (touch panel) 31a is not limited to this. For example, the touch input unit (touch panel) 31a may be arranged in the area corresponding to the main screen 111 so that the touch operation can be performed not only on the sub screen 113 but also on the main screen 111. Further, in this case, since various input operations can be performed in a wider area than on the sub screen 113, the touch input unit (touch panel) 31a may not be arranged in the area corresponding to the sub screen 113. That is, the liquid crystal display device 11 may be configured so that the touch operation can be input on the entire surface of the area where the normal effect or the like is displayed.

Hereinafter, an example in which the touch input unit (touch panel) 31a using the touch sensor module 31 is arranged in the area corresponding to the main screen 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 145.

142 and 143 are views showing a password display image (password input area 116) and a password input menu screen (keyboard display area 117) displayed on the main screen 111 in this example, and FIG. 142 shows a password. A state in which all the passwords are entered is shown, and FIG. 143 shows a state in which a part of the password is not entered.

As shown in FIG. 142, the characters entered as the password are displayed on the main screen 111 (liquid crystal display device 11), and are also entered in the password input area 116 that can be touch-operated and the password input area. A keyboard display area 117 in which various characters and symbols can be specified by touch operation and an intention operation input area 118 in which various intention operations of the player can be input are displayed.

Twelve characters and symbols can be input in the password input area 116, and the number of characters (digits) of the password that can be input is constant regardless of the amount of information. Further, in the password input area 116, passwords can be sequentially input from the left side to the right side, and underlines (bars) are displayed in the places where the passwords are input. Hereinafter, the leftmost input portion in the password input area 116 will be referred to as PA1, the input portion to the right of the input portion will be referred to as PA2, the input portion to the right of the input portion will be referred to as PA3, ... That is, the first character of the password is input to PA1, the second character of the password is input to PA2, the third character of the password is input to PA3, and the twelfth character of the password is input to PA12. ..

The number of characters (digits) of the password that can be entered in the password input area 116 can be changed depending on the amount of information, the date and time of acquisition, and the like. Further, the characters and symbols used in the password are not limited to those shown in FIG. 142. Alphanumeric characters and symbolic symbols indicating characters can also be used.

32 characters and symbols can be displayed in the keyboard display area 117, and when the player touches the area corresponding to these characters and symbols, the characters and symbols input to the password input area 116 can be displayed. It can be specified sequentially. Although not shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, when any character or symbol is specified in the keyboard display area 117, a ring (or an arrow) is formed at the corresponding portion of the specified character or symbol. It may be a shape, or it may be a frame on a rectangle similar to the one displayed in the password input area 116), and it is possible to recognize which character or symbol was specified. ing. However, by changing the display mode of the corresponding portion of the specified character or symbol, it may be possible to recognize which character or symbol is specified.

The display of the cursor is displayed on, for example, the main screen 111 or the sub screen 113, and an operation on a movement selection operation button (not shown) for accepting a movement selection operation such as a cross key, or a select button 29. In accordance with the operation to, the areas PA1 to PA12 in the password input area 116, the area corresponding to each character or symbol in the keyboard display area 117, and each input area in the intention operation input area 118 are sequentially moved one by one. To do. Here, in the password input area 116, when the cursor is moved, the moved portion becomes the active state. Further, in the keyboard display area 117 and the intention operation input area 118, the cursor is displayed on, for example, the main screen 111 or the sub screen 113 in a state where the cursors are on the various areas (buttons) to be moved, and the determination is made. When the enter button 28 is operated or the enter button 28 is operated to accept the operation, the corresponding characters and symbols are input to the password display area 116, and various intention operations described later are performed. Will be done. That is, in this example, each area in the password input area 116 can be activated, characters and symbols in the keyboard display area 117 can be specified / input, and intentional operation can be performed without touch operation. Buttons in the input area 118 can be specified / determined.

However, in such an operation with the move selection operation button or the select button 29, the cursor is basically moved sequentially one by one. Therefore, for example, the character "A" in the keyboard display area 117 is displayed. When it is desired to specify the area corresponding to the character "H" in the keyboard display area 117 while the cursor is on the corresponding area, it is necessary to execute the operation in the horizontal direction seven times. For example, when the cursor is on the area corresponding to the character "A" in the keyboard display area 117 and you want to specify the area in the password input area 116, the vertical operation is executed once. In this case, the character or symbol is uniformly moved to the place where the next character or symbol is input (that is, the first place) in the non-input area. Further, for example, if you want to specify an area in the keyboard display area 117 while the cursor is on any area in the password input area 116, you can move it by executing one vertical operation. However, in this case, the screen uniformly moves to the area corresponding to the character "A" in the keyboard display area 117. Note that these are examples of regularity regarding cursor movement when the touch operation is not used.

The intention operation input area 118 is a release operation input area (FIGS. 142 and FIG. 14) in which a release operation for returning the executed operation to the previous state (for example, returning the display to the screen before the password input screen) can be input. "Back" display location in 143) and delete operation input area where you can enter a delete operation to delete one character of the entered password ("One character delete" display location in FIGS. 142 and 143) And a decision operation input area (in FIG. 142 and FIG. 143, where "decision" is displayed) in which a decision operation for confirming the executed operation (for example, confirming the entered password) can be input.

Here, the determination operation input area is determined when any character or symbol is not input in all of PA1 to PA12 in the password input area 116 (that is, when a part of the password is not input). The operation cannot be input (see the display location of "OK" which is black-and-white inverted with respect to the display of FIG. 142 in FIG. 143), and any character is used in all of PA1 to PA12 in the password input area 116. When the or symbol is entered (that is, when all the passwords have been entered), the enter operation is ready to be entered (see the "OK" display in FIG. 142). ..

As a result, for example, when the player forgets one character to be input, the player can immediately recognize that the password input content is incorrect, which is confusing to the player. This can prevent unnecessary time from being consumed and improve the convenience of password input.

Although not shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the delete operation input area is an area (input area) in which any character or symbol has already been input in PA1 to PA12 in the password input area 116. Only when the last area (that is, the rightmost area) is selected, the delete operation can be input, and in other cases, the delete operation cannot be input. ..

Further, although not shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, when a character is input in any of PA1 to PA12 of the password input area 116, any number of characters are input from the player for a predetermined period (for example, 40 seconds). Even if the demonstration screen (standby screen) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 because no operation is performed, the input contents are retained at least until the start operation of the next game is performed. It has become. Further, even if the guide menu screen returns to the previous state due to the release operation being performed on the release operation input area described above, at least until the start operation of the next game is performed. The input contents are retained. That is, even if the display of the password display image is interrupted, the input content is retained until the next game is started.

Further, although not shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, when characters are input in any of PA1 to PA12 of the password input area 116, the liquid crystal display is displayed because the settlement button (not shown) is operated. Even if the demonstration screen (standby screen) is immediately displayed on the device 11, the input contents are retained at least until the start operation of the next game is performed. That is, even when the display of the password display image is forcibly terminated, the input content is retained until the next game is started.

Further, in FIGS. 142 and 143, as the area for inputting characters (character input area), the password input area 116 in which the password is input is described as an example, but the characters input in the character input area are described. The columns are not limited to passwords related to production. For example, it may be a character input area (character input area 116) displayed when various information (for example, a game store store name input by a game store clerk) in the above-mentioned hall menu is input. Further, at this time, similarly, the keyboard display area 117 and the intention operation input area 118 are displayed, and the same control as various display controls in the password input area 116 described above or later may be performed. Good. That is, the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied to all modes in which a character string related to predetermined information can be input to the game machine.

144 and 145 are enlarged views of the password display image (password input area 116) displayed on the main screen 111 in this example, and are views for explaining the transition of the display mode.

First, with reference to FIG. 144, a transition of the display mode when the player sequentially inputs the password into the password input area 116 will be described. In FIG. 144, "A" is input to PA1 of the password input area 116, "B" is input to PA2, "C" is input to PA3, "D" is input to PA4, "E" is input to PA5, and "F" is input to PA6. It shows a state in which no characters or symbols are input to PA7 to PA12. In the present embodiment, in the password input area 116, the areas where the password has already been input (that is, PA1 to PA6) are described as the input areas, and the areas where the password has not yet been input (that is, PA7 to PA12) are described. It may be described as a non-input area.

Here, the underline (bar) display of the part (that is, the beginning part) where the next character or symbol is input in the non-input area is different from the display of the underline (bar) of other parts. It has become. For example, as shown in FIG. 144, the underlined (bar) display at the beginning of the non-input area is outlined, and the underline (bar) at the beginning of the input area and the non-input area is not the beginning. The display is black. This is just an example. The underline (bar) display at the beginning of the non-input area is lit (or blinking), and the underline (bar) at the beginning of the input area and the non-input area is not the beginning. The display can be turned off (or only turned on for blinking). That is, by making the display mode of the head portion in the non-input area different from the display mode of the input region and the non-head portion in the non-input area, it is easy to recognize the head portion in the non-input area. All aspects can be adopted.

The upper part of FIG. 144 shows, for example, the state immediately after the character "F" is input to PA6 of the password input area 116. In this case, the player last touch-operates (or the above-described operation). Since it is the area corresponding to "F" in the keyboard display area 117, the cursor is moved to the area corresponding to "F" in the keyboard display area 117. That is, in the upper part of FIG. 144, although it is shown by the above-mentioned display mode that the PA7 of the password input area 116 is the head portion in the non-input area, the PA7 of the password input area 116 immediately becomes a character or a character. Indicates that the symbol is not ready for input (ie, active).

However, as will be described later, as long as the characters and symbols in the input area are not changed and the characters and symbols are sequentially input in the password input area 116, the characters and symbols are automatically input. It may be controlled so that the first part in the non-input area becomes the active state.

In contrast to the upper part of FIG. 144, the lower part of FIG. 144 shows that the PA7 of the password input area 116 is the head portion in the non-input area and is in the active state. At this time, in PA7 of the password input area 116, a white underline (bar) is displayed and a white border is displayed. That is, when a character or symbol can be input at the beginning of the non-input area, not only the beginning of the non-input area is indicated, but also the display mode is changed to indicate the character or symbol. Indicates that the input is possible. Similarly, in this case as well, various modes can be adopted as the display mode indicating the state in which characters and symbols can be input.

That is, in this example, while showing the leading area in the non-input area, the display mode is changed depending on whether or not characters and symbols can be input immediately. As a result, it is possible to devise a way to display the password input state to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to improve the convenience of password input.

In this example, in order to enter a state in which characters and symbols can be input (that is, an active state) at the beginning of the non-input area of the password input area 116, the non-input area in the password input area 116 It is supposed that the touch operation may be performed on any of the areas of. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, when PA1 to PA6 in the password input area 116 are input areas and PA7 to PA12 in the password input area 116 are non-input areas, they are in the non-input area. In order to make the leading PA7 an active state (that is, a valid state), by touching not only the PA7 but also any area of PA8 to PA12, the PA7 can input characters and symbols. It is designed to be controlled.

Therefore, when the player tries to input the password in the middle of input from the continuation, he / she bother to move the cursor to the beginning part in the non-input area, or perform a strict touch operation on the beginning part in the non-input area. Input can be resumed immediately by touching the uninput area without performing.

As a result, it is possible to devise a device that makes it difficult for the player to feel annoyance regarding the password input, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the password input.

Next, with reference to FIG. 145, a transition of the display mode when the player performs an operation of changing characters or symbols in the input area in the password input area 116 will be described.

In this example, when you want to change the characters and symbols in the input area of the password input area 116, you can touch the area of the password input area 116 where the characters and symbols you want to change are entered to change the area. After that, the characters and symbols to be input to the corresponding area may be specified by touching the keyboard display area 117. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 145, when it is desired to change the character "C" input to PA3 in the password input area 116, if the area corresponding to PA3 in the input area is touched, a new character is added to PA3. And symbols are controlled so that they can be entered. On the other hand, when the cursor is moved by the above-mentioned operation to change the character, the operation in each direction is required as much as necessary for moving the cursor to the corresponding area.

The underline (bar) display and the frame line display are basically the same as those shown in FIG. 144, and the corresponding area of the password input area 116 in which the characters and symbols to be changed are input (example of FIG. 145). Then, when PA3) is touched, the white underline (bar) display indicates the changed part, and the white border display indicates that characters and symbols can be input. However, the white underlined (bar) display indicating the input location does not move from the PA7 location in the password input area 116, and does not move to the PA3 location, as it indicates the first location in the non-input area. Only the white border display may be displayed.

In this way, when a player wants to change the characters or symbols of the entered password, he / she simply touches the part where the characters or symbols to be changed are displayed and re-enters the characters or symbols, and then immediately inputs the characters or symbols. You can change the content.

As a result, when it becomes necessary to change the input content, for example, when there is an error in the password input content, it is possible to devise a device that makes it difficult for the player to feel annoyed. Convenience can be improved.

<Example of other specifications of the pachislot machine of this embodiment>
Next, another specification example of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 155.

FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol arrangement table in the other specification example, FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol combination table in the other specification example, and FIG. 148 is a diagram showing an example of the symbol combination table in the other specification example. 149 is a diagram showing an example of an RT transition table in the other specification example, and FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of an internal lottery table in the other specification example. FIG. 151 is a diagram showing an example of a bonus internal winning combination determination table in the other specification example, and FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of a small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table in the other specification example. It is a figure which shows an example. Note that FIGS. 153 to 155 will be described later.

In the present embodiment described so far, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified until the predetermined end condition is satisfied, and the stop operation is performed according to the notification. If this is done, a function (that is, an ART function) in which the winning probability of the replay shifts to a higher gaming state than in the normal state, or the gaming state is maintained, and the gaming medium is easily assigned in the gaming state is controlled (that is, the ART function). ), And the specification to which the player can increase the game medium mainly by the operation of the ART function has been described. However, among the inventions according to the present embodiment, the inventions not related to the ART function are described. , It can also be applied to a game machine that does not have an ART function.

Therefore, in the following, as a specification applicable to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a game machine to which a specification that does not have an ART function and allows a player to increase the game medium mainly by operating a bonus will be described. .. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the pachi-slot machine 1 having the ART function described above may be described as "pachi-slot machine 1a", and the pachi-slot machine 1 having no ART function described below may be described as "pachi-slot machine 1b". ..

[Major differences between pachislot machines related to other specification examples]
First, in the specifications related to the pachislot 1a, the winning determination line (effective line) that can activate the line (center line) connecting the middle area of the left reel 3L, the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the middle area of the right reel 3R. ), But in the specifications related to Pachislot 1b, when the number of input sheets is 3, the line connecting the middle area of the left reel 3L, the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the middle area of the right reel 3R (center). Line), the upper area of the left reel 3L, the upper area of the middle reel 3C, and the upper area of the right reel 3R (top line), the lower area of the left reel 3L, the lower area of the middle reel 3C, and the right. The line connecting the lower area of the reel 3R (bottom line), the upper area of the left reel 3L, the middle area of the middle reel 3C, the line connecting the lower area of the right reel 3R (cross down line), and the left reel 3L. A line (cross-up line) connecting the lower region, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R is defined as an effective line.

Further, in the specifications related to the pachislot 1b, when the number of inserted sheets is one or two, the line (center line) connecting the middle stage area of the left reel 3L, the middle stage area of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage area of the right reel 3R. The upper area of the left reel 3L, the upper area of the middle reel 3C, and the line connecting the upper area of the right reel 3R (top line), the lower area of the left reel 3L, the lower area of the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. A line connecting the lower regions (bottom line), an upper region of the left reel 3L, a middle region of the middle reel 3C, a line connecting the upper regions of the right reel 3R (small V line), and a lower region of the left reel 3L. A line (Oyama line) connecting the middle region of the middle reel 3C and the lower region of the right reel 3R is defined as an effective line.

Further, in the specifications related to pachislot 1a, the number of possible game starts (see FIG. 79) was set to "3" throughout all the gaming states, but in the specifications related to pachislot 1b, the RT0 to RT5 gaming states (RT0 to RT5 gaming states, which will be described later). The number of cards that can be started in the normal game state) is set to "3", the number of cards that can be started in the BB game state (RB game state) described later is set to "1", and the number of MB game states (CB game) described later is set. The number of cards that can be started in the game (state) is set to "2".

Further, in the specifications related to the pachislot machine 1a, each symbol shown in FIG. 11 was arranged on each reel as shown in FIG. 11, but in the specifications related to the pachislot machine 1b, each symbol shown in FIG. It is arranged on each reel as shown in 146.

Further, in the specifications related to the pachislot machine 1a, the combination of the symbols shown in FIGS. 12 to 15 (display combination) was specified, but in the specifications related to the pachislot machine 1b, the combination of the symbols shown in FIG. 147 (display combination) was specified. ) Is specified.

As shown in FIG. 147, in the specifications related to the pachislot machine 1b, when the number of medals inserted is three and "C_red 7_01" is determined (established) as the display combination, the BB1 is activated and the display combination is used. When "C_blue 7_01" is determined (established), BB2 is activated, and when "C_yellow 7_01" is determined (established) as a display combination, BB3 is activated and "C_red 7_02" is activated as a display combination. When "" is determined (established), BB4 is activated, and when "C_blue 7_02" is determined (established) as the display combination, BB5 is activated and "C_yellow 7_02" is determined as the display combination. When (established), the operation of BB6 is activated, and the state shifts to the BB gaming state described later.

Further, when the number of medals inserted is three and "C_red RB" is determined (established) as the display combination, MB1 is activated and "C_blue RB" is determined (established) as the display combination. ), The MB2 is activated, and when "C_yellow RB" is determined (established) as the display combination, the MB3 is activated and the MB game state described later is started.

In addition, when the number of medals inserted is three and "C_replay_01" is determined (established) as the display combination, the re-game is activated, and if it is in the RT0 game state, the state shifts to the RT1 game state. To do.

In addition, when the number of medals inserted is three and any of "C_replay_02" to "C_replay_05" is determined (established) as the display combination, the re-game is activated and the RT0 game state is activated. If so, it shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

In addition, when "C_watermelon_01" is determined (established) as the display combination, if the number of medals inserted is 3, five medals are paid out, and the number of medals inserted is two. For example, 15 medals are paid out, and if the number of medals inserted is 1, 14 medals are paid out.

In addition, when "C_bell_01" is determined (established) as the display combination, if the number of medals inserted is 3, 6 medals are paid out, and the number of medals inserted is 2. For example, 15 medals are paid out, and if the number of medals inserted is 1, 14 medals are paid out. If it is in the RT0 gaming state, it shifts to the RT2 gaming state.

Further, when either "C_special_01" or "C_special_02" is determined (established) as the display combination, if the number of medals inserted is three, one medal is paid out. If the number of medals inserted is two, 14 medals are paid out, and if the number of medals inserted is one, 13 medals are paid out.

In addition, when "C_cherry" is determined (established) as the display combination, if the number of medals inserted is three, two medals are paid out (if it is established in a plurality of valid lines, the medals are valid. If the number of medals inserted is 2 medals, 15 medals will be paid out (in the MB game state, 15 medals will be paid out regardless of the number of valid lines established). If the number of medals inserted is one, 14 medals will be paid out (in the BB game state, 14 will be the maximum number of medals to be paid out regardless of the number of valid lines established). ) Is performed.

Further, in the specifications related to the pachislot machine 1a, as shown in FIG. 16, the MB game in which the CB game state (type 2 special character) is continuously operated as a bonus game state (special game state) advantageous to the player. Only the state (the accessory continuous operation device related to the second special accessory) is provided, and the MB game state related to the pachislot 1a ends with a payout exceeding 13 cards (value of the bonus end number counter). , There are few medals that increase in the bonus game state. On the other hand, in the specifications related to the pachislot machine 1b, as shown in FIG. 148, the BB gaming state (the accessory continuous operating device related to the first special accessory) in which the RB gaming state (type 1 special accessory) is continuously operated is In addition to being provided, an MB gaming state (a continuous operating device for a second special bonus) in which a CB gaming state (type 2 special bonus) is continuously operated is provided, and a BB gaming state for a pachislot machine 1b is further provided. Ends with a payout exceeding 321 (value of the bonus end number counter), and the MB game state related to pachislot 1b ends with a payout exceeding 104 (value of the bonus end number counter). Many medals are increasing.

Further, in the BB game state, the RB game state is controlled from the start to the end, but in the RB game state, eight times (value of the winning count counter) have been won, or eight times (the value of the winning count counter). The end / start is repeated periodically based on the game (the value of the playable number counter).

The control for starting and ending the BB game state is basically the same as that in the MB game state. For example, in the bonus operation check process shown in FIG. 98, it is determined that any one of BB1 to BB6 has won a prize. Then, the value of the bonus end number counter described above is set, the RB game state is set, and "8" is set to the values of the game possible number counter and the winning possible number counter. After that, in the bonus end check process shown in FIG. 97, the BB game state continues in the BB game state until the value of the bonus end number counter becomes a negative value, and the value of the bonus end number counter becomes a negative value. It ends when it becomes.

Further, in the specifications related to the pachi-slot machine 1a, there are RT0 to RT4 gaming states, and the transition control of each RT gaming state is performed according to the transition conditions shown in FIGS. 17 and 47. On the other hand, the specifications related to the pachislot machine 1b have RT0 to RT5 gaming states, and the transition control of each RT gaming state is performed according to the transition conditions shown in FIG. 149.

According to the specifications related to the pachislot machine 1b, when the combination of the symbols of "C_replay_01" is displayed in the RT0 game state, the game shifts to the RT1 game state. The RT1 game state is a low RT game state that continues for three games (that is, an RT game state in which the probability of winning a replay is relatively low), and when the three games are digested, the RT1 game state is started. It shifts to the RT0 game state.

Further, in the specifications related to the pachislot machine 1b, when the combination of the symbols of "C_bell_01" is displayed in the RT0 game state, the game shifts to the RT2 game state. The RT2 game state is a low RT game state that continues during the game of one game, and when the game of one game is digested, the state shifts from the RT2 game state to the RT0 game state.

Further, in the specifications related to the pachislot machine 1b, when any combination of symbols "C_replay_02" to "C_replay_05" is displayed in the RT0 gaming state, the game shifts to the RT3 gaming state. The RT3 game state is a high RT game state that continues during the game of 12 games (that is, an RT game state in which the winning probability of replay is relatively high), and when the game of 12 games is digested, the RT3 game state is started. It shifts to the RT0 game state.

In the specifications related to pachislot 1b, a combination of any of the above-mentioned "C_replay_01", "C_bell_01" and "C_replay_02" to "C_replay_05" symbols is displayed in the RT1 to RT3 game states. If this is done, the RT game state will not be newly transitioned, and the number of continuous games in the current RT game state will not be newly set (that is, the RT game state will not be overwritten).

Further, in the specifications related to the pachislot 1b, when any one of "F_BB1", "F_BB5" and "F_MB3" is determined as the internal winning combination in the RT0 to RT3 gaming states, the game shifts to the RT4 gaming state. The RT4 gaming state continues until the bonus winning combination determined as the internal winning combination wins (that is, until the transition to the bonus gaming state). The medium RT gaming state (that is, the winning probability of the replay is higher than that of the low RT gaming state. The RT game state is high and lower than the high RT game state), and ends when the player shifts to the bonus game state. Here, since "F_BB1", "F_BB5" and "F_MB3" are carry-over combinations stored in the carry-over combination storage area as bonus combinations, the RT4 gaming state is set as the carry-over section (between the bonus flags) of the bonus combination. It is also one of the RT game states of. After the end of the bonus game state, the state shifts to the RT0 game state.

Further, in the specifications related to pachislot 1b, when any one of "F_BB2" to "F_BB4", "F_BB6", "F_MB1" and "F_MB2" is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 to RT3 gaming states, the RT5 game Move to the state. The RT5 gaming state is a high RT gaming state that continues until the bonus combination determined as the internal winning combination wins (that is, until the transition to the bonus gaming state), and ends when the bonus gaming state is entered. Here, since "F_BB2" to "F_BB4", "F_BB6", "F_MB1" and "F_MB2" are carry-over combinations stored in the carry-over combination storage area as bonus combinations, the RT5 gaming state is the bonus combination. It is also one of the RT game states as a carry-over section (between bonus flags). After the end of the bonus game state, the state shifts to the RT0 game state.

Here, the RT4 gaming state related to the pachislot 1b and the RT5 gaming state related to the pachislot 1b are both RT gaming states between the bonus flags, but the winning probability of the replay is different (see FIG. 150 described later). Therefore, the player can infer to some extent the type of bonus winning combination from the winning probability of the replay.

In addition, in the specifications related to pachislot 1b, when the set value (settings 1 to 6) is changed in the initialization process (see FIG. 78) at the time of power-on, or in the restoration process at power-on, it returns to normal. When the entire area of the main RAM 95 is initialized (that is, when the initialization condition is satisfied), the game shifts to the RT0 gaming state. Further, as described above, the player shifts to the RT0 game state even after the end of the bonus game state. In that sense, the RT0 gaming state can be said to be the initial gaming state.

Further, in the specifications related to the pachislot machine 1a, the internal winning combination (a combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed and corresponding to the values of each small combination / replay data pointer and bonus data pointer) shown in FIGS. 24 to 28. Regarding the attached ones), the winning or losing was determined by the winning probability shown in FIGS. 19 to 23 for each game state, but in the specifications related to the pachislot 1b, FIGS. 151 and 152 show. With respect to the indicated internal winning combination, the winning or not is determined by the winning probability shown in FIG. 150 for each gaming state.

In FIG. 150, each column of the "game state" shows a lottery value for each game state, and it can be said that each column of the "game state" shows an internal lottery table for each game state. That is, the column of "RT0" in FIG. 150 is an internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state (corresponding to the general gaming state in pachislot 1a), and the columns of "RT1" to "RT5" in FIG. 150 are each RT. The internal lottery table for use, the row of "RB" in FIG. 150 is the internal lottery table for the RB game state (the BB game state in which is operated), and the row of "CB" in FIG. 150 is the CB game state. This is an internal lottery table for (MB game state in which is activated). However, in the CB game state, as in the case of pachislot 1a, the dedicated internal lottery table is not specified (that is, the internal winning combination is not determined by the lottery), and the bits of all the specified small winning combinations are turned on (that is,). , Display is permitted for all combinations of small winning combinations).

Note that FIG. 150 shows an example of an internal lottery table when the set value (setting) in the specifications related to the pachislot machine 1b is "1", and the set values (settings) are "2" to "6". Although the illustration of the internal lottery table in the case is omitted, in the internal lottery table when the set value (setting) is "2" to "6", the degree of advantage of the player is gradually increased. , The lottery value for at least some of the internal winning combinations is set higher than the internal lottery table when the set value (setting) is "1".

For example, when the set value (setting) is "1", the lottery value of "F_BB1 + F_chance lip 1" (win number "2") is "8", but the set value (setting) is "2". When the lottery value is "9", the set value (setting) is "3", the lottery value is "10", when the set value (setting) is "4", the lottery value is "11", and the set value (setting) The lottery value when is "5" is defined as "12", and the lottery value when the set value (setting) is "6" is defined as "12". It can be specified that the higher the (setting), the more advantageous it becomes. The type of bonus combination that defines the lottery value so as to become more advantageous as the set value (setting) becomes higher may be one type or two or more types.

Further, for example, when the set value (setting) is "1", the lottery value of "F_bell 2" (winning number "55") is "6", but when the set value (setting) is "2". The lottery value is "8", the lottery value is "10" when the set value (setting) is "3", the lottery value is "12" when the set value (setting) is "4", and the set value (setting) is set. The lottery value when) is "5" is defined as "14", and the lottery value when the set value (setting) is "6" is defined as "16", and the winning probability of a specific small winning combination is set. It can be specified that the higher the value (setting), the more advantageous it becomes. The type of small winning combination that defines the lottery value so as to become more advantageous as the set value (setting) becomes higher may be one type or two or more types.

The method of changing the degree of advantage of the player according to the set value (setting) is not limited to these, and as a result, if the higher the set value (setting) is, the degree of advantage of the player increases. Various other methods can be adopted. For example, with respect to the winning probability of a specific replay combination, the lottery value can be specified so as to become more advantageous as the set value (setting) becomes higher, as described above. The type of the replay combination that defines the lottery value so as to become more advantageous as the set value (setting) becomes higher may be one type or two or more types. Further, the degree of advantage of the player may be changed by changing the lottery value of two or more types among the specific bonus combination, small combination, or replay combination.

Further, a plurality of sets of a plurality of setting values (settings) (for example, a set having an odd number (1,3,5) set value (setting) and a set having an even number (2,4,6) set value (setting)). ), And the specified lottery value may be changed depending on the group. For example, in a set with an odd number of set values (settings), the relative values of "F_BB4", "F_BB5" and "F_BB6" (win numbers "26" to "35") are higher than those with an even number of set values (settings). In order to increase the winning probability, in the set with an even number of set values (settings), "F_BB1", "F_BB2" and "F_BB3" (winning number "1"" are relatively relative to the set with an odd number of set values (settings). ~ "25") can be made to have a high winning probability. In this way, the player can set the set value depending on whether the winning probability of "F_BB1", "F_BB2" and "F_BB3" is high, or the winning probability of "F_BB4", "F_BB5" and "F_BB6" is high. It is possible to guess to some extent whether it is an even number or an odd number. However, even in this case, as a whole, the case where the set value (setting) is "1" has the lowest degree of advantage of the player, and the case where the set value (setting) is "6" is the player. The lottery value is set so that the degree of advantage of is the highest.

[Stop control in pachislot machines related to other specification examples]
The outline of the stop control in the pachislot machine 1b will be described below. First, as a premise, when the replay combination and the bonus combination are determined as the internal winning combination at the same time (including the case where the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination while the bonus combination is the carry-over combination), the bonus combination. Stop control is performed so that the combination of symbols related to the replay combination is displayed with priority over the combination of symbols related to. In addition, when the small combination and the bonus combination are determined as the internal winning combination at the same time (including the case where the small combination is determined as the internal winning combination while the bonus combination is the carry-over combination), the symbol related to the bonus combination. Stop control is performed so that the combination of symbols related to the small winning combination is displayed with priority over the combination of.

When "F_rip" (small win / replay data pointer (data pointer A) is "1") is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol of "C_replay_01" is determined regardless of the stop order and the timing of the stop operation. The combination of is displayed on the valid line. The same applies when the bonus combination is duplicated and the internal winning is won.

When "F_Chance Lip 1" (small winning combination / replay data pointer (data pointer A) is "2") is determined as the internal winning combination, "C_Replay_02" regardless of the stop order and the timing of the stop operation. And any combination of symbols of "C_replay_03" is displayed on the valid line. The same applies when the bonus combination is duplicated and the internal winning is won.

When "F_Chance Lip 2" (small winning combination / replay data pointer (data pointer A) is "3") is determined as the internal winning combination, "C_Replay_02" regardless of the stop order and the timing of the stop operation. ~ Any combination of symbols of "C_Replay_05" is displayed on the valid line. The same applies when the bonus combination is duplicated and the internal winning is won.

When "F_Bell 1" and "F_Bell 2" (small winning combination / replay data pointer (data pointer A) are "4" and "5") are determined as internal winning combinations, the stop order and the timing of the stop operation are determined. Regardless of, the combination of symbols of "C_bell_01" is displayed on the valid line. The same applies when the bonus combination is duplicated and the internal winning is won.

When "F_watermelon" (small combination / replay data pointer (data pointer A) is "6") is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation timing is "C_watermelon_01" regardless of the stop order. If the timing is such that the symbols constituting the combination of (for example, the "watermelon" symbol in each reel) can be drawn on the effective line, the combination of the symbols of "C_watermelon_01" is displayed on the effective line and can be drawn. If it is not the timing, the combination of symbols related to the winning will not be displayed on the valid line. The same applies when the bonus combination is duplicated and the internal winning is done, but the timing of the stop operation is not the timing when the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols of "C_watermelon_01" can be drawn into the effective line, but the internal winning. If the timing is such that the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols of the bonus combination that is being played can be drawn onto the effective line, the combination of the symbols of the bonus combination that is internally won is displayed on the effective line.

When "F_Cherry 1" (small win / replay data pointer (data pointer A) is "7") is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation timing is "C_cherry" regardless of the stop order. If the symbol that constitutes the combination of (for example, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel) can be drawn on the effective line, the combination of the "C_cherry" symbols is displayed on the effective line and the timing can be drawn. Otherwise, the combination of symbols related to the winning will not be displayed on the valid line. The same applies when the bonus combination is duplicated and the internal winning is done, but the timing of the stop operation is not the timing when the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols of "C_cherry" can be drawn on the effective line, but the internal winning. If it is possible to draw the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols of the bonus combination on the effective line, the combination of the symbols of the bonus combination that is internally won is displayed on the effective line.

When "F_cherry 2" (small winning combination / replay data pointer (data pointer A) is "8") is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation timing is "C_cherry" regardless of the stop order. If it is possible to pull the symbols that make up the combination of "C_cherry" (for example, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel) onto the effective line, the combination of "C_cherry" symbols is displayed on the effective line, while the stop operation is performed. The timing is not the timing at which the symbols that make up the combination of "C_cherry" symbols can be drawn onto the effective line, but the symbols that make up the combination of "C_special_02" symbols (for example, "Red 7" on the left reel. If it is possible to pull the symbol, the "yellow 7" symbol on the middle reel, and the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel) onto the effective line, the combination of the symbols "C_special_02" is displayed on the effective line. .. In addition, the combination of symbols related to winning is not displayed on the valid line unless any of the symbols can be drawn in. The same applies when the bonus combination is duplicated and the internal winning is won, but the timing of the stop operation is not the timing when the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols of "C_cherry" can be drawn on the effective line, but "C_special". If it is not the timing when the symbols that make up the combination of symbols of "_02" can be drawn into the effective line, but the timing that makes up the combination of the symbols of the bonus combination that is internally won can be drawn into the effective line. The combination of the symbols of the bonus combination that is internally won is displayed on the valid line.

When "F_fixed combination" (small combination / replay data pointer (data pointer A) is "9") is determined as the internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is "C_special_02" regardless of the stop order. If the timing is such that the symbols that make up the combination of symbols (for example, the "red 7" symbol on the left reel, the "yellow 7" symbol on the middle reel, and the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel) can be drawn onto the effective line. The combination of symbols of "C_special_02" is displayed on the valid line, and the combination of symbols related to the winning is not displayed on the valid line unless it is possible to draw in. The same applies when the bonus combination is duplicated and the internal winning is done, but the timing of the stop operation is not the timing when the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols of "C_special_02" can be drawn into the effective line, but the internal winning. If the timing is such that the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols of the bonus combination that is being played can be drawn onto the effective line, the combination of the symbols of the bonus combination that is internally won is displayed on the effective line.

When "F_RB combination" and "F_CB combination" (small combination / replay data pointer (data pointer A) is "10" and "11") are determined as internal winning combinations, the stop order is right reel 3R, middle reel. The order is 3C, left reel 3L, the timing of the stop operation for the right reel 3R is when the symbol positions "10" to "12", and the timing of the stop operation for the middle reel 3C is the symbol positions "7" to "11". "Or" 16 "to" 20 ", and when the timing of the stop operation for the left reel 3L is the symbol position" 0 "or" 1 ", the combination of the symbols of" C_special_01 "or" C_special_02 ". Is displayed on the valid line. On the other hand, when the stop order is an order other than the above, and when the stop operation timing is a timing other than the above, "C_bell_01", "C_watermelon_01" or "C_cherry" is selected according to the stop operation timing. Any combination of symbols is displayed on the valid line.

[Playability in pachislot machines related to other specification examples]
As described above, since the pachislot machine 1b according to the other specification example does not have the ART function, the player can play the game in the normal game state while expecting the transition to the bonus game state in order to increase the medals. Do. In the RT0 gaming state, it shifts to the RT1 gaming state based on the display of "C_replay_01", and shifts to the RT2 gaming state based on the display of "C_bell_01". In the RT1 gaming state and the RT2 gaming state, the total winning probability of the replay combination itself hardly increases as compared with the RT0 gaming state, but the winning probability of "F_chance lip 1" and "F_chance lip 2" increases.

Here, since "F_Chance Lip 1" and "F_Chance Lip 2" are relatively easy to be determined as an internal winning combination at the same time as a bonus combination, if "F_Chance Lip 1" and "F_Chance Lip 2" are won. , The player will expect the duplicate winning of the bonus role. Further, in the RT0 gaming state, when any of "C_Replay_02" to "C_Replay_05" is displayed by winning such "F_Chance Lip 1" and "F_Chance Lip 2", the RT3 gaming state is entered. Transition. In the RT3 gaming state, as in the RT5 gaming state, the total winning probability of the replay combination is dramatically increased as compared with the RT0 gaming state, so even if the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination at the same time. You can have a feeling of expectation as if it is between the bonus flags.

In addition, in order to further improve the expectation as if it is between such bonus flags, each replay combination is drawn with the same probability or substantially the same probability in the RT3 game state and the RT5 game state. May be good. Further, the same effect may be performed in the RT3 game state and the RT5 game state, or the same continuous effect may be performed over a predetermined period (for example, 12 games). In this case, in the final game of the continuous production, if it is in the RT3 game state, it is shown that the bonus combination is not won, and if it is in the RT5 game state, it is shown that the bonus combination is won. May be good.

In addition, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the game shifts to the RT4 gaming state or the RT5 gaming state between the bonus flags, and when the combination of symbols related to the determined bonus combination is displayed, the BB game It shifts to the state or the MB game state.

As described above, in the BB game state, the number of inserted medals is "1", and basically, 14 medals are paid out each time the game is played, so that the player can win many medals. it can. However, the value of the bonus end number counter in the BB game state is "321", and if 14 medals are paid out in all the games, it ends in 23 games (14 x 23 = 322). ). On the other hand, if 13 medals are paid out in one game, the game ends in 24 games (14 × 22 + 13 × 1 = 321 medals). That is, in one game in the BB game state, if the game is played in the above-mentioned stop order and the timing of the stop operation, more medals can be obtained, which is a game with abundant technical intervention. There is.

Similarly, in the MB game state, the number of inserted medals is "2", and basically, 15 medals are paid out each time the game is played, so that the player can win many medals. it can. However, the value of the bonus end number counter in the BB game state is "104", and if 15 medals are paid out in all the games, it ends in 7 games (15 x 7 = 105 pieces). ). On the other hand, if 14 medals are paid out in one game, the game ends in eight games (15 x 6 + 14 x 1 = 104 medals). That is, in one game in the MB game state, if the game is played in the above-mentioned stop order and the timing of the stop operation, more medals can be obtained, which is a game with abundant technical intervention. There is.

The pachi-slot machine 1b according to another specification example does not have an ART function, but has an RT function, but the specification is not limited to this. For example, the specifications may be such that the RT function is not provided. Specifically, the RT1 to RT5 gaming states may not be defined, the gaming state in the normal gaming state may be one, and the increase / decrease rate of medals may be changed only depending on whether or not to shift to the bonus gaming state. In addition, the type of bonus combination and the value of the bonus end number counter can be changed as appropriate, and the winning probability of each internal winning combination can be changed as appropriate.

[Direction control of bonus game state in pachislot related to other specification examples]
In the pachislot machine 1b according to another specification example, the specification is described as a specification that does not have an ART function and allows the player to increase the game medium mainly by operating the bonus. There is room to devise ways to further improve the interest of the players in terms of production. Therefore, in the following, with reference to FIGS. 153 and 154, the effect control of the bonus gaming state applicable to the pachislot machine 1b according to another specification example will be described. Needless to say, the effect control of the bonus gaming state described below can also be applied to the pachislot machine 1a described so far, that is, the gaming machine having an ART function. In this case, since both the bonus game state and the ART game state are still advantageous states for the player, the same effect control may be performed in the ART game state.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example of a music selection screen at the time of bonus operation in the other specification example, and FIG. 154 is a diagram for explaining a change in the output content of the music in the other specification example.

As shown in FIG. 153, in the pachislot machine 1b according to another specification example, when the pachislot machine 1b shifts to the BB game state, at the start of the transition, from among a plurality of songs (for example, songs 1 to 5), in the BB game state. It is configured so that the player can select the music to be output. Similarly, the music output in the MB game state may be configured so that the player can select it.

Specifically, on the main screen 111, a music selection button (music selection area) for selecting music 1 to music 5 is displayed, and a desired music can be selected by touching the music selection button. Can be done. For players who do not have the desired music or are not interested in the music selection itself, a random button (music random selection area) that enables the music to be randomly selected is further displayed. By touching this random button, a randomly selected song is determined on the game machine side.

Although details are omitted, in FIG. 153, the music selection buttons and the random buttons of the music 1 to the music 3 can be selected, while the music selection buttons of the music 4 and the music 5 cannot be selected. (In FIG. 153, the display is inverted in black and white). This is controlled so that it can be selected when a predetermined condition (opening condition) is satisfied in the game information of the player stored in the server 200 described later by using the mobile terminal cooperation function described above. It has become something to be said. However, in the selection of the music output in the BB game state, it is possible to configure all the music to be selectable from the beginning regardless of the player's game information stored in the server 200 described later.

Further, as shown in FIG. 153, the pachi-slot machine 1b according to another specification example is further configured so that the player can change the output content of the selected music.

Specifically, when the music selection button of a desired music is touch-operated on the main screen 111, the touch operation for the music selection button is continuously performed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) or longer (that is, long press). The output content can be changed so that the output is started from the middle part of the desired music (for example, the second music).

In the pachislot machine 1b according to another specification example, the first part (for example, the first part of the music piece) and the second subsequent part (for example, the first part of the music piece) are used as the basic composition of the music when the output content is not changed by the player. It can be configured so that the part (for example, the second part of the music) is output, or it can be configured so that only the first part is output. In any case, the output content of the selected music is changed by the operation of the player.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1b according to another specification example, a configuration in which the touch input unit (touch panel) 31a is arranged on the main screen 111 is taken as an example, and it is desired by touching the music selection button displayed on the main screen 111. The form in which the music is selected and the output content is changed by pressing and holding the music selection button is explained, but the form in which the player recognizes the music selection operation and the output content change operation is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, it is assumed that an output content change button (output content change area) for changing the output content is separately displayed on the main screen 111, and the output content is changed by touching this output content change button. It may be.

Further, for example, in the configuration in which the touch input unit (touch panel) 31a is arranged on the sub screen 113, the above-mentioned music selection button or output content change button may be displayed on the sub screen 113, or the main screen 113 may be displayed. A screen as shown in FIG. 153 is displayed on the screen 111, and a move selection operation button for accepting a move selection operation such as a cross key and a decision button for accepting a decision operation such as a cross key are displayed on the sub screen 113. However, the music selection operation and the output content change operation may be appropriately performed by touching those buttons. That is, by moving the above-mentioned cursor by the above-mentioned operation, the music selection operation and the output content change operation may be appropriately performed.

Further, for example, the music selection operation and the output content change operation may be appropriately performed by operating the enter button 28 and the select button 29 described above, and the above description is performed on condition that the game is not progressing. The music selection operation and the output content change operation may be appropriately performed by operating one or a plurality of the MAX bet button 14, the 1 bet button 15, the start lever 16, and the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R.

Further, for example, it is possible to display a progress bar or the like indicating the length of the selected music on the main screen 111 so that the output content can be changed in more detail. Specifically, when a song is selected by the music selection button, the above progress bar is displayed, and by touching any part of the progress bar, output is started from that arbitrary part. The output content can be changed. That is, the form of changing the output content of the music is not limited to the form of changing the above-mentioned music whose output is started from No. 1 to the one whose output is started from No. 2 from the position desired by the player. It includes all forms in which the output content can be changed so that the output is started.

Further, for example, the output content may be changed for all the songs that the player can select, or for only some of the songs. Specifically, if all the songs that the player can select are songs composed of a predetermined length (for example, composed of at least No. 1 and No. 2), the output contents can be changed for all the songs. , A specific song is composed of a predetermined length, but other songs are composed of a length shorter than the predetermined length (for example, it is composed of only No. 1), for a specific song. Only the output content may be changeable.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1b according to another specification example, at the start of the BB game state, it is possible to perform the output content change operation together with the music selection operation, but the time when the music selection operation can be performed and the time when the output content change operation can be performed. Can be at different times. For example, the time when the output content change operation can be performed can be an arbitrary time after the start of the BB game state, or can be both the start time of the BB game state and the arbitrary time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, an output example of the music when the output content is changed for the music output in the BB game state will be described.

In FIG. 154 (a), when the music selected in the BB game state is output, the first part of the music is output from the start of the BB game state as the basic output pattern, and the first part of the music is output. After the output of is completed, the interlude portion is output until the end of the BB gaming state. That is, the second part of the music is an output pattern that is not output.

In FIG. 154 (b), when the music selected in the BB game state is output, as a basic output pattern, the first part of the music is output from the start of the BB game state, and the first part of the music is output. When the output of the music is finished, the interlude part is output for a predetermined period, then the second part of the music following the first part of the music is output, and when the output of the second part of the music is finished, the BB game state ends after that. It shows what is configured so that the interlude part (or the after part) is output up to. That is, it is an output pattern in which the first part of the music and the second part of the music following it are output.

Here, in any of the output patterns (a) and (b) of FIG. 154, the length of the first portion of the music is from the minimum time required from the start to the end of the BB game state (minimum time for BB digestion). Is also set to be a long time (for example, 150 seconds). The minimum time for BB digestion can be obtained by multiplying the minimum time required for one game by the number of games that can be played in the BB game state. It is obtained by multiplying the minimum time (4.1 seconds) required to perform one game by the number of games that can be played (24 times) in the BB game state. In this case, the minimum time required to perform one game is not the time required for weight processing "4.1" seconds, but the time predetermined as the average value of the players (for example, 6 seconds). ) Can also be used as a reference. Further, in this case, the number of games that can be played in the BB game state may be based on the normal "23" times instead of the "24" times when the game can be played one more time than usual by technical intervention. it can.

When a song is selected by the player's song selection operation and it is once determined that the song is output in the output pattern of (a) or (b) of FIG. 154, the player's output content change operation (FIG. 154). When the middle and change operations) are performed, the output content is output from the start of the BB game state as shown in (c) of FIG. 154, and the output of the second part of the music ends. Then, after that, the output pattern can be changed so that the interlude portion is output until the end of the BB game state.

Note that FIG. 154 describes an example in which the length of the first part of the music and the length of the second part of the music are configured to be the same length or substantially the same length, but the length is limited to this. The length of the first part of the music and the length of the second part of the music may be different from each other.

Further, the output pattern in which the music is output may correspond to the type of bonus game state. For example, regarding the BB game state, in the BB game state (BB1 to BB3 game state) based on the establishment of BB1 to BB3, it is assumed that the music selected by the output pattern of FIG. 154 (b) is output, and BB4 to BB6. In the BB gaming state (BB4 to BB6 gaming state) based on the establishment of the above, the music selected by the output pattern of FIG. 154 (a) may be output. Similarly, when the music selection operation and the output content change operation are enabled even in the MB game state, in the MB game state, the MB game state (MB1 and MB2 game state) based on the establishment of MB1 and MB2 is shown in FIG. 154. It is assumed that the music selected by the output pattern of (b) is output, and in the MB gaming state (MB3 gaming state) based on the establishment of MB3, the music selected by the output pattern of (a) of FIG. 154 is output. It may be done.

Further, for example, in the BB game state, the music selected by the output pattern of FIG. 154 (b) is output, and in the MB game state, the music selected by the output pattern of FIG. 154 (a) is output. It may be output. As described above, such a configuration may be applied to the ART gaming state, which is an advantageous section in which the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. For example, in an ART gaming state in which the degree of advantage is relatively large (or small), it is assumed that the music selected by the output pattern of FIG. 154 (b) is output, and the degree of advantage is relatively high. In the small (or large) ART gaming state, the music selected by the output pattern of FIG. 154 (a) may be output. Further, in this way, the output patterns of (a) and (b) of FIG. 154 can be associated with each other according to the degree of advantage (for example, the value of the bonus end number counter) even in the bonus game state. You may.

Further, as described above, the bonus game state in which the music selected by the output pattern of FIG. 154 is output, and the bonus game in which the music selected by the output pattern of FIG. 154 is output. When defining the state, the output content change operation may be possible only in the bonus game state in which the music selected by the output pattern of FIG. 154 (a) is output. That is, the output content change operation is not possible in the bonus game state where the first and second parts of the music can be output, and the output content change operation is possible in the bonus game state where only the first part of the music can be output. You may do so. Further, in the bonus game state in which the music selected by the output pattern of FIG. 154 (a) is output, the music 2 must be listened to once by using the mobile terminal cooperation function described above. It may not be possible to change the output content to the number part.

In the pachislot machine 1b according to another specification example, by performing the effect control of the bonus gaming state as described above, not only the player can select the desired music, but also the selected music is output from the desired location. Since the output content can be changed as described above, it is possible to select a music that matches the player's taste and situation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in this case, the output pattern of FIG. 154 (a) can be adopted as the basic music output pattern when the output content is not changed by the player, or the output pattern of FIG. 154 (b) can be adopted. Can also be adopted.

For example, when the output pattern of FIG. 154 (a) is adopted as the basic music output pattern when the output content is not changed by the player, when the special conditions relating to the game are satisfied, FIG. 154 shows. The music may be output according to the output pattern of (b). That is, normally, only the first part of the music can be heard, but if the special condition is satisfied, the first part of the music and the second part following it may be heard. Various conditions can be adopted as the special conditions. For example, in the game information of the player stored in the server 200 described later by using the mobile terminal cooperation function described above, a predetermined condition (opening condition) can be adopted. ) Can be adopted, or it can be adopted that the BB gaming state can be resumed within a predetermined game (for example, 100 games) after the end of the bonus gaming state.

Then, under this premise, even if the special conditions are not satisfied, if the output content change operation is performed, the output pattern is changed to the output pattern of FIG. 154 (c) so that the music is output. May be good. That is, the second part of the music, which cannot normally be heard, may be listened to by performing an output content changing operation. As a result, the significance of changing the output content of the music can be further enhanced, and thus the interest in selecting the music can be further improved.

Further, for example, when the output pattern of FIG. 154 (b) is adopted as the basic music output pattern when the output content is not changed by the player, the pachislot machine 1b according to another specification example is the music piece 1. The length of the turn portion is set to be longer than the minimum time required from the start to the end of the BB gaming state (minimum time for BB digestion). Here, for example, a player who has no time to spare, such as when the closing time of a game store is approaching, usually wants to digest the game as soon as possible. For this reason, such a player can only listen to a predetermined part (the first part) of the music even if he / she selects the desired music each time he / she is in the BB game state, which diminishes the interest in selecting the music. There is a problem that it will end up.

On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1b according to another specification example, when the output content change operation is performed, it can be heard immediately from the second part of the music, so that the preference that the game is desired to be digested as soon as possible is desired. Even a player who has a player or a player who is in a situation where such a need is urgent can prevent the interest in music selection from diminishing, and rather improve the interest in music selection.

Further, for example, when the output pattern of FIG. 154 (b) is adopted as the basic music output pattern when the output content is not changed by the player, the pachislot machine 1b according to another specification example is in the BB game state. When the special condition is satisfied, it may be possible to change the output content during the BB game state. That is, when the special condition is satisfied during the BB game state, the output content change operation may be performed even during the BB game state. Various conditions can be adopted as the special conditions. For example, in the game information of the player stored in the server 200 described later by using the mobile terminal cooperation function described above, it is determined during the BB game state. It is also possible to adopt that the condition (opening condition) is satisfied, and 13 medals have been paid out in at least one game during the BB game state (that is, the BB game state is extended). It is also possible to adopt what was possible).

Further, in this case, even when the BB game state is started, it may be possible to perform the output content changing operation together with the music selection operation in the same manner as described above. In this case, when the BB game state is started, the output content change operation may be performed regardless of whether or not the special condition is satisfied. For example, the special condition may be set in the previous BB game state. If it is satisfied, the output content change operation may be performed.

If the output content change operation is performed based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied during the BB game state, and if the first part of the music is output, the second part of the music is in the BB game state. The output may be newly started from the beginning of the portion, or the output may be started from the portion corresponding to the first portion of the output music in the second portion of the music. For example, if the first part of a song is composed of A melody, B melody, and chorus, and the second part of the song has the same structure, when the A melody of the first part of the song is output. When the output content change operation is performed, the output content is changed so that the A melody of the second part of the music is output, and the output content is changed when the B melody of the first part of the music is output. When the operation is performed, the output content is changed so that the B melody of the second part of the music is output, and the output content change operation is performed when the chorus of the first part of the music is output. In that case, the output content can be changed so that the sub of the second part of the music is output. Further, when the output content change operation is performed based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied during the BB game state, if the second part of the music is output, the second part of the music is in the BB game state. The output may be newly started from the beginning of the portion (that is, cue playback is performed).

As a result, it is possible to add new playability related to music selection during the BB game state. Further, for example, when it is possible to perform the output content change operation even when the BB game state starts, the player who has forgotten to perform the output content change operation may enjoy the music selection. It is possible to prevent the decline.

[Special state control in pachislot machines related to other specification examples]
The pachislot machine 1b according to another specification example has no ART function and has been described as a specification in which the player can mainly increase the game medium by operating the bonus. Under such a specification, for example, a set value ( When the winning probability of the bonus combination fluctuates according to the setting), whether or not a specific setting value (for example, setting value (setting) 6) having a high degree of advantage of the player is set is determined by the player. Becomes a concern. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1b according to another specification example, a special state is provided as a state in which a special effect that can suggest the possibility that a specific set value is set can be executed or is easily executed, and this special state is provided. It is possible to make the player's expectation different depending on whether or not it is controlled by the state. Hereinafter, the special state control applicable to the pachislot machine 1b according to another specification example will be described with reference to FIG. 155. Needless to say, the special state control described below can also be applied to the pachislot machine 1a described so far, that is, a gaming machine having an ART function.

FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of special state control processing in the other specification example. The special state control process is executed under the control of the sub CPU 102, and is executed as a part of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102) when a command transmitted from the main CPU 93 is received, for example. Alternatively, it may be executed as a part of the periodic interrupt processing of the sub CPU 102 (not shown).

First, the sub CPU 102 determines in the pachi-slot machine 1b whether or not it is at the time of power failure recovery or setting change (S1041). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the power is turned on again after the power failure state occurs once in the pachislot machine 1b, or when the set value is newly set (the setting is changed). To do. When it is determined in S1041 that it is time to recover from the power failure or change the setting (when the determination in S1041 is YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of determination games for determining whether or not to control the special state (0). clear. As a result, for example, when the game store is opened, the number of determined games is set to 0.

In S1041, when it is determined that it is not the time of power recovery or setting change (when S1041 is NO determination), or after the processing of S1042, the set value set in the sub CPU 102 is "6" (specific setting value). It is determined whether or not it is (S1043). The specific set value for which S1043 is YES is not limited to the case where the set value is "6". For example, the specific set value for which S1043 is determined to be YES may be any one of "4", "5", and "6" (that is, the set value is "4" or more). When it is determined in S1043 that the set value is not "6" (specific set value) (NO in S1043), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to the process of S1048.

On the other hand, in S1043, when it is determined that the set value is "6" (a specific set value) (when the determination in S1043 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has played one game. Accordingly, the number of determined games is added by 1 (S1044). The timing of adding 1 to the number of determined games may be at the start of the game (for example, when the start command is received) or at the end of the game (for example, when the display command is received).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of determined games is "1000" (S1045). When it is determined in S1045 that the number of determined games is not "1000" (when the determination in S1045 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to the process of S1048.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1045 that the number of determined games is "1000" (when the determination in S1045 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the special state flag (S1046). The special state flag is data for controlling to a special state, and is controlled to a special state when the special state flag is on. Next, the sub CPU 102 stores the current date and time (S1047). However, the processing of S1046 and S1047 may be performed even when the special state flag is already on. In this case, the ON state of the special state flag is maintained in the processing of S1046, and the processing of S1047 is performed. The current date and time is stored again. That is, by overwriting the stored date and time, the period during which the special state continues is extended.

In the process of S1047, the current date and time can be stored based on the date and time set by the time setting (see FIG. 129) in the hall menu, and the current date and time can be stored in the sub control board 42 (sub control circuit 101). It is also possible to acquire the date and time from an external RTC (real-time clock) (not shown) and store the current date and time.

In S1043, when it is determined that the set value is not "6" (specific set value) (when S1043 is NO determination), in S1045, when it is determined that the number of determined games is not "1000" (S1045). Is NO determination), and after the processing of S1047, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the special state flag is ON (S1048). When it is determined in S1048 that the special state flag is not on (NO in S1048), the sub CPU 102 ends the special state control process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1048 that the special state flag is ON (when the determination in S1048 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has a difference between the date and time stored in the process of S1047 and the current time exceeding 72 hours. Whether or not it is determined (S1049). When it is determined in S1049 that the difference between the date and time stored in the process of S1047 and the current time exceeds 72 hours (when the determination in S1049 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns off the special state flag (S1050). .. That is, when 72 hours have passed from the date and time when the special state flag was turned on (or the date and time when the special state flag was overwritten), the sub CPU 102 terminates the special state. After the processing of S1050, the sub CPU 102 ends the special state control processing. Further, in S1049, when it is determined that the difference between the date and time stored in the process of S1047 and the current time does not exceed 72 hours (when the determination in S1049 is NO), the sub CPU 102 also performs the special state control process. To finish.

In the special state control process, the number of determined games is initialized in the process of S1042, the number of determined games is added by 1 in the process of S1044, and the number of determined games is determined to be "1000" in the process of S1045. The special state flag was turned on to start the special state, but the set value was "6" (specific set value) in the processing of S1043, for example, without determining the number of determined games. If it is determined, the processing of S1046 and S1047 may be performed. That is, when the set value is "6" (specific set value), the special state may be started without determining the number of games played with the specific set value.

Further, in the special state control process, in the process of S1049, it is determined whether or not the difference between the stored date and time and the current date and time exceeds 72 hours, thereby controlling whether or not the special state is terminated. ing. That is, the special state is terminated when the predetermined period in which the time counting starts from the time when it is decided to set the special state becomes 72 hours. Here, since the predetermined period is set to 72 hours in the pachislot machine 1b according to another specification example, the special state can be continued over a plurality of different business days in the amusement store. However, the predetermined period can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be shorter than 72 hours or longer than 72 hours.

In addition, the method of enabling a special state to be continued across a plurality of different business days in a game store is not limited to this. For example, after the special state flag is turned on, the special state flag is turned off when the number of times of power failure recovery (see S1401) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times). May be good. In this case, in order to distinguish from the power failure state when the game machine is maintained or when a power failure occurs, only the number of times the power failure is restored when the power failure state is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 4 hours). Should be counted.

Further, for example, when the number of setting changes (see S1401) after the special state flag is turned on becomes a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times), the special state flag is turned off. May be good. In this case, when the period in which the setting is not changed becomes a specific period or a specific number of days, the special state flag may be turned off even if the number of setting changes is not the predetermined number.

Further, for example, when the above-mentioned RTC or the like is provided, a date is simply acquired from the RTC, and a predetermined number of days (for example, 4 days) have passed by comparing the acquired date with the recorded date and time. , The special state flag may be turned off.

Further, by setting in the hall menu described above, the game store can arbitrarily set the predetermined period until the special state flag is turned off, the number of times the power is restored, the number of setting changes, or the predetermined number of days. Good. As a result, the special effect can be executed under the conditions in line with the intention of the game store.

In the above description, the special state can be continued for a predetermined period, and this predetermined period can be continued over a plurality of different business days in the amusement store as an example. "Different business days" is an expression for convenience of explanation, and does not matter whether or not the game store is actually open. That is, the predetermined period may be sustainable over a plurality of days. In addition, it is intended to exclude those that can be appropriately modified according to various requirements such as market trends of game machines and restrictions on their rules, and for example, a predetermined period is not set to be sustainable over a plurality of days. Absent. That is, the predetermined period may be set to end in one day as long as the intention of the invention of the present embodiment is not significantly deviated.

Further, when the special state is set to the state in which the special effect can be executed, "executable" means that the special effect is executed when a predetermined effect trigger is established when the special state flag is on, and the special state is executed. Not only the mode in which the special effect is not executed even if the predetermined effect trigger is established when the flag is off, but also the predetermined effect trigger in which the special effect is executed when the special state flag is on is established. However, when the special state flag is off, the special effect is executed, and the predetermined effect trigger is not established.

Further, when the special state is set to a state in which the special effect is easily executed, "easy to execute" means that the special effect is executed when a predetermined effect trigger is established when the special state flag is on. Is set high, and if the predetermined effect trigger is established when the special state flag is off, the probability that the special effect is determined to be executed is set low. However, when the special state flag is on, the special effect is executed. The probability that a predetermined effect trigger is established is set high, and when the special state flag is off, the special effect is executed. Includes a mode in which the probability that a predetermined production opportunity is established is set low.

In addition, it is definite that the special effect is in a special state (that is, a specific set value has been set during the past maximum 4 days including today) when a predetermined effect opportunity is established. It may be an effect to notify to, or an effect that suggests that there is a possibility of a special state (that is, a specific set value may have been set during the past maximum 4 days including today). It may be.

For example, when a predetermined effect trigger is established at the end of a specific bonus game state (for example, MB game state), at this time, an effect is performed in which one character from a plurality of characters is displayed. In some cases, the effect of displaying a specific character, which is not normally displayed (when the special state flag is off), is executed as a special effect so that the special state is definitely notified. It may be. Alternatively, if the effect that the specific character is displayed has a high probability of being executed when it is in a special state and a low probability of being executed when it is not in a special state, the specific character is displayed. It may be suggested that there is a possibility of a special state by executing the effect.

Further, regarding such an effect, an effect that deterministically notifies that the state is in a special state (for example, effect A), an effect that suggests that there is a possibility of a special state (for example, effect B), and a special state. Three types of effects (for example, effect C) that do not suggest the possibility of the above can be executed. For example, in the case of a special state, the effect A is executed with a probability of 10%, and 60% of the effects. The effect B is executed with a probability and the effect C is executed with a probability of 30%, while the effect B is executed with a probability of 50% and the effect C is executed with a probability of 50% when it is not in a special state. You can also do it.

It should be noted that the predetermined effect trigger in which the special effect can be executed is not limited to that established at the time described above. For example, it may be established at the start of the MB gaming state or during the MB gaming state, or may be established at the start of the BB gaming state, during the BB gaming state, or at the end of the BB gaming state. Good. Further, it may be established during the normal gaming state, or is established at the start of a specific RT gaming state (for example, RT3), during the specific RT gaming state, or at the end of the specific RT gaming state. It may be something to do.

In the pachislot machine 1b according to another specification example, when the player can grasp the setting status of the set value in a predetermined period (for example, a plurality of business days in a game store) by performing the special state control as described above. In addition, when a special effect is executed, there is a possibility that an advantageous setting value is set in the gaming machine in which the player is playing the game, so the player can play the game with a sense of expectation. Will do. In addition, since the special state can be continued for a predetermined period (for example, across a plurality of business days of the game store), the game store can set the set value with sharpness, and it is possible to set an appropriate profit. Can be secured. That is, according to the pachislot machine 1b according to another specification example, it is possible to improve the motivation to play while trying to balance the interests between the player and the game store.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1b according to another specification example, when it is decided to set the special state, the time until the special state is ended is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution time of the special effect from being biased, and it is possible to manage the period during which the special state continues more accurately, so that both the player and the amusement shop can control the effect equally. It can be carried out.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1b according to another specification example, when it is decided to set a special state, the time until the special state is terminated is started, and after that, the special state is further set. When the condition for determining is satisfied, the timekeeping of the time is restarted from the beginning. That is, the time until the special state is terminated is overwritten. As a result, the player may be able to more accurately grasp the setting status of the set value on a plurality of business days in the game store, for example, when the special state continues for 5 days or more. Can be improved. Further, in order to grasp such a setting situation, the player needs to visit the game machine store frequently, so that the operation of the game machine can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation to play for a longer period of time while balancing the interests between the player and the game store.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1b according to another specification example, a specific set value is set, and when a game is played for a specific period, the pachislot machine 1b is controlled to a specific state. As a result, for example, a specific setting value is set once only for the game store to control to a specific state, and then a setting value having a lower degree of advantage than the specific setting value is set when the player plays a game. It is possible to prevent acts such as playing a game. Therefore, even when a special state that can be continued for a predetermined period (for example, across a plurality of business days of the game store) is provided, it is possible to perform equitable production control for both the player and the game store.

[Data storage by using the mobile terminal linkage function]
Next, an example of data storage by using the above-mentioned mobile terminal cooperation function in the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 to 158. FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example of a character customization screen in the pachi-slot machine 1, FIG. 157 is a diagram for explaining various data related to character customization in the pachi-slot machine 1, and FIG. 158 is a diagram of the pachi-slot machine 1 and the server 200. It is a figure explaining the outline of data transfer.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by using the mobile terminal cooperation function, that is, by using the player's own mobile terminal and logging in and out of the pachi-slot machine 1, so far. Accumulates various game information (various data) such as game information related to the result of the game, game information appropriately provided according to the progress of the game, and game information for saving the result of the player's selection operation. It is possible. A method of accumulating various game information (various data) in cooperation with the server 200 described later will be described later with reference to FIG. 158.

First, when the above-mentioned Unimemo menu item (see FIG. 138) is displayed on the main screen 111 or the sub screen 113, for example, it is assumed that the item "Customize" is also displayed, and this "Customize" menu is selected. Then, the character customization screen as shown in FIG. 156 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 156, a character selection button for selecting a character (“A” to “D” in the frame of “character” in FIG. 156) is displayed on the character customization screen, and the character is selected. Then, an image showing the selected character is displayed on the left side of the screen.

In addition, below the character selection button, there are costume selection buttons (“A” to “D” in the frame of “costume” in FIG. 156) for selecting a costume (costume) on the display of the selected character. Below the costume selection button, the item selection button for selecting the display possession (item) of the selected character ("A" to "H" in the frame of "item" in FIG. 156. ) Is displayed.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a character is selected and a costume or item is selected on this customization screen, the customized character is used for the production. Further, the selected character type, the selected costume type, and the selected item type can be accumulated as one of the game information for saving the result of the player's selection operation. Therefore, once the character is customized, the player can restore the customized character simply by logging in.

In addition, among the selectable characters, pachislot machines between different models that use the same or similar motifs and story characteristics but have different specifications (for example, one model is the above-mentioned pachislot machine 1a, and other models are used. It may include both characters that are commonly used in the above-mentioned pachislot machine 1b) and unique characters that are uniquely used in pachislot machines between different models.

In addition, among the costumes that can be selected, the common costume (for common characters) commonly used in the above-mentioned pachislot between different models for customizing the display of the common character, and the above-mentioned pachislot between different models. In some cases, unique costumes (for common characters) that are uniquely used in each are included. In addition, a common costume (for unique characters) commonly used in the above-mentioned pachislot machines between different models for customizing the display of unique characters, and a unique costume used uniquely in each of the above-mentioned pachislot machines between different models (for unique characters). (For unique characters) may be included.

In addition, among the selectable items, the common item (for common characters) commonly used in the above-mentioned pachislot between different models for customizing the display of the common character, and the above-mentioned pachislot between different models. In some cases, unique items (for common characters) that are used uniquely in each are included. In addition, a common item (for unique characters) commonly used in pachislot machines between different models described above and a unique item used uniquely in pachislot machines between different models described above (for unique characters) for customizing the display of unique characters. (For unique characters) may be included.

In addition, among the costumes and items that can be selected, it is not possible to select at first, and if it is possible to satisfy the opening conditions set in advance according to the progress of the game for each model, it will be newly selected. It may include what is possible. As described above, the types of costumes and items that can be newly selected when the opening condition is satisfied can be accumulated as one of the game information appropriately provided according to the progress of the game. Therefore, once the costume or item is selectable, the player can restore the costume or item selectable state simply by logging in. It should be noted that the character may also include a character that can be newly selected when a predetermined opening condition can be satisfied according to the progress of the game for each model.

Further, as the opening conditions (conditions for providing game information) according to the progress of the game, various conditions can be defined as conditions for providing various game information. For example, the number of times the mobile terminal cooperation function has been used (number of logins) has reached 1, 3, and 5 times, the cumulative number of games played has reached 1000 times, 3000 times, and 5000 times, and a bonus. The cumulative number of transitions to the gaming state is 10, 30, and 50, the cumulative number of transitions to the BB gaming state is 10, 30, and 50, and the MB gaming status. The cumulative number of times transferred to is 10 times, 30 times, 50 times, and the bonus combination is won independently (for example, to any of the winning numbers "1", "9" and "18". One game information is associated with one provision condition, such as winning) or a specific effect (for example, a special effect) is performed, and when the provision condition is satisfied, the corresponding game information is accumulated. You can do it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, various data related to character customization will be given as an example of game information appropriately provided according to the progress of the game, and differences in the configuration of the various data among a plurality of different models will be described. .. Also in FIG. 157, one model is the above-mentioned pachislot machine 1a, and the other model is the above-mentioned pachislot machine 1b.

As shown in FIG. 157, in the pachislot 1a, the data indicating the common character is the data corresponding to the "character A" and the "character B", and the data indicating the unique character is the "character E" and the "character F". The corresponding data is defined as game information.

Further, in the pachislot 1a, as data indicating a common costume (for a common character), "for character A: A" to "for character A: C" and "for character B: A" to "for character B: C". As data indicating the unique costume (for common character), data corresponding to "character A: E" and "for character B: E", as data indicating the unique costume (for unique character), " Corresponds to "for character E: A" to "for character E: C", "for character E: E", "for character F: A" to "for character F: C", and "for character F: E". The data is defined as game information. For example, the data corresponding to "for character E: A" to "for character E: C" may be used as data indicating a common costume (for a unique character). Further, the opening conditions a to h can be set to arbitrary conditions.

Further, in the pachislot 1a, as data indicating a common item (for a common character) and / or a common item (for a unique character), data corresponding to "item A" to "item D" and a unique item (for a common character) And / or as data indicating a unique item (for a unique character), data corresponding to "item I" to "item L" is defined as game information. Arbitrary conditions can be set for each of the opening conditions 1 to 8.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 157, in the pachislot 1b, the data indicating the common character is the data corresponding to the "character A" and the "character B", and the data indicating the unique character is the "character C" and the "character D". The data corresponding to "" is defined as game information.

Further, in the pachislot 1b, as data indicating a common costume (for a common character), "for character A: A" to "for character A: C" and "for character B: A" to "for character B: C". As data indicating the unique costume (for common character), data corresponding to "character A: D" and "for character B: D", as data indicating the unique costume (for unique character), " Data corresponding to "for character C: A" to "for character C: D" and "for character D: A" to "for character D: D" are defined as game information. Note that, for example, the data corresponding to "for character C: A" to "for character C: C" can be used as data indicating a common costume (for a unique character). Arbitrary conditions can be set for each of the opening conditions a to h.

Further, in the pachislot 1b, as data indicating a common item (for a common character) and / or a common item (for a unique character), data corresponding to "item A" to "item D" and a unique item (for a common character) And / or as data indicating a unique item (for a unique character), data corresponding to "item E" to "item H" is defined as game information. Arbitrary conditions can be set for the opening conditions 1, 2, 5 to 10, respectively.

Here, the data corresponding to "Character A: A" to "Character A: C", "Character B: A" to "Character B: C", and "Item A" to "Item D" are , Pachislot 1a and Pachislot 1b satisfy the opening condition, and even if the other pachislot does not satisfy the opening condition, it is considered that the opening condition is satisfied in the other pachislot, and the game information is updated. It is designed to be accumulated.

Further, the opening conditions of "for character A: A" to "for character A: C" in pachislot 1a, the opening conditions of "for character A: A" to "for character A: C" in pachislot 1b, and "for character A: C" in pachislot 1a. Opening conditions for "Character B: A" to "Character B: C" and opening conditions for "Character B: A" to "Character B: C" in pachislot 1b, "Item C" and "Item" in pachislot 1a The opening condition of "D" and the opening condition of "Item C" and "Item D" in the pachislot machine 1b are different conditions. That is, the common data shown in FIG. 157 can be set with different opening conditions. Of course, different opening conditions can be set for the individual data shown in FIG. 157.

In this case, for example, as a condition for releasing specific common data, the number of logins is set to "1" for the model described as pachislot 1a, and the number of logins is set to "5" for the model described as pachislot 1b. Among the same type of opening conditions, it is also possible to set opening conditions that specify different achievement degrees, and in the model described as pachislot 1a, the number of logins is set to "1", and in the model described as pachislot 1b. Can also set different types of opening conditions, such as setting the cumulative number of games played to "1000".

As described above, the common data and the individual data are not limited to the data for customizing the character. For example, the cumulative number of games played (number of games) is used as common data, the number of logins is used as individual data, and the cumulative number of games played (number of games), which is common data, is a certain value or more, and the individual data is used. If the number of logins is equal to or higher than a certain value in each of the model described as the pachislot 1a and the model described as the pachislot 1b, various effects in the game machine of each model, for example, an image effect (image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11). Production by displaying), voice production (production by outputting production sound from speakers 20L, 20R), lamp production (production by lighting headlamp 21 and reel lamp 22, etc.), character production (rotation role) Some of the effects such as (the effect of the object 123) may be performed differently from the usual ones. Specifically, the display mode of the frame display on the display screen (for example, the main screen 111) of the liquid crystal display device 11 may be changed, or the lighting mode of the headlamp 21 may be changed. Further, not only the effect mode at the time of executing such a normal effect may be changed, but also the display mode of the menu screen on the above-mentioned guide menu screen may be changed, for example. These are also examples, and all aspects of changing the effect according to various common data and individual data can be applied to the present embodiment.

In this way, data corresponding to the game information according to the game situation of each player can be transferred to and from the server 200 described later. In the pachislot machine 1, the game information that can be stored in the server 200 described later includes, for example, Unique information (for example, individual data shown in FIG. 157) that is unique information in each model of the model described as pachislot 1a or the model described as pachislot 1b, and the model described as pachislot 1a and the model described as pachislot 1b. Common information (for example, common data shown in FIG. 157), which is common information between the two, can be included.

As a result, for example, when these models are installed in a game store at the same time, the player can change the model to play the game while enjoying the accumulation of the game information, which makes the game itself boring. Without this, the interest in the accumulated game information can be further improved. Further, for example, when these models are installed in a game store at different times, the game information accumulated in the previously installed model is not wasted and continues in the later installed model. Since the game information can be accumulated, the interest in the accumulated game information can be further improved, and the brand power of the game machine having such a relationship can be enhanced.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the common information includes the character used for the effect performed on the model described as the pachi-slot machine 1a and the character used for the effect performed on the model described as the pachi-slot machine 1b. Character-related information related to commonly used characters can be included, and the display mode of the character can be changed by this character-related information. As a result, the content of the production can be changed according to the result of the game that spans a plurality of models, so that the interest in the accumulated game information can be further improved.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the conditions for storing specific information among the common information in the server 200 described later are different between the model described as the pachi-slot machine 1a and the model described as the pachi-slot machine 1b. It is possible to do. As a result, not only the accumulated game information can be standardized, but also the accumulated conditions can be changed, so that the interest in the accumulated game information can be further improved.

Note that, in FIG. 157, as an example of common data and individual data, data related to character customization is described as an example, but the common data and individual data are not limited to this. For example, if the opening condition is related to the cumulative number of times the game has been played, the game information is used as common data, and if the opening condition is related to the cumulative number of times the game has been shifted to the bonus game state, the game information is used as individual data. You can also do it. That is, any game information that can be shared between one model of game machine and another model of game machine can be applied as common data.

Next, data transfer between the pachi-slot machine 1 and the server 200 will be described with reference to FIG. 158. Although not shown, the server 200 manages, for example, a WEB server that controls communication with a player's mobile terminal, a player management server that manages player information, and data corresponding to game information for each model. It is composed of a data management server and so on.

First, when the player wants to restore the game information saved at the end of the previous game (that is, when he / she wants to play the game from the continuation of the previous game regarding the accumulated game information), the player uses the browser or application of his / her mobile terminal. Use to access the server 200 (player access).

At this time, the server 200 authenticates the player with the identification information acquired at the time of access, and then issues a password for restoring the game information, and the password is displayed on the display screen on the player's mobile terminal. The data to be displayed is sent to the player's mobile terminal. The password is an example of restoration information for restoring the accumulated game information in the pachislot machine 1. That is, if the information can be input or read on the pachislot 1 side, other information can be sent as restoration information.

The player inputs the password sent from the server 200 and displayed on his / her mobile terminal in the above-mentioned password display image (password input area 116) (with password input). As a result, in the pachislot machine 1, the login of the player is completed, and the game information is restored to the data at the time of the previous end according to the data indicated by the entered password.

On the other hand, if the player is the first player to play a game on that model (including other models for which common data is set), or if the player wishes to start accumulating new game information, the password is used. Is not entered (no password is entered), and a new login is made based on the touch operation of the above-mentioned Unimemo menu item "Record" by the player. If no operation is performed, the user will not be logged in and the game information will not be updated.

When the game information is restored based on the password entered and the game is started after being logged in or newly logged in (game start), the game information is appropriately determined according to the result of the game. (Including common data, individual data, other game result data, etc.) is updated and stored. The game information updated here may include not only specific information that can be restored by entering a password, but also general information that simply indicates the result of the game.

After that, when the game is ended (game end), the logout is performed based on the touch operation of the above-mentioned Unimemo menu item "Record and end" or the like by the player. Then, the liquid crystal display device 11 displays a two-dimensional code for storing the game information (that is, for storing the game information recorded on the pachislot 1 side in the server 200).

The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 of the pachislot 1 with his / her mobile terminal, and based on the data contained in the read two-dimensional code, the browser, application, etc. of his / her mobile terminal, etc. Access the server 200 using (player access based on a two-dimensional code). The liquid crystal display device 11 of the pachi-slot machine 1 may display, for example, a URL or a password. That is, the information may be any information that can access the server 200.

At this time, the server 200 appropriately updates the game information (including common data, individual data, other game result data, etc.) with the data indicating the game information stored on the pachislot 1 side acquired at the time of access. And accumulate. The game information stored here may be only specific information that can be restored by the sent password.

Then, when the game information to be updated and stored includes common data, the server 200 also updates and stores the game information of another model whose game information can be updated by the common data.

In the present embodiment, the configuration that enables data transfer between the pachi-slot machine 1 and the server 200 by mediating a player's mobile terminal between the pachi-slot machine 1 and the server 200 has been described. The configuration that enables data transfer between the server 200 and the server 200 is not limited to this. For example, when the pachi-slot machine 1 enables direct data communication with the server 200, it may be configured to directly transfer data related to game information without intervening the player's mobile terminal. .. Further, for example, the pachislot 1 cannot communicate with the server 200 in data communication, but another game device (for example, a game display device capable of displaying various information related to the game, or a game medium owned by the player). By making it possible to transfer the data corresponding to the above to and from the pachislot 1, the game media can be managed electromagnetically without physically inputting and paying out the game media in the pachislot 1. When data communication is possible with (device, etc.), data may be exchanged between the pachislot 1 and the server 200 by mediating such another gaming device. In short, the form that enables data transfer between the pachislot machine 1 and the server 200 is not limited to the form of directly transferring data, but also indirectly (that is, via another device). All forms of passing are applicable.

That is, as a game system including a game machine (for example, a pachislot 1) and a server device (for example, a server 200), a game composed of a game machine (for example, a pachislot 1) and a server device (for example, a server 200). It can be a system, or it can be a game system composed of a game machine (for example, Pachislot 1), a server device (for example, a server 200), and a player's mobile terminal, or a game machine (for example, a game machine). It can also be a gaming system composed of a pachislot 1), a server device (for example, a server 200), and another gaming device. That is, in the present embodiment, the invention as a game system can also be configured.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide at least the game machines having the first to nineteenth configurations and the server device having the twentieth configuration shown below.

[Game machines with the first to fourth configurations]
In a conventional game machine, a song to be selectable from a plurality of songs output during the advantageous game state is determined according to the number of games played between advantageous game states that are advantageous to the player, and the determined song is selected. It is known that a player can select a musical piece within the range (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-423).

However, for example, the interest in selecting a song and the speed at which the game progresses differ depending on the player or the time zone during which the game is played. A gaming machine capable of making selections has been desired.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game by enabling selection of a music suitable for a player's taste and situation. And.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following first configuration.

In a gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns to play a game and can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a BB gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A music output means (for example, speakers 20L, 20R) capable of outputting a plurality of music, and
A music selection means (for example, a touch sensor module 31) that allows a player to select a music output during the special gaming state from the plurality of music.
The output content changing means (for example, the touch sensor module 31) that allows the player to change the output content of the music selected from the music selecting means is provided.
The plurality of songs include specific songs, and the plurality of songs include specific songs.
When the specific music is selected by the music selection means, the music output means has a first portion (for example, music No. 1) of the specific music in the special gaming state and a second portion following the music output means. (For example, song No. 2) can be output,
When the specific music is selected by the music selection means, the output content changing means outputs so that the music output means starts output from the second portion of the specific music in the special gaming state. A game machine whose contents can be changed.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following second configuration.

In a gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns to play a game and can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a BB gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A music output means (for example, speakers 20L, 20R) capable of outputting a plurality of music, and
A music selection means (for example, a touch sensor module 31) that allows a player to select a music output during the special gaming state from the plurality of music.
The output content changing means (for example, the touch sensor module 31) that allows the player to change the output content of the music selected from the music selecting means is provided.
The plurality of songs include specific songs, and the plurality of songs include specific songs.
When the specific music is selected by the music selection means, the music output means
When the special condition is satisfied, in the special gaming state, the first part (for example, the first part of the music) and the second part (for example, the second part of the music) in the specific music are inserted. Output and
When the special condition is not satisfied, only the first part of the specific music is output in the special gaming state.
The output content changing means is the case where the specific music is selected by the music selection means, and when the special condition is not satisfied, the music output means is the specific music in the special gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that the output content can be changed so as to start the output from the second part in the above.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following third configuration.

In a gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns to play a game and can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a BB gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A music output means (for example, speakers 20L, 20R) capable of outputting a plurality of music, and
A music selection means (for example, a touch sensor module 31) that allows a player to select a music output during the special gaming state from the plurality of music.
The output content changing means (for example, the touch sensor module 31) that allows the player to change the output content of the music selected from the music selecting means is provided.
The special gaming state is a gaming state that can be continued over a predetermined number of games (for example, 24 times).
The plurality of songs include specific songs, and the plurality of songs include specific songs.
When the specific music is selected by the music selection means, the music output means has a first portion (for example, music No. 1) of the specific music in the special gaming state and a second portion following the music output means. (For example, song No. 2) can be output,
The first part of the specific music is a time longer than the minimum time required to perform one game (for example, 4.1 seconds) multiplied by the predetermined number of times (for example, 150 seconds). Is set to
When the specific music is selected by the music selection means, the output content changing means outputs so that the music output means starts output from the second portion of the specific music in the special gaming state. A game machine whose contents can be changed.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fourth configuration.

In a gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns to play a game and can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a BB gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A music output means (for example, speakers 20L, 20R) capable of outputting a plurality of music, and
A music selection means (for example, a touch sensor module 31) that allows a player to select a music output during the special gaming state from the plurality of music.
The output content changing means (for example, the touch sensor module 31) that allows the player to change the output content of the music selected from the music selecting means is provided.
The special gaming state is a gaming state that can be continued over a predetermined number of games (for example, 24 times).
The music selection means can select a music when the special gaming state is started.
The plurality of songs include specific songs, and the plurality of songs include specific songs.
When the specific music is selected by the music selection means, the music output means has a first portion (for example, music No. 1) of the specific music in the special gaming state and a second portion following the music output means. (For example, song No. 2) can be output,
When the specific music is selected by the music selection means and the special condition is satisfied during the special gaming state, the output content changing means means that the music output means is the second in the specific music. A game machine characterized in that the output content can be changed so as to output a part.

Further, in the gaming machine having the fourth configuration, the output content changing means is such that when the specific music is selected by the music selection means, the music output means starts the special game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the output content can be changed so that the output starts from the second part of the specific music.

In the gaming machines having the first to fourth configurations, not only can the player select a desired music, but also the output content can be changed so that the selected music is output from a desired location. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by making it possible to select a song that matches the taste and situation of the person.

Further, in the gaming machine having the second configuration, the second part (for example, the second part) of the music which cannot be normally heard can be heard by performing the output content changing operation. As a result, the significance of changing the output content of the music can be further enhanced, and thus the interest in selecting the music can be further improved.

Further, in the game machine having the third configuration, when the output content change operation is performed, the second part (for example, the second part) of the music can be heard immediately, so that the game is to be digested as soon as possible. Even if the player has the desired taste, or the player who is in a situation where such a need is urgent, the interest in music selection is prevented from diminishing, and the interest in music selection is improved. Can be made to.

Further, in the gaming machine having the fourth configuration, normally, the output content changing operation cannot be performed, but when the special condition is satisfied, the output content changing operation is performed even in the middle of the special game state. You will be able to. As a result, it is possible to add new playability related to music selection during the special gaming state. Further, for example, when it is possible to perform the output content change operation even when the special game state starts, the player who has forgotten to perform the output content change operation may enjoy the music selection. It is possible to prevent the decline.

[Game machine with 5th to 8th configurations]
In the conventional game machine, the setting is set by performing the first effect control if the winning probability of the predetermined combination in the predetermined period is equal to or less than the predetermined value, and performing the second effect control if it is not equal to or less than the predetermined value. It is known that the value can be inferred (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-106477).

In the gaming machine shown in JP-A-2009-106477, the winning probability of a predetermined combination increases as the set value increases. Therefore, when the second effect control is performed, the game is played. One comes to expect a lot of benefits.

By the way, a high set value is an advantageous state for the player side, but is likely to suffer a disadvantage for the game store side. Therefore, if a game store tries to secure a certain level of profit, it is unlikely that a high setting value will always be set for all the installed game machines.

Therefore, assuming that the effect control is different depending on whether the set value is high or low, the player's willingness to play is diminished when the effect control presumed to be low is performed. In addition, as a result, the operation of the game machine is reduced, and there is a problem that the game store cannot secure profits.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the motivation to play while balancing the interests between the player and the game store. To do.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fifth configuration.

In a gaming machine (for example, pachislot machine 1) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns to play a game.
With a setting value setting means (for example, main CPU 93) capable of setting one setting value among a plurality of setting values (for example, settings "1" to "6") for different degrees of advantage of the player. ,
A special state determining means (for example, sub CPU 102) that determines whether or not to set a special state as a state in which the effect is controlled based on the set value set by the set value setting means.
When the special state determining means determines to set the special state, the special state controlling means (for example, sub CPU 102) capable of controlling the special state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied is provided.
The special state determining means sets the special state when a specific set value (for example, setting "6") having a relatively high degree of advantage to the player is set by the set value setting means. Make it decidable,
The special state is a state in which the special effect can be executed or the special effect is likely to be executed.
The game is characterized in that the predetermined end condition is satisfied when a predetermined period (for example, 72 hours) elapses after the special state determining means determines to set the special state. Machine.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following sixth configuration.

In a gaming machine (for example, pachislot machine 1) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns to play a game.
With a setting value setting means (for example, main CPU 93) capable of setting one setting value among a plurality of setting values (for example, settings "1" to "6") for different degrees of advantage of the player. ,
A special state determining means (for example, sub CPU 102) that determines whether or not to set a special state as a state in which the effect is controlled based on the set value set by the set value setting means.
When the special state determining means determines to set the special state, the special state controlling means (for example, sub CPU 102) capable of controlling the special state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied is provided.
The special state determining means sets the special state when a specific set value (for example, setting "6") having a relatively high degree of advantage to the player is set by the set value setting means. Make it decidable,
The special state is a state in which the special effect can be executed or the special effect is likely to be executed.
The predetermined end condition is satisfied when the period from which the time counting is started from the time when the special state determination means determines to set the special state becomes a predetermined period (for example, 72 hours). And
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined period is set to a period during which the special state can be continued over a plurality of different business days in a game store.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following seventh configuration.

In a gaming machine (for example, pachislot machine 1) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns to play a game.
With a setting value setting means (for example, main CPU 93) capable of setting one setting value among a plurality of setting values (for example, settings "1" to "6") for different degrees of advantage of the player. ,
A special state determining means (for example, sub CPU 102) that determines whether or not to set a special state as a state in which the effect is controlled based on the set value set by the set value setting means.
When the special state determining means determines to set the special state, the special state controlling means (for example, sub CPU 102) capable of controlling the special state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied is provided.
The special state determining means sets the special state when a specific set value (for example, setting "6") having a relatively high degree of advantage to the player is set by the set value setting means. Make it decidable,
The special state is a state in which the special effect can be executed or the special effect is likely to be executed.
The predetermined end condition is satisfied when the period from which the time counting is started from the time when the special state determination means determines to set the special state becomes a predetermined period (for example, 72 hours). And
The predetermined period is set to a period during which the special state can be continued across a plurality of different business days in the amusement store.
When the special state control means is controlled to the special state and the condition for determining the special state to be set by the special state determining means is satisfied, the special state control means again clocks the predetermined period. A game machine characterized by starting from the beginning.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following eighth configuration.

In a gaming machine (for example, pachislot machine 1) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns to play a game.
With a setting value setting means (for example, main CPU 93) capable of setting one setting value among a plurality of setting values (for example, settings "1" to "6") for different degrees of advantage of the player. ,
A special state determining means (for example, sub CPU 102) that determines whether or not to set a special state as a state in which the effect is controlled based on the set value set by the set value setting means.
When the special state determining means determines to set the special state, the special state controlling means (for example, sub CPU 102) capable of controlling the special state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied is provided.
The special state determining means is a case where a specific setting value (for example, setting "6") having a relatively high degree of advantage to the player is set by the setting value setting means, and the specific setting When a game is played for a specific period (for example, 1000 times) with a value set, it is possible to decide to set the special state.
The special state is a state in which the special effect can be executed or the special effect is likely to be executed.
The game is characterized in that the predetermined end condition is satisfied when a predetermined period (for example, 72 hours) elapses after the special state determining means determines to set the special state. Machine.

In the gaming machines having the fifth to eighth configurations, the player may be able to grasp the setting status of the set value in a predetermined period (for example, a plurality of business days in a game store), and when a special effect is executed. Since there is a possibility that an advantageous set value is set in the game machine in which the player is playing the game, the player will play the game with a sense of expectation. In addition, since the special state can be continued for a predetermined period (for example, across a plurality of business days of the game store), the game store can set the set value with sharpness, and it is possible to set an appropriate profit. Can be secured. That is, it is possible to improve the motivation to play while balancing the profits between the player and the game store.

Further, in the gaming machines having the sixth and seventh configurations, when it is decided to set the special state, the time counting until the end of the special state is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution time of the special effect from being biased, and it is possible to manage the period during which the special state continues more accurately, so that both the player and the amusement shop can control the effect equally. It can be carried out.

Further, in the gaming machine having the seventh configuration, when it is decided to set the special state, the time until the special state is ended may be started, and then the special state may be set further. When the determined condition is met, the timekeeping of the time is restarted from the beginning. That is, the time until the special state is terminated is overwritten. As a result, the player may be able to more accurately grasp the setting status of the set value on a plurality of business days in the game store, for example, when the special state continues for more than a predetermined period. You can improve your motivation. Further, in order to grasp such a setting situation, the player needs to visit the game machine store frequently, so that the operation of the game machine can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation to play for a longer period of time while balancing the interests between the player and the game store.

Further, in the gaming machine having the eighth configuration, a specific set value is set, and when a game is played for a specific period, the game is controlled to a specific state. As a result, for example, a specific setting value is set once only for the game store to control to a specific state, and then a setting value having a lower degree of advantage than the specific setting value is set when the player plays a game. It is possible to prevent acts such as playing a game. Therefore, even when a special state that can be continued for a predetermined period (for example, across a plurality of business days of the game store) is provided, it is possible to perform equitable production control for both the player and the game store.

[Game machines with 9th to 16th configurations]
It is known that in a conventional game machine, a password associated with game history data is issued, and when the password issued via the touch panel is input, a message corresponding to the game history data can be displayed. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-131985).

By the way, in such a game machine, the password input is not the main content of the game, so the password is input by touching the keyboard displayed on a specific screen or operating the cross key or the like. It is usually done.

Therefore, it has been desired to devise a method for improving the convenience of inputting characters such as passwords.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving convenience regarding character input.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following ninth configuration.

A gaming machine configured to play a game by varyingly displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and inputting a character string (for example, a password) related to predetermined information by an input operation on a touch panel (for example, a touch input unit 31a). (For example, pachislot 1)
The touch panel has
A character input area (for example, password input area 116) in which characters of a predetermined number of characters (for example, 12 characters) can be sequentially input, and
A keyboard display area (for example, keyboard display area 117) in which characters to be input to the character input area can be specified can be displayed.
In the character input area, when a touch operation is performed on any area in the non-input area where no character is input, it is possible to control the state in which the first character in the non-input area can be input. A game machine characterized by the fact that

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following tenth configuration.

A gaming machine configured to play a game by varyingly displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and inputting a character string (for example, a password) related to predetermined information by an input operation on a touch panel (for example, a touch input unit 31a). (For example, pachislot 1)
The touch panel has
A character input area (for example, password input area 116) in which characters of a predetermined number of characters (for example, 12 characters) can be sequentially input, and
A keyboard display area (for example, keyboard display area 117) in which characters to be input to the character input area can be specified can be displayed.
In the character input area
When a touch operation is performed on any area in the non-input area where no character has been input, it is possible to control the state so that the first character in the non-input area can be input.
When a touch operation is performed on the input area where characters are input, it is possible to control only the character corresponding to the part where the touch operation is performed so that it can be changed. Game machine.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following eleventh configuration.

A gaming machine configured to play a game by varyingly displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and inputting a character string (for example, a password) related to predetermined information by an input operation on a touch panel (for example, a touch input unit 31a). (For example, pachislot 1)
The touch panel has
A character input area (for example, password input area 116) in which characters of a predetermined number of characters (for example, 12 characters) can be sequentially input, and
A keyboard display area (for example, keyboard display area 117) in which characters to be input to the character input area can be specified, and
A decision operation input area (for example, a decision operation input area in the intention operation input area 118) in which a player's decision operation can be input can be displayed.
The character string is always composed of the predetermined number of characters regardless of the amount of information.
In the character input area, when a touch operation is performed on any area in the non-input area where no character is input, it is possible to control the state in which the first character in the non-input area can be input. age,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the determination operation input area, when the characters of the predetermined number of characters are not input in the character input area, the determination operation is not controlled so as to be inputtable.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following twelfth configuration.

A plurality of symbols are displayed in a plurality of columns in a variable manner to play a game, and a password related to the effect can be input by an input operation on a touch panel (for example, a touch input unit 31a). In a game machine (for example, Pachislot 1) configured to be able to transfer data corresponding to game information according to the game situation to and from a server (for example, server 200).
The touch panel has
A password input area (for example, password input area 116) in which a password having a predetermined number of characters (for example, 12 characters) can be sequentially input, and
A keyboard display area (for example, keyboard display area 117) in which characters to be input in the password input area can be specified can be displayed.
In the password input area, when a touch operation is performed on any area in the non-input area where no character is input, it is possible to control the state so that the first character in the non-input area can be input. age,
The game information is
As unique information in the model of the game machine, unique information (for example, individual data) that can be stored in the server and
A gaming machine characterized in that common information (for example, common data) that can be stored in the server is included as common information between the model of the gaming machine and a model different from the model of the gaming machine.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following thirteenth configuration.

A gaming machine configured to play a game by varyingly displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and inputting a character string (for example, a password) related to predetermined information by an input operation on a touch panel (for example, a touch input unit 31a). (For example, pachislot 1)
The touch panel has
A character input area (for example, password input area 116) in which characters of a predetermined number of characters (for example, 12 characters) can be sequentially input, and
A keyboard display area (for example, keyboard display area 117) in which characters to be input to the character input area can be specified can be displayed.
In the character input area
When the keyboard display area is designated by the player, the head area of the non-input area in which no character is input in the character input area is displayed in the first display mode.
When the character input area is designated by the player, the game machine is characterized in that the head area of the non-input area is displayed in the second display mode.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fourteenth configuration.

A gaming machine configured to play a game by varyingly displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and inputting a character string (for example, a password) related to predetermined information by an input operation on a touch panel (for example, a touch input unit 31a). (For example, pachislot 1)
The touch panel has
A character input area (for example, password input area 116) in which characters of a predetermined number of characters (for example, 12 characters) can be sequentially input, and
A keyboard display area (for example, keyboard display area 117) in which characters to be input to the character input area can be specified can be displayed.
In the character input area
When the keyboard display area is designated by the player, the head area of the non-input area in which no character is input in the character input area is displayed in the first display mode.
When the character input area is designated by the player, the head area of the non-input area is displayed in the second display mode.
When a touch operation is performed on the input area where characters are input, it is possible to control only the character corresponding to the part where the touch operation is performed so that it can be changed. Game machine.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fifteenth configuration.

A gaming machine configured to play a game by varyingly displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and inputting a character string (for example, a password) related to predetermined information by an input operation on a touch panel (for example, a touch input unit 31a). (For example, pachislot 1)
The touch panel has
A character input area (for example, password input area 116) in which characters of a predetermined number of characters (for example, 12 characters) can be sequentially input, and
A keyboard display area (for example, keyboard display area 117) in which characters to be input to the character input area can be specified, and
A decision operation input area (for example, a decision operation input area in the intention operation input area 118) in which a player's decision operation can be input can be displayed.
The character string is always composed of the predetermined number of characters regardless of the amount of information.
In the character input area
When the keyboard display area is designated by the player, the head area of the non-input area in which no character is input in the character input area is displayed in the first display mode.
When the character input area is designated by the player, the head area of the non-input area is displayed in the second display mode.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the determination operation input area, when the characters of the predetermined number of characters are not input in the character input area, the determination operation is not controlled so as to be inputtable.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following 16th configuration.

A plurality of symbols are displayed in a plurality of columns in a variable manner to play a game, and a password related to the effect can be input by an input operation on a touch panel (for example, a touch input unit 31a). In a game machine (for example, Pachislot 1) configured to be able to transfer data corresponding to game information according to the game situation to and from a server (for example, server 200).
The touch panel has
A password input area (for example, password input area 116) in which a password having a predetermined number of characters (for example, 12 characters) can be sequentially input, and
A keyboard display area (for example, keyboard display area 117) in which characters to be input in the password input area can be specified can be displayed.
In the password input area
When the keyboard display area is designated by the player, the head area of the non-input area in which no character is input in the password input area is displayed in the first display mode.
When the password input area is specified by the player, the head area of the non-input area is displayed in the second display mode.
The game information is
As unique information in the model of the game machine, unique information (for example, individual data) that can be stored in the server and
A gaming machine characterized in that common information (for example, common data) that can be stored in the server is included as common information between the model of the gaming machine and a model different from the model of the gaming machine.

In the game machines having the ninth to twelfth configurations, when the player tries to input a character string (for example, a password) in the middle of input from the continuation, the player purposely moves the cursor to the first place in the non-input area. , Input can be resumed immediately by touching the non-input area without performing a strict touch operation on the first part in the non-input area. As a result, it is possible to devise a device that makes it difficult for the player to feel annoyance regarding character input, and it is possible to improve the convenience of character input.

Further, in the gaming machines having the thirteenth to sixteenth configurations, the display mode is changed depending on whether or not characters and symbols can be input immediately while indicating the head area in the non-input area. There is. As a result, it is possible to devise a way to display the input state of the character string (for example, a password) to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to improve the convenience of character input.

Further, in the game machines having the tenth and fourteenth configurations, when the player wants to change the character or symbol of the input character string (for example, password), he / she touches the part where the character or symbol to be changed is displayed. , You can change the input contents immediately by re-entering characters and symbols. As a result, when it becomes necessary to change the input content, for example, when there is an error in the input content of the character string (for example, the password), a device is made to make the player less annoyed. It is possible to improve the convenience of character input.

Further, in the game machines having the eleventh and fifteenth configurations, for example, when the player forgets one character to be input, the input content of the character string (for example, the password) is incorrect. Can be immediately recognized by the player, so that the player can be prevented from being confused and wasting unnecessary time, and the convenience regarding character input can be improved.

Further, in the game machines having the twelfth and sixteenth configurations, for example, when a plurality of types of game machines of different models are installed in a game store at the same time, the player enjoys accumulating game information and plays a game. Since it is possible to change the model in which the game is played, it is possible to further improve the interest in the accumulated game information without getting tired of the game itself. Further, for example, when a plurality of types of game machines of different models are installed in a game store at different times, the game information accumulated in the previously installed model is not wasted and is installed later. Since the game information can be continuously accumulated even in the model, it is possible to further improve the interest in the accumulated game information and to enhance the brand power of the game machine having such a relationship. That is, it is possible to further improve the interest in entering a password regarding the accumulation of game information.

[Game machines of the 17th to 19th configurations and server devices of the 20th configuration]
In a conventional game machine, an information code including game history information indicating a player's game result and player's identification information is generated and displayed, and the player shoots this with a camera such as a mobile phone. It is known that the server can be accessed and the game result-related information can be accumulated on the server side (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-125220).

However, since the game information accumulated in this way is exclusively information that depends on the model of the game machine, for example, if the model disappears from the game store due to a replacement of the model, etc., after that, There was a problem that the game information could not be updated and the accumulated game information was lost.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine and a server device capable of further improving the interest in the accumulated game information.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following 17th configuration.

A game is played by displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns in a variable manner, and data corresponding to game information according to the game situation of each player can be exchanged with a server (for example, a server 200). In a game machine (for example, pachislot 1)
The game information is
As unique information in the model of the game machine, unique information (for example, individual data) that can be stored in the server and
A gaming machine characterized in that common information (for example, common data) that can be stored in the server is included as common information between the model of the gaming machine and a model different from the model of the gaming machine.

Further, the game machine having the seventeenth configuration is provided with an effect changing means capable of changing the effect performed on the model of the game machine according to the unique information and the common information.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following eighteenth configuration.

A game is played by displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns in a variable manner, and data corresponding to game information according to the game situation of each player can be exchanged with a server (for example, a server 200). In a game machine (for example, pachislot 1)
The game information is
As unique information in the model of the game machine, unique information (for example, individual data) that can be stored in the server and
As common information between the model of the game machine and a model different from the model of the game machine, common information (for example, common data) that can be stored in the server is included.
The common information is related to a character that is commonly used between a character used for an effect performed on the model of the game machine and a character used for an effect performed on a model different from the model of the game machine. A gaming machine characterized by containing information related to a character to be played.

Further, the game machine having the eighteenth configuration is characterized by being provided with a display mode changing means capable of changing the display mode of the character used for the effect performed on the model of the game machine based on the character-related information. A game machine to play.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following 19th configuration.

A game is played by displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns in a variable manner, and data corresponding to game information according to the game situation of each player can be exchanged with a server (for example, a server 200). In a game machine (for example, pachislot 1)
The game information is
As unique information in the model of the game machine, unique information (for example, individual data) that can be stored in the server and
As common information between the model of the game machine and a model different from the model of the game machine, common information (for example, common data) that can be stored in the server is included.
The common information includes specific information (for example, common data about a specific costume, common data about a specific item).
A gaming machine characterized in that the conditions for storing the specific information in the server can be different between the model of the gaming machine and a model different from the model of the gaming machine.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the server device of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a server device having the following 20th configuration.

For a plurality of types of gaming machines of different models (for example, pachislot 1a and pachislot 1b), game information according to the game situation of each player can be acquired and stored, and is stored by access from the player. In a server device (for example, a server 200) configured to be able to send out restoration information for restoring the game information in the game machine.
The game information is
Unique information (for example, individual data) accumulated as unique information in one model of gaming machine,
Including common information (for example, common data) accumulated as common information among a plurality of types of gaming machines,
When the game information is restored in the game machine of the one model, the server is characterized by transmitting the restoration information including the unique information corresponding to the game machine of the one model and the common information. apparatus.

Further, in the server device having the twentieth configuration, the common information is used for the character used for the effect performed on the game machine of the one model and the effect performed on the game machine of a model different from the one model. A server device including character-related information related to a commonly used character.

Further, in the server device having the twentieth configuration, the common information includes specific information, and the condition for accumulating the specific information is that the game machine of the one model and the game machine of a model different from the one model. A server device characterized in that different conditions can be met with.

In the game machines of the 17th to 19th configurations and the server device of the 20th configuration, for example, when a plurality of types of game machines of different models are installed in the game store at the same time, the player can obtain the game information. Since it is possible to change the model in which the game is played while enjoying the accumulation of the game, it is possible to further improve the interest in the accumulated game information without getting tired of the game itself. Further, for example, when a plurality of types of game machines of different models are installed in a game store at different times, the game information accumulated in the previously installed model is not wasted and is installed later. Since the game information can be continuously accumulated even in the model, it is possible to further improve the interest in the accumulated game information and to enhance the brand power of the game machine having such a relationship.

Further, in the game machine having the 18th configuration and the server device having the 20th configuration, the common information includes the character used for the production performed in the game machine of one model and the game machine of the other model. Character-related information related to a character commonly used can be included with the character used for the production, and the display mode of the character can be changed by this character-related information. As a result, the content of the production can be changed according to the result of the game that spans a plurality of models, so that the interest in the accumulated game information can be further improved. The same applies to the gaming machine having the 17th configuration.

Further, in the game machine having the 19th configuration and the server device having the 20th configuration, the condition that the specific information among the common information is stored in the server device is one model of the game machine and another model of the game machine. It is possible to make different conditions with and. As a result, not only the accumulated game information can be standardized, but also the accumulated conditions can be changed, so that the interest in the accumulated game information can be further improved.

Further, in addition to the above-mentioned ones, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a game machine that exhibits the other first to seventh actions and effects shown below.

[Other first action effect]
In the present embodiment, the pullback is performed in the ART pullback process by performing the above-mentioned ART in-process (see FIG. 105), ART pullback process (FIG. 107), and display command reception time process (see FIG. 116). After that, in the game performed until the predetermined winning number for which the stop order is notified is won, as long as the stop operation is performed by pressing forward ("left middle right" and "left and right middle"), the sub of the sub control circuit 101 The CPU 102 does not subtract the value of the ART game number counter (see S614 in FIG. 107, S808 in FIG. 116, S584 in FIG. 105, and S585). Even in a game in which the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted, the sub CPU 102 performs an additional game number lottery (S583 during ART processing shown in FIG. 105) for each game.
In addition, in the game performed between the pullback in the ART pullback process and the winning of the predetermined winning number in which the stop order is notified (hereinafter, may be referred to as "navigation"), other than the forward push. When the stop operation is performed in the stop order of, the value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game from the next game of the game in which the stop operation is performed in the stop order other than the forward push (Fig.). See S614 of 107, S808 of FIG. 116, and S584 and S585 of FIG. 105).

Therefore, when the stop operation is not performed by pressing forward between navigations, the value of the ART game number counter becomes "0" earlier than when the stop operation is performed by pressing forward. Therefore, the number of times the number of additional games is drawn is reduced. That is, when the stop operation is not performed in the predetermined stop order between the navigation systems, the chance of adding the number of games to the ART game counter can be reduced as compared with the case where the stop operation is performed in the predetermined stop order. it can. Therefore, a penalty can be generated when the stop operations are not performed in a predetermined stop order between navigations.

Further, "50" is set in the ART game number counter regardless of whether or not the stop operation is performed in the predetermined stop order between the navigation systems (see S612 in FIG. 107). That is, the number of games staying in the second ART is guaranteed to be at least "50". Therefore, an excessive penalty is not imposed on the player who unintentionally performs the stop operation in a stop order different from the forward push. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, when the stop operation is performed in the stop order other than the forward push in the game performed between the navigations, the game is started from the next game of the game in which the stop operation is performed in the stop order other than the forward push. The mode in which the value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game has been described. However, instead of this, the value of the ART game number counter may be subtracted by "1" for each game from the game in which the stop operation is performed in the stop order other than the forward push. In this case, a process of subtracting "1" from the value of the ART game number counter similar to that of S585 in the ART process (see FIG. 105) is added between S809 and S810 of the display command reception process (see FIG. 116). ..

[Other second action effect]
Further, in the present embodiment, when the stop operation is performed in a stop order different from the notified stop order and an assist state different from the selected assist state occurs, that is, the sub-game state is in the pseudo bonus and is pseudo. When the bonus penalty flag (see FIG. 77, set to on in S819 of the penalty determination process shown in FIG. 117) is on, in S917 of the lamp control task (see FIG. 121), the reel lamp 22 in the lamp effect sequence data is set. The lamp pattern data is changed to a full lighting pattern that lights without blinking. Therefore, it is possible to make the person who sees the pachislot 1 recognize that the stop operation has been performed in a stop order different from the notified stop order. That is, in the game during the first ART (pseudo-bonus), when the reel lamp 22 is lit without blinking when the display command is received, the person who sees the pachislot 1 has a stop order different from the notified stop order. It is possible to recognize that the stop operation has been performed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the mode in which the sub CPU 102 changes the lamp pattern data related to the reel lamp 22 to the full lighting pattern has been described. However, the mode of changing the lamp data related to the reel lamp 22 is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily set within a range distinguishable from the case of lighting with the lamp pattern data before the change. For example, the sub CPU 102 may change the lamp pattern data of the reel lamp 22 to a total extinguishing pattern that turns off the lamp pattern data without turning it on. Further, the lamp pattern data related to the change is not limited to the lamp pattern data related to the reel lamp 22 when the display command is received (third stop operation is off). For example, the lamp pattern data related to the headlamp 21 may be changed. Further, for example, the lamp pattern data may be changed not only when the display command is received but also in all the effects during the first ART.

[Other third action effect]
Further, in the present embodiment, in the accessory control task (see FIG. 120), when the accessory pattern data instructing the operation of the accessory control board 78 is the interlocking accessory pattern data, the sub CPU 102 indicates the lamp state information. , An operation start request or an operation end request is added (entry) to the sound reproduction state information and the animation reproduction state information (S907). Further, when the lamp status information includes an operation start request or an operation end request in the lamp control task (see FIG. 121), the sub CPU 102 starts or ends the effect related to the interlocking lamp pattern data, that is, heads with the interlocking lamp pattern data. The LED control board 72 is instructed to turn on or end the lighting of the lamp 21, the reel lamp 22, and the like (S919). Further, when the sound reproduction state information includes an operation start request or an operation end request in the sound control task (see FIG. 122), the sub CPU 102 starts or ends the effect related to the interlocking sound pattern data, that is, the interlocking sound pattern data. The sound board 71 is instructed to output the effect sound from the speakers 20L and 20R or to stop (end) the output (S936). Further, when the animation playback state information includes an operation start request or an operation end request in the animation control task (see FIG. 123), the sub CPU 102 starts or ends the effect related to the interlocking animation pattern data, that is, the interlocking animation pattern data. The liquid crystal display device 11 is instructed to display the image or to stop (end) the display of the image (S946). Therefore, image effect (effect by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 11), sound effect (effect by outputting the effect sound from the speakers 20L and 20R), lamp effect (effect by lighting the headlamp 21 and reel lamp 22 and the like). It is possible to synchronize the start timing and the end timing of the effect (effect by making the speaker) and the accessory effect (effect by the rotating accessory 123).

When synchronizing the start timing and end timing of all image effects, voice effects, lamp effects, and character effects, all animation pattern data should be linked animation pattern data, and all sound pattern data should be linked sound pattern data. Then, all the lamp pattern data may be converted into the interlocking lamp pattern data, and all the accessory pattern data may be converted into the interlocking accessory pattern data.

[Other fourth action / effect]
Further, in the present embodiment, in the sound control task (see FIG. 122), when the sound pattern data related to the instruction to the sound board 71 is the sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence related to the effect of displaying the bonus confirmation screen. The sub CPU 102 adds the marker data defined in the sound effect sequence to the sound reproduction state information at predetermined time intervals (S938). Further, in the animation control task (see FIG. 123), when the set animation effect sequence data is a bonus final effect sequence, the sub CPU 102 acquires the sound reproduction state information stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. (S948). Then, when the acquired sound reproduction state information includes marker data, the sub CPU 102 reproduces the divided moving image data corresponding to the marker data (displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11). Therefore, even when the image effect and the sound effect are complicated, it is possible to prevent the image effect and the sound effect from being out of sync with each other in the middle of the effect.

The length of the divided moving image data (length of the moving image) can be arbitrarily set. For example, as described above, when the divided moving image data 0 to 4 are created by dividing the moving image data for 5 seconds into 5, the length of the first divided moving image data 0 is 0.5 seconds, and the subsequent divided moving image data. The length of 1 may be set to 1.5 seconds, and the length of the divided moving image data 2 may be set to 2 seconds. Further, the number of divided moving image data to be generated by dividing from a series of moving image data can be arbitrarily set. For example, the divided moving image data may be generated by dividing the moving image data for 5 seconds into 10 every 0.5 seconds. Further, the number of marker data and the timing of adding the marker data in the sound control task (see FIG. 122) to the sound reproduction state information are set so as to correspond to the number and length of the generated divided moving image data.

Further, in the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the image effect based on the above-mentioned marker data and the sound effect are synchronized (hereinafter, marker data interlocking) is described when the effect of displaying the bonus confirmation screen is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and marker data may be linked at the time of other effects.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the accessory control task (see FIG. 120), synchronization of the effect by adding the operation start request or the operation end request to the sound reproduction state information, the animation reproduction state information, and the lamp state information, and the marker data. The mode in which both interlocking is performed has been described. However, instead of this, only one of them may be performed. For example, when only the marker data interlocking is performed, when the marker data corresponding to the first divided moving image data is set and the marker data is instructed to the sound board 71 related to the sound pattern data constituting the sound production sequence. It may be added to the sound reproduction state information. Then, when the acquired sound reproduction state information includes marker data corresponding to the first divided moving image data, the sub CPU 102 may reproduce the first divided moving image data corresponding to the marker data. In this way, the start timings of the audio effect and the image effect can be synchronized by interlocking with the marker data.

[Other fifth action / effect]
Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the sub CPU 102 executes the OFF edge execution to detect the selection when the finger is released from the touch input unit 31a. Therefore, even if a player or the like touches a finger outside the position corresponding to the desired item on the touch input unit 31a when selecting an item displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the desired item is not released. If the finger is moved to the position corresponding to the item to be performed and then the finger is released, the sub CPU 102 can detect the item desired by the player or the like as the selected item.

In this embodiment, the mode in which the sub CPU 102 executes the OFF edge when the screen related to the above-mentioned mobile terminal cooperation function (see FIGS. 135 to 141) is displayed on the sub screen 113 has been described. .. However, the trigger for the sub CPU 102 to execute the OFF edge can be arbitrarily set. For example, the OFF edge execution may be performed only when a predetermined screen is displayed on the sub screen 113, and the ON edge execution may be performed at other times. For example, compared to the guide menu screen (see FIG. 135) and the uni-memo menu screen (see FIG. 138), the button-shaped menu items ("0" to "9" and "A" to "A" in the password input menu) are relatively small. The sub CPU 102 may execute the OFF edge only when the password input menu screen (FIG. 139) in which "F") is displayed is displayed.

Further, the sub CPU 102 may execute the OFF edge execution only for the items of the predetermined menu, and may execute the ON edge execution only for the items of the other menus. For example, OFF edge execution is performed only for "0" to "9" and "A" to "F" of the password input menu, which are relatively small button-shaped menu items on the password input menu screen (Fig. 139), and others. ON edge execution may be performed for the items of the menu of "Enter", "Delete", "Return to game" and "Return".

Further, it may be set whether or not to execute the OFF edge according to the type of the screen displayed on the sub screen 113. For example, when the screen related to the mobile terminal cooperation function is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the OFF edge execution is performed, and when the screen related to the effect during the game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the ON edge execution is performed. You may go.

[Other sixth action / effect]
Further, in the present embodiment, in S983 of the touch panel input editing process (see FIG. 125), when the operation command continuous counter exceeds 288000, the sub CPU 102 sets the error code “TP LONG ON” in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. To record. Further, the sub CPU 102 displays a warning screen (see FIG. 126) on the main screen 111 for 3 minutes. Then, after 3 minutes have passed after displaying the warning screen on the main screen 111, the sub CPU 102 displays the screen displayed before the warning screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 so that the game can be restarted. Further, the error code recorded in the sub RAM 103 can be referred to on the error information history screen (see FIG. 130) displayed on the main screen 111 in the error information history processing (S1009) in the hall menu processing (see FIG. 129). .. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the output of the signal indicating that the touch input unit 31a is being operated continues for a predetermined time, and it is possible to suppress the prolongation of the period during which the game cannot be played.

The threshold value (288000 in this embodiment) of the operation command continuous counter in the touch panel input editing process (see FIG. 125) can be arbitrarily set. When displaying a warning when the touch operation command or flick operation command is included in the data transmitted from the touch sensor relay board 73 for 2 hours, the threshold value of the operation command continuous counter can be set to 144000. Good. Further, when the touch sensor relay board 73 transmits data every 100 msec, and when the touch operation command or the flick operation command is included in the data transmitted from the touch sensor relay board 73 for 4 hours. When displaying a warning or the like, the threshold value of the operation command continuous counter may be set to 144000.

[Other seventh action / effect]
Further, in the present embodiment, in the maintenance process (see FIG. 131), the sub CPU 102 displays the grid line G (see FIGS. 132 and 134) on the touch panel maintenance screen 115. Further, when the finger moves while maintaining the state of touching the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 is arranged at a position where the intersection of the grid lines G always corresponds to the position where the finger is touching the touch input unit 31a. As described above, the display position of the grid line G is changed in synchronization with the movement of the finger. Therefore, it is possible to recognize whether or not the position of the intersection of the grid lines G displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 and the position where the finger touches the touch input unit 31a are deviated from each other, so that the gaming machine can perform touch input. It is possible to confirm whether or not the position where the finger touches the portion 31a is accurately recognized. In addition, it is possible to visually check whether or not there is a deviation between the operating state of the touch input unit 31a and the mounting position.

In the present embodiment, when the touch panel maintenance screen 115 is displayed, the grid line G is displayed so that the intersection is arranged at the initial position even when the touch input unit 31a is not touched by a finger. However, instead of this, the grid line G may be displayed on the touch panel maintenance screen 115 only when it is detected that the touch input unit 31a is touched by a finger.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the finger is separated from the touch input unit 31a after changing the display position of the grid line G, the sub CPU 102 performs the grid line so that the intersection of the grid line G is arranged at the above-mentioned initial position. The mode of changing the display position of G has been described. However, instead of this, in the same case, in the sub CPU 102, the intersection of the grid lines G is arranged at a position where the finger is separated from the touch input unit 31a, that is, a position corresponding to the position where the finger was last touched. The state may be maintained.

[Extensibility of other game machines according to the present embodiment]
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player's medal insertion operation (that is, the operation of inserting a hand-held medal into the medal insertion slot 13 or the credited medal is inserted into the MAX bet button 14 or the 1-bet button 15). If the game is started by (operation of operating and inserting) and the medal is paid out when the game is finished, the hopper device 43 is driven to pay out the medal from the medal payout outlet 18, or credit. The form to be used has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the present invention is applied to all forms in which a game medium necessary for a game is input by a player, a game is performed based on the game, and a privilege is given (for example, a medal is paid out) based on the result of the game. be able to. That is, not only the game medium is input (hanged) and the game medium is paid out by the physical movement of the player, but also the main control circuit 91 (main control board 41) itself is the game medium owned by the player. May be electronically managed to enable the game without medals. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is mounted (connected) to the main control circuit 91 (main control board 41) and manages the game medium to electromagnetically manage the game medium owned by the player. ..

In this case, the game media management device has a ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the game machine, and is bidirectionally communicated with an external game medium handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface. It is connected so that it can be connected, and a prize is awarded for the operation of lending the game medium (that is, the operation of providing the game medium necessary for the player to perform the operation of inserting the game medium) or the role of paying out the game medium ( When the combination is established), the game medium payout operation (that is, the action of making the player acquire the game medium necessary for paying out the game medium), or the game medium to be used for the game. It suffices that the operation of recording electromagnetically can be performed. Further, the game media management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media possessed on the front surface of the pachislot machine 1, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media. A number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device. That is, the game media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and the player. In addition to the case of direct operation, when the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and when an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. It is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal plate.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the game medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a record. Media (for example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other various operating means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection on the game medium handling device side A terminal plate may be provided (both not shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the game machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game medium possessed by the player is transmitted. May be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or the recording medium may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game store, storing it in the member recording medium, and making it possible to replay the game at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable value data communication can be executed on the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, the player may be stored by setting information such as a one-time password that only the player can know, or by using an imaging means provided in the game machine or the game medium handling device.

As described above, the game medium management device may be capable of playing games only without medals, or the game medium is inserted (hanged) by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is loaded. It may be a form in which the game is paid out, a form in which the game is possible without a medal, or a form in which the game is possible in both forms. In this case, the game medium management device may adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 46 and the hopper device 43 described above, and these are controlled by the main control circuit 91 (main control board 41). Based on the transmission of the control result, a method is adopted that enables control in which the total number of game media that the player can use for the game is recorded by an electromagnetic method and displayed. You can also.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 is described, but the slot machine or the enclosed game machine using the game ball is also provided with the game medium management device in the same manner, and the player's game is played. The medium can also be managed.

In this way, by providing the game medium management device described above, it is possible to reduce the number of devices inside the game machine as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and it is only possible to reduce the manufacturing cost of the game machine. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from coming into direct contact with the game medium, improving the game environment and reducing noise. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the game machine.

<Modification example>
In the above embodiment, the pachi-slot machine has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can be applied to a game machine or a slot machine called “pachinko”. Here, a configuration example of pachinko will be described.

[Configuration of pachinko game machines]
First, the configuration of pachinko will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 163. Note that FIG. 159 is a perspective view showing the appearance configuration of the pachinko machine in the modified example. FIG. 160 is an external front view of the pachinko machine in the modified example. FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of pachinko in the modified example. Further, FIG. 162 is a front view of a pachinko game board in a modified example.

As shown in FIGS. 159 to 161, the pachinko 210 includes a glass door 211, a wooden frame 212, a base door 213, a game board 214, a plate unit 220, a liquid crystal display device 232 for displaying an image, and a launching device for launching a game ball. It is composed of 330, a payout unit 700, a board unit 750, and the like.

The glass door 211 is attached so as to be openable and closable with respect to the base door 213. Further, an opening 211a is formed in the center of the glass door 211, and a protective glass 219 having light transmission is attached to the opening 211a. The protective glass 219 is arranged so that the back surface thereof faces the front surface of the game board 214 in a state where the glass door 211 is closed.

Further, a lamp 332 is provided on the upper part of the glass door 211. The lamp 332 has a group of LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes). The lamp 332 is controlled by the sub-control circuit 400 and lights up in a predetermined pattern to produce a game.

Further, a touch input unit (touch panel) 360a using the touch sensor module 360 is provided on the right side when viewed from the front of the protective glass 219. Since the configuration of the touch sensor module 360 is the same as that of the touch sensor module 31 in the pachislot machine 1 described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The plate unit 220 is a unit body in which the upper plate 221 and the lower plate 222 are integrated, and is attached to the lower part of the glass door 211 at the base door 213. Further, the lower plate 222 is arranged below the upper plate 221. The upper plate 221 and the lower plate 222 are formed with payout outlets 221a and 222a for lending game balls and paying out game balls (prize balls), respectively. Then, when the predetermined payout conditions are satisfied, the game balls are discharged to the upper plate 221 and the lower plate 222, respectively, via the payout outlets 221a and 222a, and in particular, the upper plate 221 is provided in the game area 215 described later. A game ball for firing is stored.

The launching device 330 is attached to the lower right position of the base door 213 when viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachinko 210. The launcher 330 includes a launch handle 226 that can be operated by the player and a panel body 227 that fits in the lower right space of the dish unit 220. The launch handle 226 is provided on the front side of the panel body 227. A driving device for launching a game ball is provided on the back surface side of the panel body 227.

A dish unit 220 and a launcher 330 are attached to the base door 213, and the panel body 227 is provided integrally with the lower right portion of the dish unit 220. Then, the pachinko game is advanced by operating the firing handle 226 by the player.

The game board 214 is arranged so as to be located on the back surface of the protective glass 219 and on the front surface side of the base door 213. Further, a spacer 231, a liquid crystal display device 232, and the like are arranged on the back surface side of the game board 214. Further, a payout unit 700 and a board unit 750 are arranged on the back surface side of the base door 213. A speaker 246 is arranged below the lower plate 222. The speaker 246 is controlled by the sub-control circuit 400 and outputs a predetermined effect sound to produce a game.

The game board 214 is entirely made of a substantially plate-shaped resin material having light transmission. Examples of the resin material having this light transmittance include various resin materials such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, and methacrylic resin. Further, the game board 214 has a game area 215 on which the game ball launched by the launching device 330 can roll and flow down, and the game area 215 is provided on the front side of the game board. The game area 215 is an area surrounded by the guide rail 230 (specifically, the outer rail 230a shown in FIG. 162, which will be described later), and is an area in which the game ball can roll. Further, in the game area 215 of the game board 214, a plurality of game nails 218 are driven into the game board 214 and provided. The configuration of the game board 214 shown in FIG. 162 is an example of a configuration of a game board including a game area in which the game ball can roll, and is not limited to this.

The liquid crystal display device 232 is arranged on the back surface side (rear surface side) of the game board 214. That is, the liquid crystal display device 232 is arranged behind the game board 214 made of a light-transmitting material. The liquid crystal display device 232 has a display area 232a capable of displaying an image related to the game. The display area 232a is arranged so as to overlap all or part of the back surface of the game board 214.

In other words, the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232 is arranged on the back surface side of the game board 214 so as to overlap at least all or a part of the game area 215 of the game board 214. Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 232 is arranged on the back surface side of the game board 214 so that the display area 232a overlaps all or part of the game area 215 and all or part of the game area outer area 216. .. In the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232, various images such as an identification symbol for effect, an effect image, and a decorative image for decoration are displayed. In this modification, the area of the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232 that faces the touch input unit 360a in the front-rear direction may be referred to as a sub screen 232c, and the other area may be referred to as a main screen 232b.

The spacer 231 is arranged between the rear side (rear side) of the game board 214 and the front side (front side) of the liquid crystal display device 232, and defines a space that serves as a flow path for the game ball that has rolled on the game board 214. To do. Further, an LED unit 253 (see FIG. 162) is provided below the spacer 231. The spacer 231 is made of a light-transmitting material. In this example, the spacer 231 is formed of a light-transmitting material, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a part of the spacer 231 is formed of a light-transmitting material. It may have been done. Further, the spacer 231 may be made of a material having no light transmission property.

The launch handle 226 is rotatable, and a launch solenoid (not shown), which is a drive device, is provided on the back side of the launch handle 226. A touch sensor (not shown) is provided on the peripheral edge of the launch handle 226. Further, inside the launch handle 226, a launch volume (not shown) is provided that changes the resistance value according to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 226 to change the electric power supplied to the launch solenoid (not shown).

When the player comes into contact with a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the peripheral edge of the launch handle 226, it is detected that the launch handle 226 is held by the player. When the launch handle 226 is held by the player and is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front side (player side), the resistance value of the launch volume (not shown) changes according to the rotation angle. Then, the electric power corresponding to the resistance value at this time is supplied to the firing solenoid (not shown). As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 221 are sequentially launched into the game area 215 of the game board 214, and the game is advanced. When the launch stop button (not shown) is pressed, the launch of the game ball is stopped even when the launch handle 226 is held and rotated.

In the lower left area of the game board 214, a decorative member having three general winning openings 256a, 256b, and 256c formed is arranged, and the portion of the decorative member facing the LED unit 253 becomes transparent. There is. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 162, the LED unit 253 can be visually recognized from the lower left region of the game board 214. The LED unit 253 includes a special symbol display device, a normal symbol display device 233, a first special symbol hold display LED 234a, 234b, a second special symbol hold display LED 234c, 234d, a normal symbol hold display LED 250a, 250b, etc. (FIG. 163 described later). See).

The special symbol display device is composed of 16 LEDs in this example. These 16 LEDs are divided into two groups consisting of eight LEDs, and details will be described later, but one group displays fluctuations triggered by a start winning prize at the first starting port 225. Yes, the other group performs a variable display triggered by a start winning prize at the second starting port 244. For convenience of explanation, in the following, one LED group is referred to as a first special symbol display device 235a (see FIG. 163 described later), and the other LED group is referred to as a second special symbol display device 235b (see FIG. 163 described later). It is called.

The LEDs of the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b perform variable display that repeatedly turns on and off in group units when a predetermined special symbol variation display start condition is satisfied. Then, the display pattern formed by turning on / off the eight LEDs is stopped and displayed as a special symbol (also referred to as an identification symbol). When the stop-displayed special symbol is in a specific stop display mode, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the hit game state (special game state) which is a state advantageous to the player. In this hit game state, as will be described later, the shutter 240 (see FIG. 162) is controlled to be in the open state, and the large winning opening 239 (see FIG. 162) is in a state where the game ball can be accepted. It becomes.

In other words, the game in which the big winning opening 239 is opened is the winning game, and in this example, two types of winning games, a big hit game and a small hit game, are prepared. Further, it is a big hit that the special symbol is in the stop display mode that shifts to the big hit game state, and it is a small hit that the special symbol is in the stop display mode that shifts to the small hit game state.

The difference between a big hit and a small hit will be described later, but in the case of a big hit, there is a high possibility that a large number of balls can be obtained, and in the case of a small hit, the number of balls that can be obtained cannot be expected so much. On the other hand, as a special symbol, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the gaming state is maintained. As described above, a game in which the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped and displayed, and the game state is changed or maintained depending on the result is referred to as a "special symbol game".

Below the special symbol display device, a normal symbol display device 233 is provided. The ordinary symbol display device 233 is composed of two display lamps, and the ordinary symbols are displayed in a variable manner by alternately turning on and off the display lamps. Then, a game in which the normal symbol is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed, and the open / closed state of the normal electric accessory 248 (see FIG. 162) differs depending on the result is called a "normal symbol game".

Below the normal symbol display device 233, normal symbol hold display LEDs 250a and 250b are provided. The normal symbol hold display LEDs 250a and 250b display the number of times the variation display of the normal symbol is held by turning on, off, or blinking (so-called "holding number", "holding number related to the normal symbol").

Specifically, when the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is suspended for one time, the normal symbol hold display LED 250a is turned on and the normal symbol hold display LED 250b is turned off. When the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is held twice, the normal symbol hold display LED 250a lights up and the normal symbol hold display LED 250b lights up. When the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is held for three times, the normal symbol hold display LED 250a blinks and the normal symbol hold display LED 250b lights up. When the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is held for four times, the normal symbol hold display LED 250a blinks and the normal symbol hold display LED 250b blinks.

Below the normal symbol hold display LEDs 250a and 250b, first special symbol hold display LEDs 234a and 234b and second special symbol hold display LEDs 234c and 234d are provided. The first special symbol hold display LEDs 234a, 234b and the second special symbol hold display LEDs 234c, 234d are the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol held by turning on, off, or blinking (so-called "holding number", "special symbol". Hold quantity for ") is displayed. The display mode of the number of reserved special symbols by the first special symbol hold display LEDs 234a, 234b and the second special symbol hold display LEDs 234c, 234d is the same as the display mode of the number of reserved symbols by the normal symbol hold display LEDs 250a, 250b. is there.

On the side of the normal symbol display device 233, a hit notification LED (not shown) that lights regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small hit is provided. In this example, since the number of rounds is constant, the LED for displaying the number of rounds is not provided. Therefore, there is no difference in notification of big hit and small hit on the display of the hit notification LED controlled by the main control circuit 260 (see FIG. 163 described later). Further, even between the sudden big hit and the small hit, as will be described later, the opening / closing pattern of the shutter 240 when the hit occurs is also selected from the same ones, and the sub-control circuit 400 (see FIG. 163 described later). The effect of the liquid crystal display device 232, the lamp 332, the speaker 246, the rotating accessory 371, which will be described later, and the like, which are controlled by the above, is the same. For this reason, the player cannot visually distinguish between the sudden big hit and the small hit.

Further, in the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232 arranged on the back surface side (rear side) of the game board 214, the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b (see FIG. 146 described later) are used for display. An effect image related to the special symbol to be displayed is displayed.

For example, during the variable display of the special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b, the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232 is composed of numbers, except in specific cases. The identification symbol (which is also the identification information for the effect), for example, a number such as "1 to 8" is displayed in a variable manner. Further, for example, the special symbol that has been variablely displayed in the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b is stopped and displayed, and the identification symbol for the effect is also displayed in the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232. Is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b, when the fluctuated or stopped special symbol has a specific stop display mode, the player is made to understand that it is a hit. The effect image is displayed in the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232. Specifically, in either the first special symbol display device 235a or the second special symbol display device 235b, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode corresponding to, for example, a jackpot in which many balls can be obtained. When this is done, the combination of the identification symbols for effect displayed in the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232 is stopped in a specific display mode (for example, all the same symbols are aligned in each of a plurality of symbol rows). The display mode), and further, the effect image for a big hit is displayed in the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232. In the case of a hit where it is difficult to obtain a large number of balls (small hit, 15-time collision big hit, 16-time collision big hit), the liquid crystal display device 232 displays an effect image that makes the player know that it is a hit. It does not have to be displayed in the area 232a.

As shown in FIG. 162, on the game board 214 of the pachinko 210, a guide rail 230 (230a and 230b), a stage 255, a first starting port 225, a second starting port 244, a passing gate 254, a shutter 240, and a big prize Game members such as a mouth 239, a general winning mouth 256a, 256b, 256c, 256d, and an ordinary electric accessory 248 are provided.

A stage 255 having a substantially inverted L shape is provided on the upper part of the game board 214. Further, a guide rail 230 is provided so as to surround the game area 215.

The guide rail 230 is composed of an outer rail 230a that partitions (defines) the game area 215 and an inner rail 230b arranged inside the outer rail 230a. The game ball launched by the launching device 330 is guided by the guide rail 230 provided on the game board 214, moves to the upper part of the game board 214, and is then provided on the plurality of game nails 218 and the game board 214. Due to the collision with the stage 255 or the like, the game board 214 flows downward while changing its traveling direction. Specifically, as the flow-down system of the game ball, the system that flows down the left side of the stage 255 (so-called left-handed) and the launch handle 226 are rotated to the right side to the maximum, and the game ball is driven into the right side of the stage 255. , There is a system (so-called right-handed) that flows down the right side of the stage 255.

Further, a first starting port 225 is provided below the stage 255 and below the center of the game board 214. Further, a passing gate 254 is provided on the upper right side of the stage 255, and a second starting port 244 is provided below the passing gate 254. An ordinary electric accessory 248 is provided at the second starting port 244. The ordinary electric accessory 248 includes a tongue-shaped member 248a that projects and retracts in the front-rear direction with respect to the plate surface of the game board 214. In this example, when the tongue-shaped member 248a is protruding, the game ball on the tongue-shaped member 248a wins the second starting port 244, and when the tongue-shaped member 248a is retracted, the game ball is second. The structure is such that the starting port 244 does not win a prize.

Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined symbol on the normal symbol display device 233 (see FIG. 163 described later), the tongue-shaped member 248a of the ordinary electric accessory 248 is in a protruding state from the retracted state for a predetermined time. , The game ball can easily enter the second starting port 244. The ordinary electric accessory 248 is not limited to the one that projects and retracts the tongue-shaped member 248a, and may be, for example, a pair of blade members that open and close (so-called electric tulip).

Further, when the game ball is driven into the right side of the stage 255, the game nail 218 is driven into the path where the game ball rolls from the right side of the stage 255 to the first starting port 225, and the game nail 218 is used. , It is impossible for the game ball to win the first starting port 225 from the right side of the stage 255.

When the game ball passes through the passing gate 254 during the variable display of the normal symbol, the display mode by the normal symbol hold display LEDs 250a and 250b is switched, and the passing gate is displayed until the normal symbol being displayed in the variable display is stopped. Execution (start) of the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to 254 is suspended. After that, when the normal symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the reserved normal symbol is started.

When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed as a normal symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 233, an effect image for letting the player know that the ordinary symbol lottery is a win is displayed in the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232. It may be done.

Further, a shutter 240 for opening and closing the large winning opening 239 is arranged directly below the first starting opening 225. An out port 257 is formed at the lowermost portion of the game area 215 immediately below the shutter 240. At the lower left side of the game area 215, three general winning openings 256a, 256b, and 256c are provided. Further, a general winning opening 256d is provided at the lower right side of the game area 215.

Further, a winning area is provided in the first starting opening 225 described above, and a first starting winning opening switch 316 (see FIG. 163 described later) is provided in this winning area. A winning area is provided in the second starting opening 244, and a second starting winning opening switch 317 (see FIG. 163 described later) is provided in this winning area. When a game medium such as a game ball is detected by the first start winning opening switch 316, the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 235a is started.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting port 225 during the variation display of the special symbol, the game ball enters the first starting port 225 until the special symbol displayed in the variation display is stopped and displayed. Execution (start) of the variable display of the special symbol based on is suspended. After that, when the special symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the reserved special symbol is started. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display device 235a based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 225 is referred to as the first special symbol.

Further, when a game medium such as a game ball is detected by the second start winning opening switch 317, the second special symbol display device 235b starts the variable display of the special symbol. In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting port 244 during the variation display of the special symbol, the game ball enters the second starting port 244 until the special symbol displayed in the variation display is stopped and displayed. Execution (start) of the variable display of the special symbol based on is suspended. After that, when the special symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the reserved special symbol is started.

In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display device 235b based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 244 is referred to as the second special symbol.

In this example, the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b do not change the special symbol at the same time. Further, in this example, the variation display of the special symbol is performed with priority given to the start winning prize to the second starting port 244. The first start port 225 and the second start port 244 of this example are examples of start areas provided in the game area of the game board 214 through which the game ball can pass.

In this example, an upper limit is set for the number of times that the execution of the variation display of the special symbol is suspended, and the variation display of the special symbol is suspended due to the entry into the first start port 225 and the second start port 244. The upper limit of the number is set to 4 times each. Specifically, when the special symbol game of the first special symbol is held four times, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the fluctuating first special symbol is stored in the main RAM 270 (see FIG. 163 described later). The information of the four special symbol games stored and held as the start storage information in the first special symbol start storage area (0) of the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage. It is stored in the area (4) as start storage information.

Similarly, for the special symbol game of the second special symbol, when the special symbol game of the second special symbol is held four times, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is the main. The information of the four special symbol games stored and held as start storage information in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the RAM 270 (see FIG. 163 described later) is the second special symbol start storage area (1). ) -The second special symbol start storage area (4) is stored as start storage information. Therefore, in this example, the special symbol game can be held up to 8 times.

Further, in this example, another predetermined variable display start condition of the special symbol is that the special symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, the variable display of the special symbol is started every time the predetermined variable display start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

In the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b, when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode and the game state shifts to the big hit game state, the shutter 240 is in an open state where it is easy to accept the game ball. It is driven so as to become. As a result, the large winning opening 239 is in an open state (first state) in which it is easy to accept the game ball.

On the other hand, the large winning opening 239 provided on the back side (rear side) of the shutter 240 has an area (not shown) having a count switch 304 (see FIG. 163 described later), and a predetermined number of game balls (not shown) in that area. The shutter 240 is driven to be in the open state until it passes (for example, 7 pieces) or a predetermined time (for example, about 0.1 second or about 30 seconds) elapses. Then, when either the condition of winning a predetermined number of game balls to the large winning opening 239 or the elapse of a predetermined time is satisfied in the open state, the shutter 240 is driven so as to be in a closed state in which it is difficult to accept the game balls. .. As a result, the large winning opening 239 is closed (second state), which makes it difficult to accept the game ball.

A game in which the large winning opening 239 is in a state where it is easy to accept a game ball in a certain period of time is called a round game. Therefore, the shutter 240 is opened during the round game and closed during the round game. Further, the number of round games is counted as the number of rounds such as "1" round and "2" round. For example, the first round of a round game may be referred to as a first round, and the second round may be referred to as a second round. In this example, the shutter 240 may be opened and closed a plurality of times in one round, and the open state may be set to a fixed time.

Next, the shutter 240 driven from the open state (first state) to the closed state (second state) is driven to the open state again. That is, when the round game is over, the next round game can be continued. The game from the first round round game to the end of the round game (final round game) in which the next round game cannot be continued is called a special game or a big hit game. In this example, the number of round games in all jackpots is 15 rounds.

Further, in this example, when the special symbol has a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b and the gaming state shifts to the small hit gaming state, the large winning opening 239 The shutter 240 is driven so as to be in an open state in which the game ball can be easily received 15 times or 16 times. The small hit game is a game in which the big winning opening 239 is opened 15 or 16 times, and there is no concept of a round game like a big hit. However, the configuration of the large winning opening 239 and the shutter 240 described above is provided on the game board 214 and can be changed between an open state in which the game ball is easy to enter and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter. This is an example of a configuration of a variable member.

Further, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 225, the second starting port 244, the general winning opening 256a to 256d, and the large winning opening 239, a preset number of game balls are set according to the type of each winning opening. Is paid out to the upper plate 221 or the lower plate 222.

Further, in this example, after the jackpot game is completed, the game state shifts to a time-saving state in which the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery becomes a high probability state, and the reserved balls of the special symbol game are easily accumulated by the support by the ordinary electric accessory 248. In some cases. In this example, in the time saving state, passing the game ball through the passing gate 254 is a condition for executing the normal symbol lottery, so that the game proceeds while hitting right.

Further, when a big hit occurs in the right-handed state, it is possible to win a prize in the big winning opening 239 by continuing the right-handed hit as it is. In addition, when the support by the ordinary electric accessory 248 cannot be received, the game proceeds while hitting left.

Further, a rotating accessory unit 370 is provided on the game board 214 of the pachinko machine 210.
The rotating accessory unit 370 is arranged at the lower right of the game board 214, and is an accessory driving unit 372 (see FIG. 163) including a rotating accessory (gear accessory) 371 and a stepping motor for rotating the rotating accessory 371. ) And. The rotating accessory 371 is controlled by the sub-control circuit 400, and when a predetermined effect is performed, the rotating accessory 371 rotates in a pattern corresponding to the effect content to produce a game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 160, three effect buttons 280a, 280b, and 280c are provided on the front side of the upper plate 221 and are provided during a mini-game such as a push game, card turning, sugoroku, etc. By pressing the effect button, the effect display content on the liquid crystal display device 232 can be changed. An image having the same shape as the effect buttons 280a, 280b, and 280c is displayed on the sub screen 232c of the liquid crystal display device 232, and a position (for example, front and back) corresponding to the position where the above image of the sub screen 232C on the touch input unit 361 is displayed. The effect display content on the liquid crystal display device 232 may be changed according to the touch of the finger (the portion facing the direction). In this case, the installation of the three effect buttons 280a, 280b, and 280c can be omitted.

[Pachinko circuit configuration]
Next, the circuit configuration of the pachinko 210 in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 163. Note that FIG. 163 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the pachinko machine 210 of this example.

The pachinko 210 is mainly composed of a main control circuit 260 that controls the game and a sub control circuit 400 that controls the effect according to the progress of the game.

The main control circuit 260 includes a main CPU 266, a main ROM 268 (read-only memory), and a main RAM 270 (read / write memory).

The main CPU 266 is connected to the main ROM 268, the main RAM 270, and the like, and has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the main ROM 268.

The main ROM 268 stores various programs for controlling the operation of the pachinko 210 by the main CPU 266, various programs for causing the main CPU 266 to execute the main processing, and various tables required for the various processing.

The main RAM 270 is a temporary storage area of the main CPU 266, and has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables required for various processes. In this example, an example in which the main RAM 270 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 266 will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the temporary storage area of the main CPU 266 can be any literacy storage medium. Can be used.

Further, the main control circuit 260 includes an initial reset circuit 264, an I / O port 271 and a command output port 272. The initial reset circuit 264 is a circuit that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 266. The I / O port 271 is a port for transmitting input signals from various devices to the main CPU 266 and a port for transmitting output signals from the main CPU 266 to various devices. The command output port 272 is a port for transmitting a command output from the main CPU 266 to the sub control circuit 400.

Further, the main control circuit 260 includes a backup capacitor 274. The backup capacitor 274 is provided to quickly supply power to, for example, the main RAM 270 at the time of power failure. As a result, various data stored in the main RAM 270 can be retained even when the power is cut off.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 260.

In this example, as various devices corresponding to the signals output from the main control circuit 260, the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b, which perform variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game, and the special symbol game The first special symbol hold display LEDs 234a, 234b and the second special symbol hold display LEDs 234c, 234d, which display the number of holdings of the variable display of the special symbol, and the normal symbol display device that variablely displays the normal symbol as the identification symbol in the normal symbol game. 233, Normal symbol hold display LEDs 250a and 250b for displaying the number of holdable numbers of the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game, start port solenoid 318 and shutter 240 for setting the tongue-shaped member 248a of the normal electric accessory 248 into a protruding state or a retracted state. The grand prize opening solenoid 320 or the like that drives the winning opening 239 to open or close the winning opening 239 is connected to the main control circuit 260.

Further, the main control circuit 260 is used to transmit data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk and a function of displaying the number of hits, and a hall computer that manages pachinko gaming machines in the entire hall. The external terminal plate 510 is connected.

Further, the main control circuit 260 includes, for example, a count switch 304 that supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 260 when the game ball passes through the region of the large winning opening 239, and general winning openings 256a to 256d. When the game ball passes through the general winning opening switches 306, 308, 310, 312 and the passing gate 254 that supply a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 260 when the game ball passes, the predetermined detection signal is mainly used. When the game ball wins the passage gate switch 314 and the first start port 225 supplied to the control circuit 260, the first start winning port switch 316 and the second start port 244 supply a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 260. The second start winning opening switch 317 that supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 260 when the game ball wins, and the backup that clears the backup data at the time of power failure etc. according to the operation of the manager of the game store. A clear switch 324 or the like is connected.

Further, a payout / launch control circuit 326 is connected to the main control circuit 260. A payout device 328 for paying out the game ball, a launcher 330 for firing the game ball, and a card unit 500 are connected to the payout / launch control circuit 326. The card unit 500 can be transmitted and received to and from the ball lending operation panel 355 that outputs a signal requesting the card unit 500 to lend a game ball by the operation of the player.

The payout / launch control circuit 326 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 260 and the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 500, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 328. The payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 328 is controlled. Further, the payout / launch control circuit 326 supplies electric power to the launch solenoid according to the rotation angle when the launch handle 226 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the game is played. Controls the firing motion of the ball.

Further, a sub-control circuit 400 is connected to the command output port 272. The sub control circuit 400 controls various effects in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 260, that is, control of the rotating accessory unit 370, display control in the liquid crystal display device 232, and sound generated from the speaker 246. Control, control of the lamp including the lamp 332, and the like. Further, the sub-control circuit 400 has the same configuration as the sub-control circuit 101 described in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above embodiment, and can execute the same various processes.

That is, the sub-control circuit 400 can execute the same control as the above-mentioned accessory control task (see FIG. 120) in the control of the rotating accessory unit 370. It should be noted that some of the character pattern data constituting the character effect sequence in this case has a start condition for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the character pattern data, and this start condition includes For example, input to the touch input unit 361 and pressing of the effect buttons 280a, 280b, and 280c are set.

Further, the sub-control circuit 400 can execute the same control as the above-mentioned lamp control task (see FIG. 121) in the control of the lamp including the lamp 332 and the like. In the control of the lamp, the processing of S915 to S917 of the lamp control task (see FIG. 121) is omitted. Further, some of the lamp pattern data constituting the lamp effect sequence in this case have a start condition for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the lamp pattern data, and the start condition includes, for example, touch. Input to the input unit 361 and pressing of the effect buttons 280a, 280b, and 280c are set.

Further, the sub-control circuit 400 can execute the same control as the sound control task (see FIG. 122) in the control related to the voice generated from the speaker 246. Note that some of the sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence in this case has a start condition for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the sound pattern data, and the start condition includes, for example, touch. Input to the input unit 361 and pressing of the effect buttons 280a, 280b, and 280c are set.

Further, the sub-control circuit 400 executes the same control as the animation control task (see FIG. 123) in the display control of the liquid crystal display device 232. In the display control, S947 of the animation control task (see FIG. 123) is a case where the animation effect sequence data set in S944 becomes a stop display mode in which a predetermined effect, for example, a special symbol shifts to a big hit game state. It is a process of determining whether or not the animation production sequence is related to the production of. In addition, some of the animation pattern data constituting the animation effect sequence in this case has a start condition for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the animation pattern data, and the start condition includes, for example, touch. Input to the input unit 361 and pressing of the effect buttons 280a, 280b, and 280c are set.

Further, the sub-control circuit 400 can execute the same processes as the touch panel control task (see FIG. 124) and the touch panel input editing process (see FIG. 125) in the control of the touch sensor module 360. Further, when the sub-control circuit 400 causes an operator such as a player to select a selectable item displayed on the liquid crystal display device 232 by the touch sensor module 360, the sub-control circuit 400 performs the same OFF edge execution as the pachislot 1, that is, touch. The selection can be detected when the finger is released from the input unit 360a.

Further, the sub-control circuit 400 can execute the same processes as the hall menu task (see FIG. 127), the hall menu process (see FIG. 129), and the maintenance process (see FIG. 131). That is, the sub control circuit 400 can display a cross-shaped grid line composed of a vertical line and a horizontal line orthogonal to the vertical line on the sub screen 232c at the time of maintenance processing.

As described above, also in the pachinko 210 of the above-described modified example, the same processing as the above-mentioned processing described in the pachi-slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment can be executed by the sub-control circuit 400. Therefore, the same effect as that of the embodiment of the pachislot machine 1 can be obtained.

The gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, including its operation and effect. However, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described here, and it goes without saying that the present invention includes various embodiments as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, when the "bonus winning" is determined by the bonus lottery, any one of "SBB", "BB", and "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery. However, as the game machine of the present invention, either "SBB or BB" or "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery, and either "SBB" or "BB" is determined at the end of the precursory game. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the "BB precursor flag" is turned on when the precursor game of "SBB" or "BB" is being played. That is, the precursor games of "SBB" and "BB" are managed by the "BB precursor flag". However, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured to provide a precursor flag for "SBB" and a precursor flag for "BB". In this case, the production of the precursor game corresponding to "SBB" and the production of the precursor game corresponding to "BB" may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first ART (“SBB”, “BB”, “RB”) and the second ART are terminated on the condition that the games of the number of staying games are exhausted. However, the first ART and the second ART according to the present invention may be configured to end on the condition that the navigation (notification of display auxiliary information) is performed a predetermined number of times.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of staying games of "SBB" in the first ART is fixed to "100". However, the "SBB" according to the present invention may have a configuration in which the number of games to be added to the number of staying games is added (added) to the number of staying games in the "SBB" as in the case of the "BB".

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of games for producing the additional additions A, B, and C that may occur in BR is fixed to "2". That is, when the effects of the additional additions A, B, and C are determined, "2" is set in the additional addition game number counter. However, the number of games for producing the additional additions A, B, and C according to the present invention may be variable. For example, the value set in the additional game number counter may be different depending on the type of the additional additional effect (additional additions A, B, C).

Further, in the present embodiment, the mode in which "50" is determined as the number of staying games of the second ART has been described. However, instead of this, a predetermined number of games may be set as one set (for example, one set "50" games), and the number of games of the second ART may be set by a plurality of sets determined by lottery. For example, the number of staying games in the second ART may be set to two sets of one set "50" games, that is, a total of "100" games.
Further, in this case, a predetermined period may be provided in which the stop order is not notified between sets and the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted for each game. In addition, the number of additional games may be drawn for each game in this predetermined period. Then, before the end of this predetermined period (when the predetermined number of games reaches the predetermined number of games, before the predetermined number of games is reached), the stop order other than the forward push is performed. When the stop operation (irregular push) is performed in, the predetermined period is forcibly terminated, and the value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game from the next game of the game in which the irregular push is performed. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, as an accessory provided in the pachi-slot machine 1, a rotating accessory unit 122 having a rotating accessory 123 that is rotated by driving a stepping motor has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with an accessory that moves in the left-right direction, the up-down direction, or the front-back direction by driving, for example, a stepping motor or a solenoid.

1 ... Pachislot (game machine), 2 ... Exterior, 2a ... Cabinet, 2b ... Front door, 3L ... Left reel (variation display means), 3C ... Middle reel (variation display means), 3R ... Right reel (variation display means) ), 4L ... left display window, 4C ... middle display window, 4R ... right display window, 11 ... liquid crystal display device (display means), 16 ... start lever, 17L ... left stop button, 17C ... middle stop button, 17R ... right Stop button, 20L, 20R ... Speaker, 22 ... Reel lamp, 31 ... Touch sensor module (touch sensor module), 46S ... Medal sensor (insertion operation detection means), 64 ... Start switch (start operation detection means), 91 ... Main Control circuit (internal winning combination determination means, stop control means, game medium giving means), 93 ... main CPU, 101 ... sub control circuit (display control means, detection means), 102 ... sub CPU, 103 ... sub RAM (information storage) Means), 122 ... Rotating accessory unit, 200 ... Server

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can play a game by displaying a plurality of symbols in multiple columns in a variable manner and can control a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player.
A music output means that can output multiple songs,
A music selection means that allows the player to select a music output during the special gaming state from the plurality of music.
It is provided with an output content changing means capable of changing the output content of the music selected by the music selecting means by the player.
The plurality of songs include specific songs, and the plurality of songs include specific songs.
When the specific music is selected by the music selection means, the music output means
When the special condition is satisfied, the first part and the second part following the specific music are output in the special gaming state.
When the special condition is not satisfied, only the first part of the specific music is output in the special gaming state.
The output content changing means is the case where the specific music is selected by the music selection means, and when the special condition is not satisfied, the music output means is the specific music in the special gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that the output content can be changed so as to start the output from the second part in the above.

Images